Search filter

LEED Powerturn family product verification

Reference: L09-1599 / … .2015 Product Declaration - LEED® 2009 New Construction And Major Renovations NC & CS Manufacturer GEZE GmbH Product Name Automatic swing door drive family Powerturn Product Rating ▪ The product contains 12% recycled materials and contribute to achieve LEED credits within MR Credit 4. Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) - LEED Category IEQ Credit … : Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants … Point  IEQ Credit … : Low Emitting Materials: Paints and Coatings … Point  IEQ Credit … : Low Emitting Materials: Flooring Systems … Point  IEQ Credit … : Low Emitting Materials: Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products … Point  Materials and Resources (MR) - LEED Category MR Credit 4: Recycled Content 1-2 Points 12% MR Credit 5: Regional Materials 1-2 Points See Location MR Credit 6: Rapidly Renewable Materials … Point  MR Credit 7: Certified Wood … Point  Product Characteristics Low-noise electromechanical swing door drive for internal and external doors (single or double leaf, 70 mm overall height, with hold-open mechanism in accordance with DIN 18 263 Part 4,prepared for connection to release device, with adjustable spring force EN size 4-7, tested and certified in accordance with DIN 18650 and EN16005. Due to Smart swing function suitable to open doors manually without great effort (DIN 18040 optimized) with intelligent digital control (Category … in accordance with DIN EN 954-1 and Performance Level "d" in accordance with DIN EN ISO 13849-1). The product supports all … installation types, is available in … standard and each RAL color. About LEED & Products - www.usgbc.org This declaration helps to assess products easily according the certification system LEED® 2009 New Construction and Major Renovations NC & CS (excluded SCHOOLS). Products are not reviewed or certified by LEED. LEED credit requirements cover the performance of materials in aggregate, not the performance of individual products or brands. For more information about LEED visit www.usgbc.org/leed. The project team or the manufacturer is responsible to declare the compliance with the project requirements to achieve LEED points. Below you find an explanation of the symbols. Detailed information are on the next pages. The product classification is only valid for versions with water-dilutable coating. # # # Credit requirements fulfilled - the credit point can be achieved  Credit is not applicable to this product 22% X% of the product comply with the credit requirement — Required data not specified - for required data contact manufacturer Credit requirements are not fulfilled Notice: This declaration is a product of HOINKA GmbH. This data sheet is published in the online database greenbuildingproducts.eu. The distribution by third parties is prohibited. This declaration is no official certificate in terms of LEED. The contents are based on manufacturer specifications. In spite of a diligent treatment of all information HOINKA GmbH cannot guarantee the actuality or correctness of the published data. The interpretation of the LEED criteria requirements can differ and depend on the project and the scope of application. In spite of a diligent treatment of all information HOINKA GmbH cannot guarantee the correctness of evaluation in terms of the LEED requirements. The user of this declaration, the consumer of the product and the consultant/planner, who is advising this product in any construction projects, is responsible by himself to proof all data published in this document and to verify the permissibility for the designated application. The content of this data sheet does not manifest any legal relationship. With the publication of a new edition, this declaration can no longer be considered to be valid. The latest version is available in the internet. HOINKA GmbH ▪ greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ Lembergweg 7/1 ▪ 71067 Sindelfingen ▪ Tel. +49 7031 7659-441 ▪ Fax +49 7031 7659-443 ▪ www.greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ contact@greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ Geschäftsführer: Dipl.-Ing. Thomas Hoinka   N/A If the location of 'Harvesting & Extraction' and 'Manufacturing' is within a radius of 500 miles of the project the subproduct contributes to the credit. … % —  … %  N/A  N/A N/A … GEZE GmbH Automatische Drehtürantriebs Familie Powerturn A10 A9 A8 A7 GEZE GmbH A6 Lacquer ~ … % N/A GEZE GmbH A5 Plastics ~ … % N/A GEZE GmbH A4 Zinc die-cast ~ … % N/A GEZE GmbH A3 Copper ~ … % N/A ~ … % GEZE GmbH A2 Aluminium Notice: This declaration is a product of HOINKA GmbH. This data sheet is published in the online database greenbuildingproducts.eu. The distribution by third parties is prohibited. This declaration is no official certificate in terms of LEED. The contents are based on manufacturer specifications. In spite of a diligent treatment of all information HOINKA GmbH cannot guarantee the actuality or correctness of the published data. The interpretation of the LEED criteria requirements can differ and depend on the project and the scope of application. In spite of a diligent treatment of all information HOINKA GmbH cannot guarantee the correctness of evaluation in terms of the LEED requirements. The user of this declaration, the consumer of the product and the consultant/planner, who is advising this product in any construction projects, is responsible by himself to proof all data published in this document and to verify the permissibility for the designated application. The content of this data sheet does not manifest any legal relationship. With the publication of a new edition, this declaration can no longer be considered to be valid. The latest version is available in the internet. HOINKA GmbH ▪ greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ Lembergweg 7/1 ▪ 71067 Sindelfingen ▪ Tel. +49 7031 7659-441 ▪ Fax +49 7031 7659-443 ▪ www.greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ contact@greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ Geschäftsführer: Dipl.-Ing. Thomas Hoinka *All values are based on the unit:1 element **LEED default recycled content for steel Not specified Not specified N/A Not specified Not specified N/A N/A Not specified Not specified N/A N/A N/A Not specified Not specified N/A N/A N/A Not specified N/A N/A N/A Not specified Not specified Not specified N/A Not specified N/A N/A N/A Not specified Not specified Not specified N/A Not specified Not specified N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ~ … % GEZE GmbH A1 Steel parts Manufacturer Product Name No Not specified Not specified N/A Not specified Not specified 0% Location PostPreConsumer Consumer Harvesting/ Extraction 25%** Location Manufacturing Rapidly Renewable Material Regional Materials Recycled Content Composite Agrifiber product Flooring Systems VOCVOC in Limit in g/l g/l Mass per unit* [%] N/A Automatic swing door drive family Powerturn N/A Product Name N/A GEZE GmbH Certified Wood Manufacturer Detailed Rating Reference: L09-1599 / … .2015 Product Declaration - LEED® 2009 New Construction And Major Renovations NC & CS Reference: L09-1599 / … .2015 Product Declaration - LEED® 2009 New Construction And Major Renovations NC & CS Manufacturer GEZE GmbH Product Name Automatic swing door drive family Powerturn MR Credit 4: Recycled Content (1-2 Points) Intent To increase demand for building products that incorporate recycled content materials, thereby reducing impacts resulting from extraction and processing of virgin materials. Requirement Use materials with recycled content* such that the sum of post-consumer** recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer*** content constitutes at least 10%/20% (based on cost) of the total value of the materials in the project. The minimum percentage materials recycled for each point threshold is as follows: ▪ 10% Recycled Content -> … Point ▪ 20% Recycled Content -> … Points. * Recycled content is defined in accordance with the International Organization of Standards document, ISO 14021 — Environmental labels and declarations — Self-declared environmental claims (Type II environmental labeling). ** Postconsumer material is defined as waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as end-users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. *** Preconsumer material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process. Reutilization of materials (i.e., rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it) is excluded. Detailed Rating No Product Name Manufacturer Recycled Content PostPreConsumer Consumer Contribution of Product A1 Steel parts GEZE GmbH 25%** 0% Accountable recycled content according to LEED is 25% (1 x Post-Consumer + … x Pre-Consumer). **LEED default recycled content for steel 25% A2 Aluminium GEZE GmbH Not specified Not specified No recycled content specified. — A3 Copper GEZE GmbH Not specified Not specified No recycled content specified. — A4 Zinc die-cast GEZE GmbH Not specified Not specified No recycled content specified. — A5 Plastics GEZE GmbH Not specified Not specified No recycled content specified. — A6 Lacquer GEZE GmbH Not specified Not specified No recycled content specified. — Notice: This declaration is a product of HOINKA GmbH. This data sheet is published in the online database greenbuildingproducts.eu. The distribution by third parties is prohibited. This declaration is no official certificate in terms of LEED. The contents are based on manufacturer specifications. In spite of a diligent treatment of all information HOINKA GmbH cannot guarantee the actuality or correctness of the published data. The interpretation of the LEED criteria requirements can differ and depend on the project and the scope of application. In spite of a diligent treatment of all information HOINKA GmbH cannot guarantee the correctness of evaluation in terms of the LEED requirements. The user of this declaration, the consumer of the product and the consultant/planner, who is advising this product in any construction projects, is responsible by himself to proof all data published in this document and to verify the permissibility for the designated application. The content of this data sheet does not manifest any legal relationship. With the publication of a new edition, this declaration can no longer be considered to be valid. The latest version is available in the internet. HOINKA GmbH ▪ greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ Lembergweg 7/1 ▪ 71067 Sindelfingen ▪ Tel. +49 7031 7659-441 ▪ Fax +49 7031 7659-443 ▪ www.greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ contact@greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ Geschäftsführer: Dipl.-Ing. Thomas Hoinka Reference: L09-1599 / … .2015 Product Declaration - LEED® 2009 New Construction And Major Renovations NC & CS Manufacturer GEZE GmbH Product Name Automatic swing door drive family Powerturn MR Credit 5: Regional Materials (1-2 Points) Intent To increase demand for building materials and products that are extracted and manufactured within the region, thereby supporting the use of indigenous resources and reducing the environmental impacts resulting from transportation. Requirement Use building materials or products that have been extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of the project site for a minimum of 10% or 20%, based on cost, of the total materials value. If only a fraction of a product or material is extracted, harvested, or recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage (by weight) must contribute to the regional value. The minimum percentage regional materials for each point threshold is as follows: ▪ 10% Regional Materials -> … Point ▪ 20% Regional Materials -> … Points. Detailed Rating No Product Name Manufacturer Location Harvesting/ Extraction Location Manufacturing A1 Steel parts GEZE GmbH Not specified Not specified A2 Aluminium GEZE GmbH Not specified Not specified A3 Copper GEZE GmbH Not specified Not specified A4 Zinc die-cast GEZE GmbH Not specified Not specified A5 Plastics GEZE GmbH Not specified Not specified A6 Lacquer GEZE GmbH Not specified Not specified Notice: This declaration is a product of HOINKA GmbH. This data sheet is published in the online database greenbuildingproducts.eu. The distribution by third parties is prohibited. This declaration is no official certificate in terms of LEED. The contents are based on manufacturer specifications. In spite of a diligent treatment of all information HOINKA GmbH cannot guarantee the actuality or correctness of the published data. The interpretation of the LEED criteria requirements can differ and depend on the project and the scope of application. In spite of a diligent treatment of all information HOINKA GmbH cannot guarantee the correctness of evaluation in terms of the LEED requirements. The user of this declaration, the consumer of the product and the consultant/planner, who is advising this product in any construction projects, is responsible by himself to proof all data published in this document and to verify the permissibility for the designated application. The content of this data sheet does not manifest any legal relationship. With the publication of a new edition, this declaration can no longer be considered to be valid. The latest version is available in the internet. HOINKA GmbH ▪ greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ Lembergweg 7/1 ▪ 71067 Sindelfingen ▪ Tel. +49 7031 7659-441 ▪ Fax +49 7031 7659-443 ▪ www.greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ contact@greenbuildingproducts.eu ▪ Geschäftsführer: Dipl.-Ing. Thomas Hoinka

ANSI test summary Powerturn

February 22, 2016 Summary Page for Project No. 4786462389 (File R10889) For GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21-29, D-71229 Leonberg Our Reference: File R10889, Project Number 4786462389 Product : GEZE Powerturn Test Dates : February 12, 13 and 14, 2015 We have completed our work under the above project and this letter will serve as a letter report of our findings. For the record we used requirements from the standards for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors, ANSI/BHMA A156.10, and Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors, ANSI/BHMA A156.19 for this investigation. Test Entrapment Protection Tests (Swing Operator) General Requirements for Sensors – Activating Zones General Requirements for Sensors – Motion sensors Swinging Doors – activating and safety zones Swinging Doors – activating and safety zones Swinging Doors – activating and safety zones Swinging Doors – activating and safety zones Knowing Act Door Activation – Swinging Doors Knowing Act Door Activation – Swinging Doors Knowing Act Door Activation – Swinging Doors Knowing Act Door Activation – Swinging Doors Knowing Act Door Activation – Swinging Doors Knowing Act Door Activation – Swinging Doors Knowing Act Door Activation – Swinging Doors Entrapment Protection Tests Activation Cycle Test Standard A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.10 A156.19 A156.19 A156.19 Section 10 … .1 … .2 … .1 … .2 … . … .5 … .1 … .2 … .3 … .4 … .7 … .8 … Results Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Compliant Result: Product complies with the above-referenced sections of ANSI/BHMA A156.10 and ANSI/BHMA A156.19. Prepared and Reviewed by: Jeremy D. Zorns Jeremy D. Zorns Senior Project Engineer Department: Specialty Appliances Tel: 847 664 3820 E-mail: Jeremy.D.Zorns@ul.com

TÜV type approval certificate P-4061/14 GEZE Powerturn/GEZE Powerturn F

Powerturn fire confirmation test according to DIN EN 1634-1

TÜV certificate no. P-4061/14 Powerturn, Powerturn F, Powerturn F-IS, Powerturn F/R, Powerturn F/R-IS door drive for swing doors

Powerturn valid for variants: Powerturn (1-leaf/2-leaf), Powerturn F (1-leaf), Powerturn F-IS (2-leaf), Powerturn F/R (1-leaf), Powerturn F/R-IS (2-leaf)

Powerturn Valid for variants: Powerturn (1-leaf/2-leaf) Powerturn F (1-leaf) Powerturn F-IS (2-leaf) Powerturn F/R (1-leaf) Powerturn F/R-IS (2-leaf) 156563-05 EN Installation and service instructions  Powerturn Contents Symbols and illustrations … Product liability … Reference documents … 2 … General information … Safety instructions … Safety-conscious working … Inspection of the installed system … Environmentally conscious working … 2 Tools and aids … 3 Scope of delivery and completeness … 4 Transportation and storage … 5 Product description … 10 … .1 … .2 … .3 … .1 … .2 … .3 … .4 … .1 System description and technical data … 10 Max. range of use - Powerturn … 10 Mechanical data … 10 Electrical data … 10 Basic structure and extension … 11 Drive … 11 Roller guide rail with lever … 11 Link arm … 12 Activation devices (accessories) … 12 Types of installation … 12 Rail installation and link arm … 12 … Preparing installation … 15 … .1 … .2 … .1 … .2 … .3 … .4 … .5 … .6 … .7 … .8 General installation information … 15 Preparations to be made on site … 15 Notes on fastening the mounting plate … 16 Fitting dimensions for the installation types … 16 Transom installation hinge side with standard roller guide rail … 16 Transom installation opposite hinge side with standard roller guide rail … 17 Door leaf installation, hinge side, with standard roller guide rail … 19 Door leaf installation, opposite hinge side, with standard roller guide rail … 20 Door installation, hinge side, with link arm … 21 Transom installation opposite hinge side with link arm … 22 1-leaf installation with cover extension kit or extended cover … 23 2-leaf installation with intermediate cover kit with partitioned or continuous cover … 25 … Installation … 27 … .1 … .2 … Installing the mounting plate … 27 Cable guide surface-mounted on the hinge-side end cap … 27 Cable guide via door transmission cable for door leaf installation … 27 Sensor cable guiding via door transmission cable in the case of transom installation … 28 Preparing the electrical connection … 29 Preparing the drive … 29 Hooking the drive into the mounting plate … 30 Access to the 230 V connection with drive installed … 32 Establishing electrical plug-in connections … 33 Installing cable guides … 34 Installing the standard roller guide rail … 34 Powerturn  … .1 … .2 … .1 … .2 … Installing the integrated opening restrictor … 35 Installing the link arm bearing block … 36 Inserting the counter piece … 36 Installing the spindle extension … 36 Installing the shaft cover … 37 Fitting the mounting aid … 38 Installing and removing the lever (for installation with roller guide rail) … 38 Installing the lever … 38 Disassembling the lever … 40 Installing and removing the link arm … 41 Installing the link arm … 41 Removing the link arm … 41 Installing the integrated closing sequence selector … 42 Entries on the identification plate … 42 … Electrical connection … 44 … Mains connection … 44 … Settings … 45 … .1 … .2 … .3 … .4 Setting the closing force … 45 Closing time and latching action function for de-energised operation … 46 Final installation … 47 Breaking the end caps out … 47 Inserting end caps … 47 Attaching the cover … 49 Removing the cover and side panels … 49 10 Service and maintenance … 50 … Dangers during mechanical service … 50 Maintenance work … 50 Electrical service … 50 Electrical faults … 51 11 Powerturn installation check list … 52 12 Supplementary installation sheet for fitting the lever in the correct position … 54 …  Powerturn Symbols and illustrations Warning notices In these instructions, warning notices are used to warn against material damage and injuries. X Always read and observe these warning notices. X Observe all measures marked with the warning symbol and warning word. Warning symbol Warning word WARNING Meaning Danger to persons. Non-compliance can result in death or serious injuries. Further symbols and illustrations Important information and technical notes are highlighted to explain correct operation. Symbol Meaning means “important note”. Information to prevent property damage, to understand or optimise the operation sequences. means “additional Information” X Symbol for an action: This means you have to do something. X If there are several actions to be taken, keep to the given order. Product liability In compliance with the liability of the manufacturer for his products as defined in the German “Product Liability Act”, compliance with the information contained in this brochure (product information and intended use, misuse, product performance, product maintenance, obligations to provide information and instructions) must be ensured. Failure to comply releases the manufacturer from his statutory liability. Reference documents Type Wiring diagram Name Powerturn The diagrams are subject to change without notice. Use only the most recent version. … Powerturn … General information General information The automatic swing door drive is an incomplete machine. It complies with all the relevant regulations of the guidelines 2014/35/EU and 2014/30/EU and may be installed and operated in automatic door systems in accordance with the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer of this machine must ensure that all requirements resulting from the Machinery Directive are observed. A risk assessment must be carried out and documented. Before initial commissioning, the manufacturer of the machine must issue an EC Declaration of Conformity in accordance with Annex II of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and attach the CE marking visibly and permanently to the door system. The form „Supplementary risk assessment“ is available to support the implementation of a risk assessment. The supplementary risk assessment, installation instructions and declaration of installation for the door drive must be enclosed with the technical documents. … Safety instructions à The mandatory installation, maintenance and repair work must be performed by properly trained personnel authorised by GEZE. à The country-specific laws and regulations are to be observed during safety-related tests. à If unauthorised changes are made to the system, GEZE cannot be held liable in any way whatsoever for any resulting damage, and the statement of approval for use in escape and rescue routes is no longer valid. à GEZE does not accept any warranty for combinations with third-party products. à Furthermore, only original GEZE parts may be used for repair and maintenance work. à The connection to the mains voltage must be made by a professional electrician. Perform the power connection and protective earth connection test in accordance with VDE 0100 Part 610. à Use an on-site automatic cut-out as the line-side disconnecting device, the dimensioning of which is matched to the type, cross-section, type of routing and ambient conditions of the on-site power supply circuit. The automatic cut-out must have at least … A and max. 16 A. à Protect the display programme switch against unauthorised access. à Observe the latest versions of guidelines, standards and country-specific regulations, in particular: à ASR A1.7 “Guidelines for doors and gates” à DIN 18650 “Building hardware - Powered pedestrian doors” à DIN EN 16005 “Power operated pedestrian doorsets - Safety in use - Requirements and test methods” à DIN VDE 0100-600 “Testing electrical systems” à DIN EN 60335-2-103, DIN 18263-4 à Accident prevention regulations, especially DGUV regulation … “Principles of prevention” and DGUV regulation … “Electrical installations and equipment” The product should be installed or incorporated in such a way that effortless access to the product is guaranteed during any repairs and/or maintenance, and that any removal costs do not stand out of economic proportion to the value of the product. … General information … Safety-conscious working à à à à à à à à à à à à à à à à à … Powerturn Secure workplace against unauthorised entry. Watch the swivelling range of long system parts. Never carry out work with a high safety risk (e.g. installing the drive, cover or door leaf) while alone. Secure the cover/drive panels against falling. Use only the cables specified on the cable plan provided. Cables must be shielded in compliance with the wiring diagram. Secure loose, internal drive cables with cable ties. Before working on the electrical system disconnect the drive from the 230 V power supply and check the isolation from supply. Note that if an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) is used, the system will still be supplied with voltage despite the fact that the power supply is disconnected. Always use insulated wire-end ferrules for wire cores. Make sure of sufficient lighting. Use safety glass. Attach safety stickers to glass door leaves. Danger of injury with opened drive. Hair, clothing, cables, etc. can be drawn in by rotating parts! Danger of injury caused by unsecured crushing, impact, drawing-in or shearing spots! Danger of injury due to glass breakage! Danger of injury due to sharp edges in the drive! Danger of injury during installation through freely moving parts! Inspection of the installed system Measures for protection and prevention of pinching, impact, shearing or drawing-in spots: à Check the function of safety sensors and movement detectors. à Check protective earth connection to all metal parts that can be touched. à Perform a safety analysis (risk analysis). … Environmentally conscious working à When disposing of the door system, separate the different materials and have them recycled. à Do not dispose of batteries and rechargeable batteries with household waste. à Comply with the statutory regulations when disposing of the door system and the batteries/rechargeable batteries. … Powerturn … Tools and aids Tools and aids Tool Closer size Drill bit Ø … mm and Ø … mm Threading tap M … and M6 Allen key set … mm … mm Slot screwdriver … mm Cross-tip screwdriver PH2 Centre punch Hammer Wire stripper Crimping pliers for cables Torque spanner up to 15 Nm Installation tool for lever installation for the type of installation involving a roller guide rail Mat. no. 158454 … Scope of delivery and completeness … Scope of delivery and completeness X Open packaging units and check for completeness. Powerturn drive unit with roller guide rail or link arm à Drive unit à Drive à Set of fixing screws à Counter piece, set for fastening the lever à Mounting plate à Connection - 230V à Cover à Side panels à Cap section cover Depending on order: à Roller guide rail à Rail à Roller cpl. à Lever à Set of fixing screws à Sensor roller guide rail à Rail à Lever à Roller cpl. à Set of fixing screws or à Link arm (closer size depending on reveal depth) à Set of fixing screws à Sensor link arm à Sensor adapter Accessories (optional) Activation devices in compliance with the specifications on the wiring diagram: à Door stop buffer à Integrated opening restrictor (only for roller guide rail) à Display programme switch / service terminal ST220 / GEZEconnects à Smoke control unit à Manual trigger switch à IS kit for 2-leaf systems, see separate installation instructions à Installation tool for lever installation à Extended suspension bolt Additional optional accessories possible. … Powerturn Powerturn … Transportation and storage Transportation and storage à à à à The Powerturn drive unit is not built for hard knocks or for falling from a height. Do not throw, do not drop. Storage temperatures under –30 °C and above +60 °C can result in damage to the device. Protect against humidity. The cable binders are used as transport securing devices and must not be loosened before the construction site is reached. … Product description Powerturn … Product description … System description and technical data The Powerturn à is a swing door drive with fully automatic operation activated by sensors or push buttons, à operates electrically during opening and closing. Use on 2-leaf doors is possible in conjunction with 2x Powerturn. … .1 Max. range of use - Powerturn This chart shows maximum values for door width and door weights for the use of the Powerturn/Powerturn F. The closing time to be set must be determined in accordance with the specifications below. à The curve depicts the maximum values of the opening time for a door opening angle of up to 90°. All possible pairs can be used below the curve. X Set closing time min. … s longer than the opening time. à For transom installation-opposite hinge side-roller guide rail: Time from diagram + … s Door weight (kg) Limitation of use of Powerturn with opening times up to 90° door opening angle 620 600 580 560 540 520 500 480 460 440 420 400 380 360 340 320 300 280 260 240 220 200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 … -- 3s 700 800 900 4s 1000 1100 1200 5s 1300 1400 Door width (mm) Example calculation à Closing time = opening time + … s Example: 1200 mm with 220 kg = … s + … s = … s Differences to the actual opening time can occur depending on installation. … .2 … .3 10 Mechanical data Dimensions (H x D x L): 70 × 130 × 720 mm Max. ambient temperature range: –15 °C … +50 °C Drive mass: approx. … kg Electrical data Mains connection: 230 V AC, +10% / –14%, 50/60 Hz Capacity rating: max. 200 W Externally connectable devices: 24 V DC, max. 1200 mA 6s 1500 1600 1700 Powerturn Product description … Basic structure and extension … .1 Drive … 2 … 4 … 6 … 8 … Side panels Mounting plate Drive axle, continuous Motor gear unit Control unit Cover Cap section cover E-cover Connector panel … 8 … .2 Roller guide rail with lever Installation depends on the type of installation chosen. … Standard roller guide rail with lever: … 2 … 4 End cap Roller guide rail Suspension bolt cpl. Roller lever … 1 … 2 Sensor roller guide rail with lever: … 2 … 4 … 3 … Spacer blocks Roller guide rail Suspension bolt cpl. Roller lever End cap … 1 … 2 … 11 Product description … .3 Powerturn Link arm Standard link arm: Sensor link arm (with link arm adapter): … .4 Activation devices (accessories) Further information under „Reference documents“ on page 4, Wiring diagram. … Types of installation à The opening angle of the door always has to be limited by a door stop. à Loads due to wind pressure, negative pressure or excess pressure must be taken into account. à The 2-leaf version corresponds to the 1-leaf type of installation. à We recommend the installation type involving link arms for the external doors. The Powerturn allows the following types of installation, each in DIN left and DIN right: … .1 Rail installation and link arm Type of installation Transom installation hinge side rail Dimension Reveal depth LT [mm] Door overlap Ü [mm] Max. door opening angle TÖW [°] Standard roller guide rail L = [mm] Lever L = [mm] Hinge clearance [mm] EN class / Closing torque (at 0–4°) [Nm] Transom installation opposite hinge side rail Reveal depth + door leaf thickness [mm] Max. door opening angle TÖW [°] Standard roller guide rail L = [mm] Lever L = [mm] Hinge clearance [mm] EN class / Closing torque (at 0–4°) [Nm] 12 Powerturn Powerturn F 0–100 5) (60–200) 1, 5) 0–100 0–30 approx. 102–133 2) 691 330 190 4–6 / 59 (70) 6) max. 100 approx. 108 3) 691 450 190 4–6 / 63 (65) 6) Powerturn Product description Type of installation Door installation hinge side rail Dimension Powerturn Powerturn F Reveal depth LT [mm] Door overlap Ü [mm] Max. door opening angle TÖW [°] Standard roller guide rail L = [mm] Lever L = [mm] Hinge clearance [mm] EN class / Closing torque (at 0–4°) [Nm] 0–50 0–30 approx. 126 3) 738 330 220 4–6 / 70 (78) 6) Door installation opposite hinge side rail Reveal depth LT [mm] Max. door leaf thickness [mm] Max. door opening angle TÖW [°] Standard roller guide rail L = [mm] Lever L = [mm] Hinge clearance [mm] EN class / Closing torque (at 0–4°) [Nm] … 100 7) approx. 104 738 450 220 5–6 / 59 (62) 6) Door installation hinge side link arm Reveal depth LT [mm] Door overlap Ü [mm] Hinge clearance [mm] Max. door opening angle TÖW [°] EN class / Closing torque (at 0–4°) [Nm] Transom installation opposite hinge side link arm Standard reveal depth LT [mm] Reveal depths LT with link arm adapter for sensor link arm [mm] Max. door leaf thickness [mm] Max. door opening angle TÖW [°] Hinge clearance [mm] EN class / Closing torque (at 0–4°) [Nm] … 0–30 … 220 approx. 115 6–7 / 124 (128) 6) up to 510 up to 300 up to 560 up to 300 150 approx. 110–135 2,3,4) 190 6–7 / 97 (123) 6) 1) With lever (450 mm) 2) Refer to the following charts to determine the max. door opening angle 3) TÖW through a collision between the lever/drive and the door/frame 4) Transom installation-opposite hinge side-link arm/reveal-max. door opening angle chart - see below 5) Transom installation-hinge side-rail/reveal-max. door opening angle chart - see below 6) Values in brackets at max. door opening angle 95° Possible damage to the drive if the prescribed closing torque is not observed. 7) If the max. door leaf thickness is exceeded, the roller guide rail must be moved 13 Product description Powerturn Max. door opening angle [°] Transom installation-opposite hinge side-link arm / reveal / max. door opening angle chart 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 … 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 180 200 Reveal depth [mm] Door opening angle (TÖW) Door opening angle (TÖW) with sensor link arm Max. door opening angle [°] Transom installation-hinge side-rail / reveal / max. door opening angle chart 140 130 * 120 * 110 * * 100 90 80 … 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Reveal depth [mm] * Preload Lever 330 mm Lever 450 mm (not permissible for Powerturn F) See sales unit: Roller guide rail Powerturn transom installation opposite hinge side An integrated opening restrictor has no effect when the reveal depth is > 130 mm 14 Powerturn Preparing installation … Preparing installation … General installation information à Observe all the instructions. Incorrect installation can result in serious injuries. à Observe the specified ambient temperature range at the installation location of the drive. à After completing installation, check the settings and functionality of the drive. … .1 Preparations to be made on site Checking of the location conditions and the required space à The substructure must ensure safe attachment of the drive. à The sub-structure must be able to withstand a force load of 700 Nm. à The bottom edge of the element mounted at the lowest point (roller guide rail or link arm) must be mounted at least … m above the floor. X Only use suitable means of fastening such as wall plugs, riveting nuts, etc. X Before installation of the drive check whether the door leaf is in a good mechanical state and can be opened and closed easily. X Lay cables in accordance with the cable plan. X Check the planned type of installation on the leaf or frame profile (see section … ). min. … mm* min. 19 mm Check the space available X Maintain free space of at least … mm above the drive *) X Maintain free space of at least 19 mm between the upper row of holes and the ceiling. * For versions with smoke switch see the separate installation instructions for the minimum clearance. With a clearance of 5-10 mm, the connector panel must be loosened during assembly of the drive, cf. chapter … Explanation of hinge clearance There is a dotted line (3) on the mounting plate (2). The tape measure (1) can be fastened to the dotted line. Explanation of screwing point There are a total of … screwing points (5) with … drill holes each in the mounting plate (2), one inner and one outer drill hole. The outer drill holes are to be preferred for fastening the mounting plate.      15 Preparing installation … .2 Powerturn Notes on fastening the mounting plate à Make sure the mounting plate is in the correct position, see directional arrow (4). à Set one screw at all eight screwing points (5), preferably at the outer screwing points. à Screw the mounting plate (2) on using … screws. The tightening torque required depends on the base and the fasteners used. Base Steel/aluminium Concrete, solid stone Wood, drywall Fasteners Rivet nut made of steel with countersunk head, Countersunk head screw Plastic all-purpose dowel, Dowel screw with countersunk head Fitting screw with countersunk head Size M6, M6 x 35 … x 46, … x 60 … x 40 Tightening torque … Nm … Nm à Installation and use of the fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. à Minimum requirements for rivet nut made of steel with countersunk head: 7000 N extraction force … Fitting dimensions for the installation types … .1 Transom installation hinge side with standard roller guide rail à Hole pattern DIN left and DIN right reversed. à Follow different installation instructions for a sensor roller guide rail. Fastening DIN left Fastening DIN right … 1 … 3 … 16 X4 X4 … Dimensional reference centre of hinge/top edge of door concealed line-feed possible in the hatched area, e.g. Ø 20 mm for the mains connection cable or low-voltage connection (a side line-feed is also possible as an option, see chapter … ) Directional arrow for precise positioning of the mounting plate Hinge size 190 mm Powerturn Preparing installation Space requirement and fastening of standard roller guide rail 720 X1 36 66 86 X2 92 122 142 X3 25 55 75 Suspension bolt Standard 23 mm elongated X4 10 33 X5 26 49 AV L … .2 Spindle extension Lever length … 6 * … 50 50 X5 7* … 5 50 AV … 30 50 X4 691 50 30 X1 = 36 + AV L = 330 mm X2 10 22 10 130 42 190 Base - Upper edge of door Space requirement for sensors important functional dimension Transom installation opposite hinge side with standard roller guide rail à Hole pattern DIN left and DIN right reversed. à Follow different installation instructions for a sensor roller guide rail. Fastening DIN right … Y4 Y4 … Fastening DIN left … 2 … 4 Dimensional reference centre of hinge/bottom edge of frame concealed line-feed possible in the hatched area, e.g. Ø 20 mm for the mains connection cable or low-voltage connection (a side line-feed is also possible as an option, see chapter … ) Directional arrow for precise positioning of the mounting plate Hinge size 190 mm 17 Preparing installation Powerturn Space requirement and fastening of standard roller guide rail 720 130 Y2 72 102 122 Y3 … 35 55 Suspension bolt Standard 23 mm elongated Y4 30 53 Y5 46 69 AV L 18 Spindle extension Lever length Y2 = 72 + AV 10 22 10 Y5 30 … 6 50 50 … 6 * 50 Y1 16 46 66 … 7* 691 50 AV … 30 50 Y1 = 16 + AV L = 450 mm 30 Y4 42 190 Base lower edge of lintel Space requirement for sensors important functional dimension Powerturn … .3 Preparing installation Door leaf installation, hinge side, with standard roller guide rail Hole pattern DIN left and DIN right reversed. Fastening DIN left Fastening DIN right … 1 … 3 … Dimensional reference centre of hinge/top edge of door Directional arrow for precise positioning of the mounting plate Hinge size 220 mm Space requirement and fastening of standard roller guide rail 738 720 X2 72 102 122 Suspension bolt Standard 23 mm elongated X4 30 53 X5 46 69 Spindle extension Lever length 7* X5 X1 16 46 66 X4 … X2 X1 = 16 + AV AV … 30 50 50 220 42 10 22 10 L = 330 AV L 130 30 … 5 50 50 … 5 * 50 30 Base - Upper edge of door Space requirement for sensors important functional dimension 19 Preparing installation … .4 Powerturn Door leaf installation, opposite hinge side, with standard roller guide rail Hole pattern DIN left and DIN right reversed. Fastening DIN right Fastening DIN left … 3 … 2 … Dimensional reference centre of hinge/bottom edge of frame Directional arrow for precise positioning of the mounting plate Hinge size 220 mm Space requirement and fastening of standard roller guide rail 738 AV … 30 50 Y1 36 66 86 Y2 92 122 142 Suspension bolt Standard 23 mm elongated Y4 10 33 Y5 46 69 20 Spindle extension Lever length 50 42 Y5 7* Y2 220 … 5 … 50 50 … 5 * 50 Y1 = 36 + AV L = 450 AV L 130 30 Y4 720 10 22 10 30 Base lower edge of lintel Space requirement for sensors important functional dimension Powerturn … .5 Preparing installation Door installation, hinge side, with link arm Hole pattern DIN left and DIN right reversed. Fastening DIN left Fastening DIN right … 3 … 2 … Dimensional reference centre of hinge Directional arrow for precise positioning of the mounting plate Hinge size 220 mm Space requirement and fastening of link arm 30 AV X1 16 46 66 X2 72 102 122 Spindle extension 7* X2 … 5 50 50 … 5 * … 50 AV … 30 50 100 50 220 X1 = 16 + AV 42 10 10 22 30 720 Base - Upper edge of door Space requirement for sensors important functional dimension 21 Preparing installation … .6 Powerturn Transom installation opposite hinge side with link arm Hole pattern DIN left and DIN right reversed. Fastening DIN right Fastening DIN left … 30* 30* … 1 … 3 … * Dimensional reference centre of hinge concealed line-feed possible in the hatched area, e.g. Ø 20 mm for the mains connection cable or low-voltage connection (a side line-feed is also possible as an option, see chapter … ) Directional arrow for precise positioning of the mounting plate Hinge size 190 mm With sensor adapter … mm Space requirement and fastening of link arm 720 190 LT 8** AV 22 Y2 72 102 122 Spindle extension Y3 … 35 55 … 6 50 50 … 6 * ** LT 50 Y1 16 46 66 50 AV … 30 50 Base lower edge of lintel Space requirement for sensors With sensor adapter … mm important functional dimension Reveal depth Y2 = 72 + AV AV = 30 30* Y1 = 16 + AV 100 10 22 10 42 130 … Powerturn … .7 Preparing installation 1-leaf installation with cover extension kit or extended cover Only install approved components. Partitioned cover, length = min. 115 mm X Install the mounting plate (1) (refer to chapter … ).  X Slide the template (2) into the mounting plate (1).  Adjust the base plate (4) to the template (2) or the shape of the door using a spirit level if necessary. X Mark the drill hole positions. X Remove the template.  X  If a smoke switch is installed, the V-marking (3) must be pointing towards the drive.  X Drill bore-holes and screw down the base plate (4).    If the base plate is longer than 500 mm, additional fixing drill holes are prepared in the centre of the base plate.  X Fix the cover fixings (5) with … cylinder head screws M5 × 10 (6) each.  If the base plate is longer than 500 mm, an additional cover fixing is provided in the centre.  23 Preparing installation X X Powerturn Take the side panel (7) off the drive. Push the additional side panel (8) into the side panel from below. Not for continuous cover. X Attach the side panel (9) to the cover fixing (5) using … screws M5 × 10 (10).  X Push the divided cover (11) or, as the case may be, the continuous cover, onto the cover fixing.  24   Powerturn … .8 Preparing installation 2-leaf installation with intermediate cover kit with partitioned or continuous cover  X    Adjust the position of the base plate (2) in the centre or in relation to the shape of the door, using a spirit level if necessary. If a smoke switch is installed, the V-marking (1) must be pointing towards the active leaf. Vertical adjustment for à Transom installation hinge side with standard roller guide rail see chapter … .1 à Transom installation opposite hinge side with standard roller guide rail see chapter … .2 à Transom installation opposite hinge side with link arm see chapter … .6 Mark the drill hole positions for the base plate (1). X Screw down the base plate. X Insert the template (2) into the base plate (1). X   Slide the mounting plate (3) into the template. X Adjust the position in relation to the shape of the door using a spirit level. X Mark the drill holes. X Remove the template (2). X  25 Preparing installation X X Powerturn Screw down the mounting plate (3). Install the 2nd drive on the right side in the same way.   26 Powerturn … Installation Installation Heed the installation check list in chapter 11. … Installing the mounting plate à Make sure the mounting plate is in the correct position, see directional arrow (1). à Use one screw per screwing point (2). Refer also to “Explanation of screwing point” on page 15. à Prefer the outer drill grooves. X   Screw the mounting plate down at a minimum of … screwing points. … Cable guide surface-mounted on the hinge-side end cap … .1 Cable guide via door transmission cable for door leaf installation X Push the connecting bracket (2) under the mounting plate (1) and screw it tight using … screws.   X Screw the door transmission cable onto the connecting bracket (2).   Preparing end cap The pocket (4) only needs to be cut out if a door transmission cable is being used. à For all other installation types, carefully detach both side panels (1) and (2). 27 Installation Powerturn Remove the side panels from the packaging and carefully detach the left-hand side panel (2). X Dispose of the gate (3). X … Cut the pocket (4) out of the end cap (2) along the perforation. X Install the end cap, see chapter … .2. X … .2 Sensor cable guiding via door transmission cable in the case of transom installation Preparing end cap Cutting out a pocket (4) and drilling through the screw domes (5) is only necessary when a drip loop is used from the sensor to the drive. Remove the end caps from the packaging and carefully detach the left-hand end cap (2). X Dispose of the gate (3). X … Cut the pocket (4) out of the end cap (2) along the perforation. X Drill blind holes with a drilling diameter of … mm on the screw domes (5). X … 5 … 28 Powerturn Installation Insert corrugated tube (8) into the wall bracket (6). X Use the two enclosed screws (7) to install the wall bracket (6) on the end cap (2). X … 6 … 8 Place the sensor cable in the corrugated tube (8). X Connect sensor cable in accordance with the installation instructions for the sensor (9). X … Preparing the electrical connection Lay the 230 V connection cable (1) flat above the plug connection (2). X For further working steps, see the wiring diagram Powerturn, mat. no. 154919. X    …    Preparing the drive à For the correct position and alignment of the drive, see chapter … . X At the drive, detach the clamping claw (3) located on the lower side after the drive has been installed. X Only loosen the clamping claw by approx. 3–6 mm otherwise the flat ribbon cable could slip out of the clamping claw (3). Danger of crushing the cable. 29 Installation X Powerturn Remove the e-cover (1).  Undo the … screws (4) on the lower clamping claw (3). X Unscrew and keep the screw (2) M6 × 40. X    … Hooking the drive into the mounting plate à The connector panel must be loosened with 5-10 mm clearance to the ceiling above, see chapter … . X If there is insufficient space above the drive, insert the counter piece (1) and the optional spindle extension before the drive is installed (see chapter … and … ). 30 Powerturn Installation X Hook the drive (2) into the mounting plate (3) from above. The clamping claw (4) and the shoulder (5) of the mounting plate (3) must line up with each other for this. Push the drive on the mounting plate firmly towards the door hinge (range of movement = approx. 20 mm). Check for smooth movement. X Make sure that no cables become jammed in the connector panel. X X à When it comes to the installation of the door, the hinge-side side panel must be clipped on before the drive is pushed in the direction of the hinge. The drive is considered to have been installed properly when the screw tunnel (8) for the screw (7) is aligned. 31 Installation Powerturn Screw in the screw (7) (M6 × 40) (tightening torque approx. 10 Nm). X Tighten the screws (6) at the lower clamping claw (tightening torque approx. 10 Nm). The drive is now fixed on the mounting plate. X … 6 … 7 … Access to the 230 V connection with drive installed Remove the cover (3), e-cover (2) and the side panel (1). X Unplug the plug-in connectors from the plugs (4) of the connector panel. X     X Pay attention to the crown gear while removing the earthing screw. X Unscrew and keep the earthing screw (5). X Pull the flat ribbon cable (6) off the connector panel (7).    32 Powerturn X Installation Use a screwdriver to remove the connector panel (7) incl. housing, and detach it in the direction of the arrow.  The 230 V terminal (8) is now accessible and can be connected.  X … Then mount all parts again in reverse order. Make sure that the ribbon cables have been laid properly again. Establishing electrical plug-in connections X Connect the sensor cables and control cables (1) to the enclosed connectors (2) as per the wiring diagram. … 1 To simplify the installation process, the connectors (2) can be attached in the position shown (3). 33 Installation X Powerturn Connect the electrical plug-in connectors (2) to the adapter board DCU802 (4) (refer to the wiring diagram for the Powerturn).    … Installing cable guides A cable guide can be used to route cables through the drive. The max. cable diameter at the top and bottom is … mm. X With 2-leaf systems there is a danger of collision with the closing sequence control Powerturn IS. X Insert the cable guide (1) onto the gear at the top or bottom.   … Installing the standard roller guide rail Heed the separate installation instructions for sensor roller guide rail. Push the suspension bolts completely into the rail. X Push the optional opening restrictor into the rail (refer to chapter … ). X 34 Powerturn Installation X Insert the end caps left and right into the standard roller guide rail. X Screw the standard roller guide rail on with … screws. Tightening torque 6+1 Nm (2×).  … Installing the integrated opening restrictor When a suspension bolt extension is used, an external door stopper must be set instead of the integrated opening restrictor. The installation process for the integrated opening restrictor (1) is described in the installation instructions for the opening restriction, mat. no. 156338. … 35 Installation … Powerturn Installing the link arm bearing block Follow separate installation instructions in situations involving the use of the sensor link arm. X … Screw the link arm bearing block (1) on with … screws.  Inserting the counter piece X If there is insufficient space above the drive, insert the counter piece before the drive is installed. X Insert the counter piece (1) into the drive (2) from above. Installing the spindle extension Insert the spindle extension (2) into the drive from below. X Fasten the spindle extension using a countersunk screw (1). Tightening torque 6+1 Nm. X    36 Powerturn … Installation Installing the shaft cover Both shaft covers must be inserted before the lever is installed. Preparing the shaft covers … 1 … 3 … 2 … 4 Shaft cover on the counter piece side Disconnection points Shaft cover on the lever-side Gate X Carefully detach both shaft covers at the disconnection points (2). Dispose of the gate (4). X Install the shaft cover (1) on the counter piece side. X Install the shaft cover (3) on the lever side. X   37 Installation … Powerturn Fitting the mounting aid à The mounting aid (mat. no. 158454) is only required for installing the roller guide rail. It is not required for installing the link arm. à The mounting aid is reusable, and can remain with the fitter. When the mounting aid (2) has been attached, the lever can be tensioned in the direction of the opening in a manner that ensures that it remains in this position. Heed the direction of rotation. The installation aid only produces a locking effect in one direction. X If necessary, attach the installation aid the other way round. X Position the mounting aid (2) on the motor shaft (1).   … Installing and removing the lever (for installation with roller guide rail) … .1 Installing the lever WARNING! Danger of injury The mounted and pre-tensioned lever is braked electrically. If a motor cable is disconnected, the stored energy of a tensioned lever is freed without braking and the lever accelerates back into its initial position. X Do not disconnect any of the motor cables. X Check the correct connection. 38 Powerturn Installation Transom installation hinge side with roller guide rail X Note the chart with preload, see “Transom installation-hinge side-rail / reveal / max. door opening angle chart” on page 14 Transom installation opposite hinge side with roller guide rail         Door leaf installation hinge side with roller guide rail Door leaf installation opposite hinge side with roller guide rail         Open the door (1). Attach the mounting aid (see chapter … ). X Install the lever (2) as shown in the dotted position. Additional fitting instructions on the supplementary installation sheet, see chapter 12 X Tighten the screw (3) (tightening torque: approx. 10 Nm). X Check whether the mounting aid has been installed properly. X Pretension the lever (2), until it becomes possible to comfortably install the suspension bolts. X X 39 Installation Powerturn   X Align the door with the roller guide rail (5) and the suspension bolts (6). Danger of damage to the thread. X Ensure that the suspension bolt is screwed in straight. X X Screw in the suspension bolt (6) and tighten it in a counter-clockwise direction (tightening torque = approx. 15 Nm). Remove the mounting aid. The door closes and remains in the closed position on account of the pre-load. X X Install the door stop buffer (4) (for max. opening angle see chapter … ). Set the position of the integrated opening restrictor, see chapter … . … .2 Disassembling the lever The lever is disassembled in the reverse order of installation for all types. The door can assume any position. Pay attention to the correct direction of rotation of the mounting aid. Attach the mounting aid (see chapter … ). Release the suspension bolts and remove the lever. X Remove the mounting aid. X X 40 Powerturn Installation … Installing and removing the link arm … .1 Installing the link arm             Door leaf installation hinge side with link arm … 2 … 4 Transom installation opposite hinge side with link arm Telescope bar Lever Screws Door stop buffer Open the screws (3) on the telescopic rod (1). Move the door to the closed position. X Attach the telescopic rod (1) to the door/door frame. X Set the lever (2) on the drive axle (position represented by dotted lines). Additional fitting instructions on the supplementary installation sheet, see chapter 12 X Screw in the cylinder head screw M6 × 45 (from the “counter piece” assembly group), and tighten it with 15 Nm. X Pre-tension the lever (2) until the telescopic rod (1) is perpendicular to the door. X Firmly tighten the screws (3) on the telescopic rod (1). X Install the on-site door stop buffer (4). For max. opening angle see chapter … . X X … .2 Removing the link arm Move the door to the closed position. Undo the screws (3) on the telescopic rod (1). The pre-load is relieved and the position depicted in the “link arm pre-tensioned” illustration is reached. X Undo and screw out cylinder head screw M6 × 45 (from the ‘counter piece’ assembly group). X Pull the lever (2) out of the drive axle. X X 41 Installation … Powerturn Installing the integrated closing sequence selector See additional installation instructions mat. no. 154872. … Entries on the identification plate 153065 Swing door operator Powerturn DIN 18263-4 K-BS/BGS-RS 4-6 T-BS-RS 5-6 T-BGS-RS 6-7 GST MPA NRW DO … IS with ID 153065/166017, 154838 / IS/TS with 164013 or 164012 Input 230 V Output 24 V 50 Hz … A / 200 W … A / 30 W DIN18650-1:2010-06 Serial No. 50 °C -15 °C 1|3|1|0|___|_|____|2 28/2021 000000000000 Dry areas only IP30 … 2 Identification plate “Ü” symbol The EN class range for rail installation is EN 4-6 and EN 5-6. The EN class range for link arm installation is EN 6-7. à The entries are obligatory. Entries on the identification plate (in compliance with DIN 18650-1:2010-06) A B C D E 153065 Swing door operator Powerturn IS with ID 153065/166017, 154838 / IS/TS with 164013 or 164012 Input 230 V Output 24 V DIN18650-1:2010-06 Serial No. 50 °C 50 Hz … A / 200 W … A / 30 W -15 °C 1|3|1|0|___|_|____|2 28/2021 000000000000 Dry areas only IP30 … 3 … j Swing door drive (classified in the factory) 1,000,000 test cycles, with at least 4,000 cycles/24 h (classified in the factory) Type of door design (third character) … m … 7 Durability of the drive (second character) … l F … 5 Drive type (first character) … k … Swing door (classified in the factory) Suitability as a fire protection door (fourth character) … Not suitable as fire protection door … Suitable as smoke protection door … Suitable as fire protection door … Suitable as fire and smoke protection door Note: Only one class may be entered. If the Powerturn rather than the Powerturn F is installed, the digit “0” must always be entered! 42 Powerturn n Installation Safety devices on the drive (fifth character) … Force limitation … Connection for external safety systems which have been approved by the drive manufacturer … Low-energy Note: Several classes may be specified. o Special requirements made on the drive/functions/installations (sixth character) … No special requirements … On escape routes without turning fitting … For self-locking fire protection doors without turning fitting Note: Only one class may be entered. Powerturn F must always be used for self-locking fire protection doors (4)! p Safety at automatic door systems — version/installation (seventh character) A distinction is made between five classes of safety devices on door leaves: … No safety devices … With sufficiently dimensioned safety distances … With protection against crushing, shearing and drawing-in of fingers … With built-in turning fitting unit … With sensor-controlled protective devices Note: Several classes may be entered! q Ambient temperature (eighth character) … –15 °C to +50 °C (classification factory provided) Explanation of the text entries on the identification plate A B C D E F Product category Product name Text describing the combination options Electrical power data: Input / Output Serial number Use in dry rooms only 43 Electrical connection … Powerturn Electrical connection A safety analysis must be carried out and safety sensors installed if necessary (see Powerturn wiring diagram). … Mains connection WARNING! Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock! X The electrical system (230 V) may only be connected and disconnected by a professional electrician. X Carry out the power connection and protective earth connection test in accordance with applicable guidelines. X Before working on the electrical system, always disconnect the system from the mains. X Heed the wiring diagram. à In accordance with the valid regulations it must be possible to de-energise the drive unit at a suitable point. X De-energise the drive unit at the main switch in the control casing. à See the wiring diagram for further details. 44 Powerturn Settings … Settings … Setting the closing force à The closing force must be set at the power storage device for all installation types in such a way that the door closes in a secure manner when in the de-energised state. (For types of installation see chapter … ). à The spring force may only be changed when the door is closed. à The closing force must be set in accordance with DIN 18263-4 depending on the door width, use as a fire protection door and the assignment of EN classes (see next page). à Measurement of the closing force is only possible in a de-energised state. X Before measurement, activate the door at least once. à For information regarding the setting of the spring force, see the table below.   X Use an Allen key (size 5) to set the adjustment screw (1) to the desired spring force. The spring force is displayed in the window (2). à The illustrations for the EN class setting are only intended as a guide. à The closing torques to be observed at 0–4° door opening angle are listed in the table below. à Risk of faults on the drive. Do not exceed maximum closing torques. DIN 18263-4 EN … max. door width (mm) 1100 0–4° Mmin. [Nm] 26 EN … 1250 37 Type of installation Transom installation hinge side rail EN … 1400 54 EN … 1600 87 Max. closing torque / at 0–4° TÖW [Nm] 59 (70) * Setting the spring force EN4 EN6 EN5 45 Settings Powerturn Type of installation Transom installation opposite hinge side rail Max. closing torque / at 0–4° TÖW [Nm] 63 (65) * Setting the spring force EN4 Door installation hinge side rail EN6 EN5 70 (78) * EN4 EN6 EN5 Door installation opposite hinge side rail 59 (62) * EN5 Door installation hinge side link arm 128 (128) * EN6 Transom installation opposite hinge side link arm EN6 EN7 97 (123) * EN6 EN7 * … Values in brackets at max. door opening angle 95° Closing time and latching action function for de-energised operation Danger of jamming due to excessive door acceleration. X Do not set more than 10° latching action on the door. The closing speed must be set using the braking force parameter to match the drive version, type of installation and door weight. à A power connection is necessary for setting the braking force parameter. à See the Powerturn wiring diagram for more details on setting the braking force parameter. X Set the “braking force” parameter using à DPS (display programme switch): … 2 01 … 14. à ST220 (service terminal): Set “Movement parameters”, “Speeds”, “Braking force” using the keys or to the desired braking force (01 … 14) and press the  key. Setting “brake force” parameter with Powerturn F Brake force parameter (standard value = 13). X Set the closing time to … s. Measure the closing time: X Open the door up to 90° in the de-energised state. X Release the door and record the time until the closed position is reached. X Repeat the procedure if necessary until the closing time is suitable. Refer to the wiring diagram for the Powerturn in addition. 46 Powerturn Settings Setting “brake force” parameter with Powerturn (without fire protection requirement) The closing speed must be set in such a way that the requirements on low-energy function are met in the de-energised state. X Measure the closing time from 90° to 10° and set depending on door weight and door leaf width (refer also to the table in the “Low-energy function” chapter in the Powerturn wiring diagram). Adjusting latching action When the drive reaches the switching point of the latching action switch, the braking effect is cancelled by the motor. X Undo the Allen screw (2). Door falls too heavily into the lock: X Move the face plate (1) in the “–” direction. Door does not fall safely into the lock: X Move the face plate (1) in the “+” direction. The braking effect is interrupted earlier. X Tighten the Allen screw (2). The latching action is active in the illustrated position. The latching action position can be adapted to the circumstances at the door. The setting of a minimum latching action is obligatory (safety function). … Final installation … .1 Breaking the end caps out Remove end caps (1) and (2) from the packaging, carefully detach them from the bar. X Dispose of the gate (3) X … Right end cap … Left side panel … Gate … .2 … Inserting end caps The side panel can also be inserted after the cover has been put on. 47 Settings Powerturn Insert the side panel at the main closing edge X Set the side panel (1) in place at the rear and clip it in.  X Clip the side panel in at the front. Inserting the side panel with the e-cover X Attach the side panel (2) at the rear and clip it in.  48 Powerturn X Settings Slide the e-cover (3) over the connector panel.  … .3 Attaching the cover X Make sure that no cables become jammed.   X X … .4 Clip on the GEZE logo (1) in a suitable position on the cover and turn by 180° if necessary. Slide the cover (2) over the drive and engage it. Removing the cover and side panels X X Unlatch the cover and pull it off the drive. Remove the side panels. 49 Service and maintenance 10 Powerturn Service and maintenance The maintenance work described below must be performed by an expert at least once a year and after … million cycles in the case of the Powerturn or after 500,000 cycles in the case of Powerturn F. If there is a display programme switch, the service display lights up in the display. X Service and maintenance should then be carried out promptly. … Dangers during mechanical service WARNING! Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock! X Use the drive-side main switch to disconnect all poles of the power supply from the drive and secure it against being switched back on again (refer to chapter … ). WARNING! Danger of injury caused by crushing! X Ensure that you have no extremities in the swivelling range during swing movements of the lever or of the link arm. WARNING! Risk of burns due to hot motor! The motor in the drive can become very hot after continuous operation or poor ease of movement or other defects. X Disconnect the system from the mains before working on the motor. X Let the motor cool down. … Maintenance work The Powerturn is maintenance-free to a great extent and no extensive work has to be carried out with the exception of that specified below: X Check fixing screws for tightness. X Check the rollers of the suspension bolt. If necessary, replace the suspension bolt (for information on the disassembly process, refer to chapter … ). X Clean the inside of the roller guide rail. X Check that the door latch functions correctly and is clean, lubricate lightly if necessary. X Check the roller lever or the link arm for damage, replace if necessary. X Tighten the fixing screw for the link arm or roller lever with 15 Nm. Test run X Use the on-site main switch to disconnect all poles of the power supply from the drive. X Ensure that the door moves properly. X Correct installation and closing sequence (for 2-leaf doors). X Open the door(s), check the closing speed and latching action (see chapter … ), and adjust if necessary. X Switch on the mains voltage. … Electrical service X Record inspections and keep the records on hand. The number of openings, operating hours and remaining time until the next servicing can be queried as described in the wiring diagram (see wiring diagram, Chapters “Commissioning and service” and “Service mode”). X After completing the maintenance work, always execute the Learning function for the Powerturn (see wiring diagram, “Commissioning and service” chapter). X Check the function of the activation and presence sensors and replace if necessary. 50 Powerturn Service and maintenance … Electrical faults Fault messages are stored and can be retrieved using the display programme switch or the service terminal ST220. If a fault is currently active, it is shown every 10 seconds on the display programme switch or the service terminal ST220. If the dot lights up on the left half of the display programme switch, the system was unable to completely initialise after being switched on. There is either an obstruction in the way or something in the system itself has become jammed. The dot extinguishes as soon as the door has been opened completely and closed again once. For troubleshooting and fault elimination see the fault table in the wiring diagram, chapter “Fault messages” chapter. After changes to the drive (spring pre-load, opening width, fitting dimensions, change in the coupling elements) or modifications to the “Open” safety sensor, check the control parameters (see wiring diagram). X Reteach the drive (see wiring diagram). X Let “service mode” be executed completely (see wiring diagram). X 51 Powerturn installation check list 11 Powerturn Powerturn installation check list No. … 2 … 4 … 6 … 8 … Test All cables routed correctly for installation of the Powerturn? Mounting plate installed? Option: Door transmission angle installed for door leaf installation? Option: Cover mounting plate installed? à Rail installed; suspension bolt and opening restrictor inserted beforehand? à Link arm bearing block installed? 230-V connection with locking latch established? Option: Connection can be set up later by a professional electrician; separate 230-V Schuko plug cable used for set-up? Bottom clamping claw released? Option: Insert counter piece? Drive unit: à set in place? Option: Door leaf installation with door transmission angle, insert side panel à locked? (slide) à Corrugated-head screw set? à Clamping claw tightened? Counter piece inserted? Option: Spindle extension attached? Shaft cover installed? Option: Mounting aid used? Lever inserted on the drive and fastened (pre-tensioned corresponding to the type of installation)? on Page – 27 27 23 34 in Chapter Completed – … .7 … 36 29 32 … 29 31 31 … 31 32 32 36 36 37 38 38 … 38 … 42 – 45 … – … 47 47 … .1 33 47 … .2 48 … .2 34 49 … .3 Set lever in place, see supplementary installation sheet, chapter 12 Lever pre-load ≠ Spring pre-load. X Follow the installation instructions. 10 11 12 13 Connection to the door element established (suspension bolt screwed into the lever or link arm jammed)? Mounting aid removed? Identification plate completed? Mechanical mobility of the door checked? Closing force set? à Set closing force, see supplementary installation sheet, chapter 12 à The closing time for the de-energised state must be set using the braking force parameter. 230 V is required at the drive for this (see chapter … ). 14 15 16 17 Latching action adjusted? End caps cut out and drilled? Sensor strips installed? Peripheral cables connected? End caps inserted? Option: The side panel at the control unit can also be installed after the cover. 18 19 20 52 E-cover fitted onto the connection panel? All cables secured? Additional cable guide set in place? Cover attached? Powerturn No. 21 Powerturn installation check list Test Powerturn put into operation with ST220 (jack plug on the side panel)? (See wiring diagram) on Page – in Chapter Completed – Set the opening time to “Limitation of use of Powerturn with opening times up to 90° door opening angle” in accordance with chart Page 10. For fire protection doors: X Set the door stop buffer. X 53 Supplementary installation sheet for fitting the lever in the correct position 12 Powerturn Supplementary installation sheet for fitting the lever in the correct position For assistance, the closing torques to be set are listed on the supplementary installation at the end of the installation instructions. Use the supplementary installation sheets as follows: X Cut the supplementary sheets along the grey dashed line and taken them out of the manual. X Cut out the openings for the lever mandrel along the black dashed line. X Place the supplementary installation sheet on the lever mandrel on the drive in accordance with the type of installation. The correct insertion position of the lever can now be checked. 54 Powerturn Supplementary installation sheet for fitting the lever in the correct position 55 … 3 EN6 … EN7 … Mmin. [Nm] GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany 2° EN 1154 EN4 EN6 EN5 … 2° M [Nm] EN5 … EN6 … 3 … Powerturn  57 … 2 … 1 Mmin. [Nm] GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany 2° EN 1154 2° … M [Nm] … 3 … 1 Powerturn  59 Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se Baltic States – Lithuania / Latvia / Estonia E-Mail: baltic-states@geze.com Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l. Unipersonale E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Turkey GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax.: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com

Powerturn wiring diagram

Powerturn Valid for variants: Powerturn (1-leaf/2-leaf) Powerturn F (1-leaf) Powerturn F-IS (2-leaf) Powerturn F/R (1-leaf) Powerturn F/R-IS (2-leaf) Powerturn F/R-IS/TS 156568-04 EN Wiring diagram  Powerturn Contents Symbols and illustrations … Validity … Product liability … 2 … Notes … Safety precautions … Connection information … Reference documents … Inspection of installed system … 2 Abbreviations … 3 Electrical data … 4 Supply terminals … 10 … Safety sensor close and open … 13 … Pair of safety sensor strips GC 338 … 13 Sensor GC 334/GC 335 … 16 Safety sensor GC 342 … 16 Safety sensor GC 342+ … 18 … Mechanical contact … 21 … Key switch … 21 … Contact sensor inside … 22 … Radar movement detector GC 302 R … 22 Push button (potential-free normally open contact) … 22 Non-contact activation sensor GC 307+ … 23 Radar movement detector GC 308 R … 23 … Contact sensor outside … 24 … Radar movement detector GC 302 R … 24 Push button (potential-free normally open contact) … 25 Non-contact activation sensor GC 307+ … 25 Radar movement detector GC 308 R … 25 … Radio control … 26 … Plug the radio reception board WRB-5 into the control circuit board DCU800 … 26 Radio channels … 26 10 Push And Go … 27 11 Configurable inputs … 28 … MPS … 28 2-leaf opening and 1-leaf opening … 28 Sabotage … 28 Closing position active leaf … 29 Emergency lock … 29 Additional contact sensors (P-KI, P-KA) … 29 Switch functions … 30 Control reset … 30 Double push button (1-leaf/2-leaf door opening) … 31 STOP … 31 Closing position detection … 32 WC control … 32 Servo function with fire alarm … 32 Powerturn  … 1-leaf Open … 32 Suppression of the safety sensors … 33 12 Configurable outputs … 34 … Configurable output PA1 … 34 Configurable output PA2 … 38 13 Electric strike/motor lock … 41 … 24 V DC electric strike supplied on drive side … 42 On-site-powered 12 V AC electric strike … 42 Bolt message … 43 Activation delay for lock switch contact … 43 14 Free line connections … 44 15 WC control … 45 … Non-contact sensor GC 307+ WC … 46 Illuminated OCCUPIED sign … 46 16 Mode of operation … 47 … Programme switch … 47 Set the mode of operation using push buttons or switches … 49 Change in mode of operation … 50 17 2-leaf drives … 52 … Powerturn IS/TS: Active leaf automated, passive leaf with door closer … 52 Two automated door leaves … 52 Connection via system cable RS485 … 53 Mains connection … 54 18 Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors … 55 … F-board DCU 801 … 55 Setting latching action switch … 56 Triggering and reset of holding open … 56 Hold-open system Powerturn F, Powerturn F-IS with smoke switch control unit … 57 Hold-open system Powerturn F/R, Powerturn F/R-IS with integrated lintel-mounted smoke switch … 58 Hold-open system Powerturn F-IS/TS, Powerturn F/R-IS/TS - active leaf automated, passive leaf with door closer and holding magnet … 58 19 Mains connection … 61 … Mounting plate with integrated power supply circuit … 62 20 Motor gear unit … 64 21 Control unit … 65 22 Commissioning and service … 66 … Commissioning … 66 Teaching run … 66 Teaching a 1-leaf system … 68 Teaching a 2-leaf system … 69 Forces and speeds … 70 23 De-energised operation … 71 24 Free swing function … 71 25 Resilience to external influences or load due to wind pressure … 72 26 Door closer operation … 72 …  … Powerturn 27 Low-energy mode … 73 28 Servo mode … 74 … Servo support with additional servo torque … 74 Servo support with additional servo torque and additional torque servo fire alarm … 74 29 Service menu … 76 … Service terminal ST220 … 76 Connecting service terminal ST220 … 77 Service menu ST220 … 77 Display programme switch DPS … 95 Service buttons S1 and S2 … 95 DPS service menu and service buttons S1/S2 with LEDs … 97 30 Fault messages … 107 … Fault messages ST220 and DPS … 107 Fault messages on the service button LEDs … 111 31 Disposal and accessories … 112 … Disposal of the door system … 112 Accessories … 112 Powerturn  Symbols and illustrations Warning notices In these instructions, warning notices are used to warn against material damage and injuries. X Always read and observe these warning notices. X Observe all measures marked with the warning symbol and warning word. Warning symbol Warning word Meaning DANGER Danger to persons. Non-compliance will result in death or serious injuries. WARNING Danger to persons. Non-compliance can result in death or serious injuries. CAUTION Danger to persons. Non-compliance can result in minor injuries. Further symbols and illustrations Important information and technical notes are highlighted to explain correct operation. Symbol Meaning means “important information” Information on avoiding material damage, understanding a concept or optimising workflows means “additional Information” X X Symbol for an action: This means you have to do something. If there are several actions to be taken, keep to the given order. compliant with EN 16005 Symbol in a table or in information concerning safety sensors. not compliant with EN 16005 Symbol in a table or for a piece of information on sensors that do not correspond to EN 16005. Fire protection door Symbol for fire protection door Not permitted for fire protection door Symbol “Not permitted for fire protection door” Validity à Valid for software version DCU8 V2.1 or higher à Hardware revision DCU800 from Rev F Product liability In compliance with the liability of the manufacturer for his products as defined in the German “Product Liability Act”, compliance with the information contained in this brochure (product information and intended use, misuse, product performance, product maintenance, obligations to provide information and instructions) must be ensured. Failure to comply releases the manufacturer from his statutory liability. … Notes Powerturn … Notes … Safety precautions Keep these instructions. Secure the workplace against unauthorised entry. X Before working on the electrical system, interrupt the power supply (mains and rechargeable battery) and check that no voltage is present. When an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) is used, the system will still be under voltage even when disconnected from the mains. X Watch the swivelling range of long system parts. X Secure the drive/drive cover/coupling elements against falling. à Only specialists who are authorised by GEZE are permitted to carry out installation, commissioning and maintenance. à Danger of injury when working at heights. à Operate the drive only with a connected latching action switch. à If unauthorised changes are made to the system, GEZE cannot be made liable in any way whatsoever for any resulting damages. à GEZE does not accept any warranty for combinations with third-party products. In addition, only original GEZE parts may be used for repair and maintenance work. à Connection to the mains voltage must be carried out by a qualified electrician. Perform the mains connection and protective earth connection test in accordance with VDE 0100 Part 600. X Use an on-site automatic circuit-breaker as the line-side disconnecting device. Its dimensioning is matched to the type, cross-section, type of laying and ambient conditions of the on-site power supply circuit. The automatic cut-out must have at least … A and may have max. 16 A. X In accordance with Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, a safety analysis is to be performed and the door system marked in compliance with CE Marking Directive 93/68/EEC before the door system is commissioned. à Observe the latest versions of guidelines, standards and country-specific regulations, in particular: à ASR A1.7 “Guidelines for doors and gates” à DIN EN 16005 “Power-operated pedestrian doorsets – Safety in use – Requirements and test methods” à DIN VDE 100-600 “Installation of low-voltage systems - Part … Tests” à DIN EN 60335-2-103 “Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety; Particular requirements for drives for gates, doors and windows” à Accident-prevention regulations, especially DGUV V1 (BGV A1) “General regulations” à DGUV V3 (BGV A3) “Electrical installations and equipment” X X Swing door drive as a hold-open device in accordance with DIN 18263-4 à The hold-open function of the side-hung leaf drive must be cancelled in the event of a fire alarm, fault or manual triggering; the latch release (electric strike according to fail-secure principle) must be disabled and all the activators for opening the door leaves must be switched ineffective. à The side-hung leaf drives may only be used on 1- and 2-leaf doors if the door frame or the passive leaf of a 2-leaf door respectively is equipped with an electric strike that releases the latch and/or a safety catch with a spring-loaded latch. … Connection information à The drive is designed exclusively for use in dry rooms. X Use only the cables specified on the cable plan provided. Cables must be shielded in compliance with the wiring diagram. X Always use insulated wire end ferrules for wire cores. X Insulate cores that are not used. X Secure loose, internal drive cables with cable ties. X Observe the maximum permitted total power consumption required to supply the periphery. Install the product in such a way that access is easy during repairs/maintenance and causes little effort. The costs for removal must be in economic relation to the value of the product. … Powerturn … Notes Reference documents Mat. no. Document Product 154918 Powerturn user manual Door drive 154917 Powerturn installation instructions Door drive 154872 Installation instructions IS mechanism Powerturn Door drive 123457 Installation instructions GC 302 R Radar movement detector 198724 Installation instructions GC 307+ Non-contact activation sensor 203845 Installation instructions GC 308 R Radar movement detector 126833 GC 334 installation instructions Safety sensor 128556 GC 335 installation instructions Safety sensor 152968 GC 338 installation instructions Pair of safety sensor strips 167390 GC 342 installation instructions Safety sensor 198708 Installation instructions GC 342+ Safety sensor 141511 Wiring diagram FA CG 150 Hold-open system 132159 Installation and service instructions GEZE wireless program automatic 186584 Safety analysis Door drive 030450 Inspection book Automatic Inspection of installed system Check the protective earth connection to all metal parts which can be touched and are connected to the protective earth conductor. X Check the function of the presence detectors and movement detectors. X Check the measures for protection and prevention of crushing, impact, shearing or drawing-in spots. X … Abbreviations … Powerturn Abbreviations Core colours BN brown BK black BU blue GN GY YE green grey yellow OG PK RD orange pink red TQ turquoise VT violet WH white Connections, terminals and plugs … AU Automatic PE Configurable input HS Hinge side RBM Radar movement detector OHS Opposite hinge side RES Reset switch DO Hold open RM Bolt message DPS Display programme switch RSZ Smoke control unit LATCHING ACTION Latching action RS485 Communication signal to DPS and second drive GF Active leaf OFF Operating mode AUS FK … Radio channel … (changeover mode of operation and activation signal KI) SF Passive leaf FK … Radio channel … (activation signal KB) STOP Stop GND Ground SCR Shield KA Contact sensor outside SIO Safety sensor opening KB Mechanical contact SIS Closing safety sensor KI Contact sensor inside STG Fault LK Lustre connector TK Door transmission cable LS Exit only TOE Electric strike MPS Mechanical programme switch TST Test signal for safety sensors NA Night mode 24 V Supply voltage for external devices PA Configurable output 24V SENS Supply voltage for sensors, switched after ECO mode has been set Powerturn … Electrical data Electrical data Mains voltage 230 V AC –15%, +10% Frequency 50/60 Hz Protection class I Capacity rating 200 W Mains connection Fixed connection (installation cable or drip loop) Primary fuse – Secondary fuse 10 A slow-blow, 5×20 mm Secondary voltage (transformer) 33 V AC (46 V DC) Control voltage for external components 24 VDC ±10% Output current control voltage 24 V 1200 mA permanently 1800 mA briefly (5 s, duty ratio 30%) Fuse protection 24 V … A; reversible Temperature range –15 … +50 °C IP rating IP30 Emission sound pressure level < 70 dB (A) … Supply terminals … Powerturn Supply terminals … 2 Main switch DCU801 (optional) … 4 DCU800 DCU802 DCU800 with WRB-5 (optional) … 7 … 1 TEACH 24 V GND … 5 … 10 RS485 passive leaf FREE … 8 Status LED (wireless WRB-5) Teach button (wireless WRB-5) Powerturn Supply terminals DCU801 (optional) … 9 Second drive + RSZ 24V DCU802 KB KI KA SIS SIO N.N. 20 … 21 … 1 23 … 1 10 … 1 11 10 … 1 13 36 35 … 43 41 42 … 1 … 8 … 6 … 2 … 53 52 51 … 1 57 56 55 … TOE … 33 32 31 … 1 98 97 96 95 Free DPS-RS485 … Optional: CAN interface DCU103 … 3 … 1 … 3 … Terminal CANL Terminal CANH Terminal GND CAN (ISO) S1: Terminating resistor ON/OFF 11 Supply terminals Powerturn KA … DPS RS485 DCU106 … 12 FREE Powerturn … Safety sensor close and open Safety sensor close and open With 2-leaf systems, connect the safety sensors of the active leaf with the active leaf control. With 2-leaf systems, connect the safety sensors of the passive leaf with the passive leaf control. X Install the sensor for monitoring closing on the door leaf, opposite hinge side. If the SIS is activated during closing, the door reverses and opens again. X Install the sensor for monitoring opening on the door leaf, hinge side. If the SIO is activated during opening, the door stops. X X On detection the sensor output is open (GND applied to SIS or SIO input). X Check function and correct setting of the sensors during commissioning and service. à For operation of the display programme switch DPS, see chapter … “Display programme switch DPS”, p. 95. à For operation of the service terminal ST220, see chapter … “Service terminal ST220”, p. 76. The state of the drive to which the ST220 is connected is displayed. With 2-leaf systems, the status of the active leaf is displayed. X Press the  key. X Select “Active leaf para” or “Passive leaf para” using the  or  key and press the  key. X In the selection menu, use the  or  key to select “Signals” and then press the  key. For further settings see the descriptions below. The wall blanking range of the sensor strip SIO is set automatically during the teaching procedure. If required it can be changed with DPS or ST220 via the service menu, with à DPS: Set the parameter a B to the desired wall blanking range (1°...99°). à ST220: Set “Input signals”, “SI3 – terminal SIO1”, “SI3 wall blanking range” to the desired value (1° to 99°). … Pair of safety sensor strips GC 338 X X Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. à The connector plug of the GC 338 interface has … poles. Terminal … is not occupied. à For energy-related reasons, the Powerturn can switch the GC 338 automatically to standby mode as long as it is not required. In order to do so, the Powerturn must be equipped with firmware above V1.8. à The “energy-saving mode” must be activated on the Powerturn and on the GC 338. à Both operating modes are compliant with DIN EN 16005. Standard operation X Set DIP switch … (TST/SBY) on the GC 338 interface module to ON (Factory setting). X Set the “Testing” parameters: à DPS: Set Te to 01 (testing with 24 V). à ST220: Set “Output signals”, “Testing SI” to “Testing with 24 V”. Energy-saving mode SIS and SIO must be set to testing “Energy-saving mode”. This setting extends the response time after the mode of operation has been changed. X X Set DIP switch … (TST/SBY) on the GC 338 interface module to OFF. Set the “Testing” parameters: à DPS: Set Te to … 3 (energy-saving mode). à ST220: Set “Output signals”, “Testing SI” to “Energy-saving mode”. 13 Safety sensor close and open … .1 Powerturn Monitoring closing and opening Standard operation X Set the “Contact type” parameters; à DPS: Set s1 and s3 to … 2 (normally closed contact) (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS”, “SI1 contact type” to “normally closed contact” and “SI3 – terminal SIO”, “SI3 contact type” to “normally closed contact” (factory setting). E S Energy-saving mode X Set the “Contact type” parameters; à DPS: Set s1 and s3 to … 3 (frequency). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS”, “SI1 contact type” to “Frequency” and “SI3 – terminal SIO”, “SI3 contact type” to “Frequency”. X Set the “Function” parameters: à DPS: Set f1 top the desired function and f3 to … 5 (SIO stop) or … 6 (SIO stop SF GF). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS”, “SI1 function” to the desired function and “SI3 – terminal SIO”, “SI3 function” to “SIO stop” or “SIO stop SF GF”. … 2 or … 1 E SIO 13 SIO 100mA GY SIGNAL … 24 V … SIO … BK GND … BU SIS … WH 24VSENS SIS 11 SIS … S 14 GND … 10 TST BN … 1 … 3 … 1 Opposite hinge side Hinge side Door transmission cable GC 338 interface module … GND … 24VSENS 10 TST Powerturn … .2 Safety sensor close and open Monitoring opening Standard operation X Set the “Contact type” parameters: à DPS: Set s3 to … 2 (normally closed contact) (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI3 – terminal SIO”, “SI3 contact type” to “NC” (factory setting). à S1, S2: Set parameter … to 02 (normally closed contact). Energy-saving mode X Set the “Contact type” parameters; à DPS: Set s3 to … 3 (frequency). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI3 – terminal SIO”, “SI3 contact type” to “Frequency”. X Set the “Function” parameters: à DPS: Set f3 to … 5 (SIO stop) or to … 6 (SIO stop SF GF). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI3 – terminal SIO”, “SI3 function” to “SIO stop” or “SIO stop SF GF”. à S1, S2: Set parameter 10 to 05 (SIO stop) or 06 (SIO stop SF GF). … 2 E SIO 13 SIO 100mA SIGNAL … 24 V … SIO … GND … SIS … GY … GND … 24VSENS 10 TST BN BK BU WH … 4 S … 2 … 4 Opposite hinge side Hinge side Door transmission cable GC 338 interface module 15 Safety sensor close and open … .3 Powerturn Monitoring closing Standard operation X Set the “Contact type” parameters: à DPS: Set s1 to … 2 (normally closed contact) (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS”, “SI1 contact type” to “normally closed contact” (factory setting). à S1, S2: Set parameter … to 02 (normally closed contact) (factory setting). Energy-saving mode X Set the “Contact type” parameters; à DPS: Set s1 to … 3 (frequency). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIO”, “SI1 contact type” to “Frequency”. X Set the “Function” parameters: à DPS: Set f1 to the desired function. à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS”, “SI1 function” to the desired function. à S1, S2: Set parameter … to the desired function. … 1 E SIS 11 SIS 100mA SIGNAL … 24 V … SIO … GND … SIS … GY BN BK BU WH … S … X X … Opposite hinge side Hinge side Door transmission cable GC 338 interface module Sensor GC 334/GC 335 Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. Safety sensor GC 342 Recommendation: Use the optional remote control to change the sensor parameters. Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. X Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. X X Sensor position X Parameter setting DCU8. à DPS: Set Te to … 2 (testing with GND). à ST220: Set “Output signals”, “Testing SI” to “Testing with GND”. 16 GND … 24VSENS 10 TST … 1 … 3 … 1 Powerturn … .1 Safety sensor close and open Monitoring closing and opening GC 342 BS -UB 60 mA +UB BN GN YE SIO 13 SIO … GND … 24VSENS 10 TST WH SIO GY SIS PK COM + Test BU RD SIS … GND … 24VSENS 10 TST … GC 342 BGS … SIS 11 Door transmission cable Settings GC 342 Recommendation: Use the optional remote control to change the sensor parameters. Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. X Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. X X Settings DCU8 X Set the “Contact type” parameters: à DPS: Set s1 and s3 to … 2 (normally closed contact) (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS”, “SI1 contact type” to “normally closed contact” and “SI3 – terminal SIO”, “SI3 contact type” to “normally closed contact” (factory setting). X Set the “Function” parameters: à DPS: Set f1 to the desired function and f3 to … 5 (SIO stop) or … 6 (SIO stop SF GF). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS”, “SI1 function” to the desired function and “SI3 – terminal SIO”, “SI3 function” to “SIO stop” or “SIO stop SF GF”. … .2 Monitoring opening SIO -UB 60 mA +UB 13 BN SIO … GN GND … YE 24VSENS 10 TST WH SIO PK SIS GY COM + Test GC 342 BS … BU RD … Door transmission cable Settings DCU8 X Set the “Contact type” parameters: à DPS: Set s3 to … 2 (normally closed contact) (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI3 – terminal SIO”, “SI3 contact type” to “normally closed contact” (factory setting). X Set the “Function” parameters: à DPS: Set f3 to … 5 (SIO stop) or … 6 (SIO stop SF GF). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI3 – terminal SIO”, “SI3 function” to “SIO stop” or “SIO stop SF GF”. 17 Safety sensor close and open … .3 Powerturn Monitoring closing SIS 60 mA -UB +UB 11 BN SIS … GN GND … YE 24VSENS 10 TST WH SIO PK SIS Test GC 342 BGS GY COM + BU RD … 1 Door transmission cable Settings DCU8 X Set the “Contact type” parameters: à DPS: Set s1 to … 2 (normally closed contact) (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS”, “SI1 contact type” to “normally closed contact” (factory setting). X Set the “Function” parameters: à DPS: Set f1 to the desired function. à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS”, “SI1 function” to the desired function. … Safety sensor GC 342+ Recommendation: Use the optional remote control to change the sensor parameters. Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. X Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. X X Sensor position X To protect the door leaf and pinch zone, install one module in the top corner on both sides of the door leaf. 18 Powerturn … .1 Safety sensor close and open Monitoring opening and closing with activation SIO SIS ON ON SIO SIO SIS … 2 … 4 SIO signal (safety open) DIP … ON OFF ON SIS … 2 … 4 SIO signal (safety close) DIP … OFF … GC 342 BS -UB 60 mA +UB SIO Kx BN GN YE SIO … GND … 24 VSENS 10 TST SIS GY 11 SIS PK COM + BU RD YE/BK WH/BK GC 342+ BGS … 2 13 WH SIS Test SIO … 1 GND … 24 VSENS 10 TST KI* KA* … GND … GND … 24 VSENS … 24 VSENS 21 KI 23 KA Door transmission cable Door connection cable HS/OHS Settings GC 342+ Recommendation: Use the optional remote control to change the sensor parameters. Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. X Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. X X Settings DCU8 X Set type of contact KI resp. KA to “normally open contact”. X Set type of contact for SIS resp. SIO to “normally closed contact”. X Set testing SI to “Testing with GND”. X Set the “Contact type” parameters: à DPS: Set s1 and s3 to … 2 (normally closed contact) (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1- terminal SIS”, “SI1 contact type to “normally closed contact” and SI3terminal SIO”, “SI3 contact type” to “normally closed contact” (factory setting). X Set the “Function” parameters: à DPS: Set f1 to the desired function and f3 to … 5 (SIO stop) or … 6 (SIO stop SF GF). à ST220: Set the “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS1”, “SI1 function” to the desired function and “SI3- terminal SIO”, “SI3 function” to “SIO stop” or “SIO stop SF GF”. 19 Safety sensor close and open Powerturn Set the “Contact type KI” parameters à DPS: Set ci to 01 (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “KI” and “KI contact type” to “NO contact“ (factory setting). X Set the “Contact type KA” parameters: à DPS: Set cO to 01 (factory setting). à ST220: Set “Signals”, “Input signals”, “Contact sensor outside”, “Contact sensor outside, type of contact” to “normally open contact” (factory setting). X Set the “Testing” parameter. à DPS: Set Te to … 2 (testing with GND). à ST220: Set “Output signals”, “Testing SI” to “Testing with GND”. X 20 Powerturn … Mechanical contact Mechanical contact à The input KB is active in the modes of operation AU, LS and NA. à In the case of 2-leaf systems the mechanical contact can be connected to the active leaf control unit or to the passive leaf control unit. à On activation the active leaf opens and, if switched on, the passive leaf. à During activation, the output of the mechanical contact is closed, 24 V are applied at the KB input (normally open contact). Parameters set as a normally closed contact must have … V applied on activation. The state of the drive to which the ST220 is connected is displayed. With 2-leaf systems, the status of the active leaf is displayed. X Press the  key. X Select “Active leaf para” or “Passive leaf para” using the  or  key and press the  key. For further settings see the descriptions below: à Set the “Contact type” parameters: à With DPS: Set c6 to 01 (normally open contact) or to … 2 (normally closed contact). à With ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “KB”, “KB contact type” to “normally open contact” or “normally closed contact”. … Key switch à Set the parameter “Contact type” with à DPS: Set ci to 01 (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “KB”, “KB contact type” to “normally open contact” (factory setting). à SCT key switch, single-pole, flush-mounted, AS500 without Euro profile half cylinder KB … 24 V 20 KB 21 Contact sensor inside … Powerturn Contact sensor inside à The input KI is active in the modes of operation AU and LS. à In the case of 2-leaf systems the contact sensor inside can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. à On activation the active leaf opens and, if switched on, the passive leaf. The state of the drive to which the ST220 is connected is displayed. With 2-leaf systems, the status of the active leaf is displayed. X Press the  key. X Select “Active leaf para” or “Passive leaf para” using the  or  key and press the  key. For further settings see the descriptions below: à The sensor for monitoring closing can also be used as a contact sensor inside. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set f1 to … 3 . à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS1”, “SI1 function” to “SIS and KI”. à An activation delay time can be set for the input KI. This time is added to the general activation delay time (opening delay). à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set ia to the desired delay time (0 s … s). à ST220: Use the  or  keys to set “Signals” “Input signals”, “KI” or “KI delay” to the desired delay time (0 s … s) and press the  key. … Radar movement detector GC 302 R X X Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. à On activation, the output of the GC 302 R is closed (24 V applied to the KI input). à Set the parameter “Contact type” with à DPS: Set ci to 01 (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “KI” and “KI contact type” to “NO contact“ (factory setting). à The GC 302 R is a direction-sensitive radar movement detector. … 50 mA +UB … -UB … 3 … WH BK BN KI … GND … 24VSENS 21 KI BU … Push button (potential-free normally open contact) à Set the parameter “Contact type” with à DPS: Set ci to 01 (normally open contact) (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “KI” and “KI contact type” to “NO contact“ (factory setting). 22 GC 302 R KI … GND … 24VSENS 21 KI Powerturn … Contact sensor inside Non-contact activation sensor GC 307+ X X Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. The GC 307+ is a non-contact activation sensor with a range of 10...60 cm, for manual activation. X Set the parameter “Contact type” with à DPS: Set ci to 01 (normally open contact) (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “KI” and “KI contact type” to “NO contact“ (factory setting). 65 mA KI … GND … 24VSENS … Radar movement detector GC 308 R X X 21 KI Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. The GC 308 R is a radar sensor that has been designed for use as an opening pulse generator on automatic doors. Due to the Doppler effect, the sensor detects movements, whereby a distinction is made between approach and distance to the detector. The mutual influence of several sensor systems with hazardous effect is not possible. X Set the parameter “Contact type” with à DPS: Set ci to 01 (normally open contact) (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “KI” and “KI contact type” to “NO contact“ (factory setting). GC 308 R 46 mA - UB … +UB … 3 … RD BK YE YE KI … GND … 24VSENS 21 KI … à On activation, the output of the GC 308 R is closed (24 V applied to the KI input). 23 Contact sensor outside … Powerturn Contact sensor outside X X Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. à The input contact sensor outside is only active in the AU operating mode. à In the case of 2-leaf systems the contact sensor outside can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. à On activation the active leaf opens and, if switched on, the passive leaf. The state of the drive to which the ST220 is connected is displayed. With 2-leaf systems, the status of the active leaf is displayed. X Press the  key. X Select “Active leaf para” or “Passive leaf para” using the  or  key and press the  key. For further settings see the descriptions below: à The sensor for monitoring closing can also be used as a contact sensor outside. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set f1 to … 4 . à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “SI1 – terminal SIS1”, “SI1 function” to “SIS and KA”. à An activation delay time can be set for the input KA. This time is added to the general activation delay time (opening delay). Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set aa to the desired delay time (0 s … s). à ST220: Use the  or  key to set “Signals”, “Input signals”, “KA”, “KA delay” to the desired delay time (0 s … s) and press the  key. … Radar movement detector GC 302 R à For information see GC 302 R (KI). à On activation, the output of the GC 302 R is closed (24 V applied to the KA input). à Set the “Contact type” parameters with: à DPS: Set cO to 01 (factory setting). à ST220: Set “Signals”, “Input signals”, “Contact sensor outside”, “Contact sensor outside, type of contact” to “normally open contact” (factory setting). 24 GC 302 R 50 mA +UB … -UB … 3 … 5 WH BK BN BU KÂ … GND … 24VSENS 23 KA Powerturn … Contact sensor outside Push button (potential-free normally open contact) KA à For information see push button (KI). à Set the “Contact type” parameters with: à DPS: Set cO to 01 (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “KA” and “KA contact type” to “NO contact“ (factory setting). … GND … 24VSENS 23 KA Non-contact activation sensor GC 307+ The GC 307+ is a non-contact activation sensor with a range of 10...60 cm, for manual activation. X Set the parameter “Contact type” with à DPS: Set cO to 01 (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “KA” and “KA contact type” to “NO contact“ (factory setting). 65 mA KA … GND … 24VSENS 23 KA … Radar movement detector GC 308 R The GC 308 R is a radar sensor that has been designed for use as an opening pulse generator on automatic doors. Due to the Doppler effect, the sensor detects movements, whereby a distinction is made between approach and distance to the detector. The mutual influence of several sensor systems with hazardous effect is not possible. X Set the parameter “Contact type” with à DPS: Set ci to 01 (normally open contact) (factory setting). à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “KI” and “KI contact type” to “NO contact“ (factory setting). GC 308 R 46 mA - UB … +UB … 3 … RD BK YE YE KA … GND … 24VSENS 23 KA … à On activation, the output of the GC 308 R is closed (24 V applied to the KA input). 25 Radio control … Radio control X Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. à à à à à Radio reception board WRB-5 1-channel remote control WTH-1 2-channel remote control WTH-2 4-channel remote control WTH-4 Transmitting module WTM à à à à … Status LED … Teach button The radio reception board WRB-5 can optionally be plugged onto the DCU800 control. The receiving module has the two channels FK1 and FK2. The keys on the remote control can be taught separately using the teach button on the receiving module. A maximum of twelve transmitters can be stored per channel in the memory of the receiver. X … Powerturn TEACH Plug the radio reception board WRB-5 into the control circuit board DCU800 Only plug the radio reception board WRB-5 onto the control DCU800 in the de-energised state. Press spacer (2) onto the control circuit board DCU800 (3). Set the radio reception board WRB-5 (1) onto spacer (2) and connector strip (4). X Move the aerial to the right position, see illustration. X X … Radio channels Radio channel … The function of the radio channel FK … depends on how long the assigned key is pressed. à < … seconds: Function as contact sensor input KI à > … seconds in mode of operation AU or LS: Control changes to mode of operation DO. After the button has been pressed briefly again: Control changes back to mode of operation AU. Radio channel … The function of the radio channel FK … is identical to that of activation input KB. 26 Powerturn 10 Push And Go Push And Go WARNING Danger of injury due to crushing and shearing! X During an activated Push & Go function door handles can form crushing and shearing points. Use safety sensors. à The Push And Go function allows activation of the drive without contact sensors being used. à When the Push And Go function is set, the drive opens the door automatically as soon as the door leaf is moved manually out of the closing position. à The opening angle for use of the automatic opening function can be set (1...20%; if the max. opening width is 100%). à For convenient use, the opening time should not be set to the minimum value. An opening angle that is set too small can result in undesired automatic opening of the door. According to EN 16005, the door must be marked when this function is used. à For operation of the display programme switch DPS, see chapter … “Display programme switch DPS”, p. 95. à For operation of the service terminal ST220, see chapter … “Service terminal ST220”, p. 76. The state of the drive to which the ST220 is connected is displayed. With 2-leaf systems, the status of the active leaf is displayed. X Press the  key. X Select “Active leaf para” or “Passive leaf para” using the  or  key and press the  key. For further settings see the descriptions below: à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set pU to the desired opening range (1-20) to start the automatic opening function or set pU to … 0 to disable the function. Set op to the desired hold-open time with “Push And Go” (0 – 60 s). à ST220: Use the  or  key to set the “Movement parameters”, “Push And Go” to the opening range (1-20) to start the automatic opening function or set “Push And Go” to … to disable the function. Set the “Movement parameters”, “Hold-open times”, “Push And Go” to the desired hold-open time (0 – 60 s). 27 Configurable inputs 11 Powerturn Configurable inputs à Various special functions are assigned to the configurable inputs PE1, PE2 and PE3, see chapter 29 “Service menu”, p. 76.. The type of contact required for the desired function can be found in chapter … “DPS service menu and service buttons S1/S2 with LEDs”, p. 97. or chapter … “Service menu ST220”, p. 77. à The configurable input PE1 is a pure binary input which is only suitable for the connection of normally open or normally closed contacts - not however for the connection of the analogue programme switch MPS. à The configurable inputs PE2 and PE3 are analogue inputs which are suitable for the connection of normally open or normally closed contacts as well as for the connection of the analogue programme switch MPS, see chapter 16 “Mode of operation”, p. 47. à For operation of the display programme switch DPS, see chapter … “Display programme switch DPS”, p. 95. à For operation of the service terminal ST220, see chapter … “Service terminal ST220”, p. 76. The state of the drive to which the ST220 is connected is displayed. With 2-leaf systems, the status of the active leaf is displayed. X Press the  key. X Select “Active leaf para” or “Passive leaf para” using the  or  key and press the  key. X Select “Signals” “Input signals” and press the  key. For further settings see the description below: à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set e1 , e2 or e3 to the desired function. à ST220: Set “PE1”, “PE1 function”, “PE2”, “PE2 function” or “PE3”, “PE3 function” to the desired function. … MPS See chapter … “Programme switch”, p. 47. An MPS can only be connected to PE2 and PE3. … 2-leaf opening and 1-leaf opening à The configurable inputs of the active leaf control can be used to change between the operating modes 2-leaf opening or 1-leaf opening as required (depending on the parameter setting). This can, for example, be advisable if the type of opening is switched by a timer via the available programme switching inputs (NA, LS, AU, DO). à The change in the type of opening is not possible if the analogue programme switch MPS is connected since this specifies “2-leaf opening” or “1-leaf opening” in a fixed way. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set e1 , e2 or e3 to … 3 (switchover summer) or … 4 (switchover winter). à ST220: Set “PE1 function”, “PE2 function” or “PE3 function” to “2-leaf opening” (switch over summer) or “1-leaf opening” (switch over winter). PE1 GF or … 24 V or PE2 GF 51 PE1 PE3 GF 52 PE2 53 PE3 … Sabotage à The configurable input PE1, PE2 or PE3 can be used for connection of an alarm contact which can serve to monitor a closed (key switch) housing. In the case of the closed housing, the contact is closed and 24 V is applied to the input PE1, PE2 or PE3. When the alarm contact opens, … V is applied to the input PE1, PE2 or PE3. In this case, the door remains closed and locked. If the contact is interrupted, KB is not evaluated in the NA, LS, AU mode of operation. All other functions remain the same. Then acknowledgement must be made (close alarm contact, delete error or by changing mode of operation). à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set e1 , e2 or e3 to … 5 (sabotage). à ST220: Set “PE1 function”, “PE2 function” or “PE3 function” to “Sabotage NC”. PE1 GF … 24 V 51 PE1 28 or or PE2 GF 52 PE2 PE3 GF 53 PE3 Powerturn … Configurable inputs Closing position active leaf Feedback from a door contact attached in the closing position, connected to PE1, PE2, or PE3. The door contact closes as soon as the door leaf has reached the closing position (active leaf). à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set e1 , e2 or e3 to … 6 (closing position door closer GF). à ST220: Set “PE1 function”, “PE2 function” or “PE3 function” to “closing position GF”. … Emergency lock WARNING Danger of injury due to crushing and shearing! The safety sensors and the obstacle are not evaluated. The door closes with the set force. X If the door closes unexpected, move out of the danger zone. Not permitted in the case of rebated doors and escape routes. Only the use of a configurable input is permitted. à The configurable inputs PE2 and PE3 can be used to connect an emergency lock switch. à When the emergency lock switch is activated, the contact is closed and … V is applied to the input PE2 or PE3. Contact sensors KA, KI and KB, sensor strips SIS and SIO as well as obstacle detection are hidden. Mode of operation hold open is cancelled. The door closes and locks. The function requires a 20 kOhm terminating resistor for proper function. à The door remains closed as long as the emergency lock signal is applied to the input. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set e2 or e3 to 07 (emergency lock.20 KOhm). à ST220: Set “PE2 function” or “PE3 function” to “Emergency lock.20kOhm NO”. PE2 … 24 V 20 kΩ 52 PE2 or PE3 … 24 V 53 PE3 … Additional contact sensors (P-KI, P-KA) à The configurable inputs can be used to connect additional normally open contacts as contact sensors inside or contact sensors outside. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set e1 , e2 or e3 to … 8 (contact sensor inside) or to … 9 (contact sensor outside). à ST220: Set “PE1 function”, “PE2 function” or “PE3 function” to “P-KI activation NO” or “P-KA activation NO”. à See chapter … “Contact sensor inside”, p. 22. or chapter … “Contact sensor outside”, p. 24. for more information. à The contact sensors can either be connected to terminal … (24 V) or terminal … (24 VSens). 29 Configurable inputs … Powerturn Switch functions … .1 General points à On activation, the output of the push button is closed (24 V applied to the PE1 or PE2 input). à In the case of 2-leaf systems the push button can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. X Set the hold-open time at the active leaf control. à If the push button is connected to the passive leaf control, both door leaves open when the switch function is activated, even if the “1-leaf” electric strike of operation is set. The mode of operation “Automatic” must be set on the passive leaf. … .2 Switch function 1st switch contact = open door / 2nd switch contact = close door. If no second switch contact takes place, the door remains open until the mode of operation is changed. In the case of a 2-leaf drive, 2-leaf opening takes place if the push button is connected at the SF drive. DPS X Set e1 or e2 to … 0 . ST220 X Set “PE1”, “PE1 function” or “PE2”, “PE2 function” to “Push button NO”. … .3 Switch function OHZ In the case of 2-leaf drives, the settings on the active leaf control determine the hold-open time. DPS X Set e1 or e2 to 11 for: 1st switch contact = open door / 2nd switch contact = close door If the SIO is triggered before the hold-open time or the 2nd switch contact is activated, the hold-open time runs out and is not cancelled by the 2nd switch contact. At the latest after the end of the hold-open time à O h for 2-leaf drive and 2-leaf opening type if the push button is connected at the SF drive. à O ® for 1-leaf drive or with 2-leaf drive and opening type 1-leaf if the push button is connected at the GF drive. ST220 Set “PE1”, “PE1 function” or “PE2”, “PE2 function” to “Push button hold-open time NO” for: 1st switch contact = open door / 2nd switch contact = close door The door closes at the latest after the hold-open time has expired. PE1 GF or … 24 V or PE2 GF 51 PE1 PE3 GF 52 PE2 53 PE3 … Control reset à The control unit can be reinitialised via the configurable inputs. After the push button has been activated, the drive behaves in the same was as after the mains voltage has been switched on. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set e1 , e2 or e3 to … 3 (reset switch). à ST220: Set “PE1 function”, “PE2 function” or “PE3 function” to “Reset switch NO”. PE1 GF … 24 V 51 PE1 30 or or PE2 GF 52 PE2 PE3 GF 53 PE3 Powerturn … Configurable inputs Double push button (1-leaf/2-leaf door opening) In the case of 2-leaf drives the door can open via the configurable inputs of the active leaf control in 1-leaf or 2-leaf mode as desired by pressing a button if the “1-leaf opening” operating mode setting is active. If the push button is pressed once, only the active leaf opens and closes after the 1-leaf hold-open time has expired. With two successive push button activations within … s open active leaf and passive leaf and close after the holdopen time 2-leaf has expired. Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set e1 , e2 or e3 to … 4 (double push button). à ST220: Set “PE1 function”, “PE2 function” or “PE3 function” to “Double push button”. PE1 GF … 24 V 51 PE1 or or PE2 GF PE3 GF 52 PE2 53 PE3 … STOP Configurable inputs PE1, PE2 and PE3 can be used for connection of a stop push button or safety edge. Inputs PE2 and PE3 can also be evaluated in the same way. à On activation, the door leaf stops (in case of 2-leaf systems both leaves) and remains in the stopped position as long as the input is active. à In the case of 2-leaf systems, the stop push button can be connected to the active leaf control unit or to the passive leaf control unit. à For operation of the display programme switch DPS, see chapter … “Display programme switch DPS”, p. 95. à For operation of the service terminal ST220, see chapter … “Service terminal ST220”, p. 76. The state of the drive to which the ST220 is connected is displayed. With 2-leaf systems, the status of the active leaf is displayed. X Press the  key. X Select “Active leaf para” or “Passive leaf para” using the  or  key and press the  key. For further settings see the description below: For PE1, PE2, PE3: à Set the “Contact type” parameters with: à DPS: Set e1 , e2 or e3 to … 5 (normally open contact, not monitored) or to … 6 (normally open contact, not monitored). à ST220: Set “Signals”, “Input signals”, “PE1 function”, “PE2 function” or “PE3 function” to “Stop normally closed contact” or “Stop normally open contact”. STOP or or … 24 V 51 PE1 E1 = 16 52 PE2 53 PE3 E1 = 15 For PE2 or PE3: à In order to ensure protection of persons as specified in EN 16005, a terminating resistor 12 k or 20 k must be connected to monitor the input. The terminating resistor must be connected directly to the switch contact. à Set the “Contact type” parameters with: e2 or e3 to … 2 or … 0 . à DPS: à ST220: Set “Signals”, “Input signals”, “PE2” or “PE3”, “PE2 function” or “PE3 function” to “Stop 12 kOhm” or “Stop 20 kOhm”. PE2 … 24 V 12 kΩ or 20 kΩ 52 PE2 or PE3 … 24 V 53 PE3 E2, E3 = 12 (Stop 12 kΩ -> NO) E2, E3 = 20 (Stop 20 kΩ -> NO) 31 Configurable inputs Powerturn … Closing position detection … .1 Closing position door leaf (active leaf drive, passive leaf drive) Feedback from a door contact attached in the closing position, connected to PE1, PE2, or PE3 of the control. The door contact closes as soon as the door leaf belonging to the drive has reached the closing position. Set the parameters with à DPS: Set e1 , e2 or e3 to … 6 (closing position GF). à ST220: Set “PE1 function”, “PE2 function” or “PE3 function” to “closing position GF”. … .2 Closing position detection passive leaf with 2-leaf doors with manual passive leaf See chapter … “Powerturn IS/TS: Active leaf automated, passive leaf with door closer”, p. 52. and chapter 18 “Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors”, p. 55. … WC control Connection of the internal push button for the WC function, refer also to chapter 15 “WC control”, p. 45. … Servo function with fire alarm Refer also to chapter … .1 “Servo function with additional torque servo fire alarm”, p. 74. … 1-leaf Open With this function, a 2-leaf system in the setting type of opening “2-leaf opening” can have only … leaf opened with the connected activation device. à The passive leaf must be switched on. à On activation, the output of the activation device is closed (24 V applied to the PE1 or PE2 input). à With 2-leaf systems the activation device must be connected to the active leaf control. Set the hold-open time at the active leaf control. (In the case of 2-leaf drives, the settings on the active leaf control determine the hold-open time) DPS Set e1 or e2 X to … 3 . In the case of a 2-leaf drive, 1-leaf opening takes place if the activation device is connected to the active leaf control. X Set O ® on the active leaf controller. ST220 Set “PE1”, “PE1 function” or “PE2”, “PE2 function” X to “1-leaf opening” for activation device on the active leaf. The door closes at the latest after the hold-open time has expired. X Set hold-open times 1-leaf (winter) on the active leaf control. 32 Powerturn Configurable inputs … Suppression of the safety sensors When a signal is applied to PE … or PE 3, the connected safety sensors are not evaluated. The signal usually comes from a central fire alarm system. The function can be used for the doors on rescue routes. The door then opens automatically in the event of a fire and is not prevented opening and closing by smoke near the sensors. à This function is only available for 1-leaf doors. à Only manually operated activation devices, which do not react to smoke or heat, are permitted (such as push buttons). à When the function is active, the door drive moves at safe speed and displays the message “09” on the DPS. à If a smoke switch control unit or lintel-mounted smoke switch are connected, this function is only available up to a smoke alarm. X Implement line monitoring so that the function is not triggered by a fault (e.g. line short-circuit). Attach the resistors directly at the signal output of the fire alarm system. With this function, the door can also move without safety sensors: X Carry out a risk analysis on site. X Evaluate residual risk through impact. 13 kΩ 4,8 kΩ // PE2 … 24 V // 52 PE2 or PE3 … 24 V 53 PE3 à Contact closed = normal operation, safety sensors are evaluated. à Contact opened = function active, safety sensors are not evaluated. à Line fault (short circuit, line break) = normal operation safety sensors are evaluated. Set the parameters with: DPS Set e2 or e3 X Set to … 9 . ST220 “PE2 function” or “PE3 function” X Set to “Fire alarm without SI”. 33 Configurable outputs 12 Powerturn Configurable outputs Various switching functions can be assigned to the configurable outputs PA1 and PA2, see chapter 29 “Service menu”, p. 76. à For operation of the display programme switch DPS, see chapter … “Display programme switch DPS”, p. 95. à For operation of the service terminal ST220, see chapter … “Service terminal ST220”, p. 76. The state of the drive to which the ST220 is connected is displayed. With 2-leaf systems, the status of the active leaf is displayed. X Press the  key. X Select “Active leaf para” or “Passive leaf para” using the  or  key and press the  key. X Select “Signals” and press the  key. For further settings see the description below: Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a1 or a2 to the desired function. à ST220: Set “PA1”, “PA1 function” or “PA2”, “PA2 function” to the desired function. … Configurable output PA1 PA1 is a potential-free relay contact, switching voltage max. 24 V AC/DC, current … A. … .1 Gong The output is selected if KA or SIS (for a “SIS and KA” setting) is activated in the automatic only AU mode of operation. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a1 to 01 (Gong). à ST220: Set “PA1 function” to “Gong”. … 1 … On-site power supply max. 24 V/ … A AC/DC On-site activator, e.g. gong or door bell PA … 34 55 PA1A 56 PA1B Powerturn Configurable outputs … .2 Fault à The function is used for fault messages, e.g. to an on-site building control centre. The contact closes or opens if the control unit determines a fault, see chapter 30 “Fault messages”, p. 107. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a1 to … 2 (Fault normally open contact) or to … 3 (Fault normally closed contact). à ST220: Set “PA1 function” to “Fault normally open contact” or “Fault normally closed contact”. … 1 … PA Building control centre (on-site) Signal input … 55 PA1A 56 PA1B … .3 Fault indication for MPS The function is used to switch the fault LED at the MPS. The contact closes if the control unit determines a fault, see chapter 30 “Fault messages”, p. 107.. When maintenance is due, the output is switched cyclically, the fault LED on the MPS flashes. à For connection see chapter … “Programme switch”, p. 47. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a1 to … 4 (MPS fault). à ST220: Set “PA1 function” to “MPS fault”. … .4 Warning signal à The function is used to switch an on-site activator on/off when the door is opened or closed. à Maximum permitted total power consumption by the control unit. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a1 to … 5 (warning signal). à ST220: Set “PA1 function” to “Warning signal”. … 24 V DC activator supplied on the drive side … PA … GND … 24 V 55 PA1A 56 PA1B … .5 Electric strike The electric strike function is not permitted if the drive is used for the fire protection area (Powerturn F, F/R, F-IS). à An additional electric strike can be connected to the configurable output PA1 in addition to the electric strike connection (see chapter 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. The electric strike connection must be configured otherwise the function will not work on the PA. à Maximum permitted total power consumption by the control unit. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a1 to … 6 (Electric strike). Set TO to the electric strike type connected. à ST220: Set “PA1 function” to “Electric strike”. Set “Electric strike type” to the electric strike type connected. Alternative parameter setting with: à DPS: Set a1 to … 5 (fail-secure electric strike) or … 6 (fail-safe electric strike). à ST220: Set “PA1 function” to “TOE fail-secure NO” or “TOE fail-safe NC”. 35 Configurable outputs Powerturn Drive-side supplied electric strike … PA … GND … 24 V 55 PA1A 56 PA1B 57 PA2 … 1 … Free-wheeling diode 1N4007 Wire jumper On-site supplied electric strike à Contact load output PA1 with 12 V AC: max. … A ~ 12V AC ~ max. 1A PA … GND … 24 V 55 PA1A 56 PA1B 57 PA2 Bolt message (RM) See chapter 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. “Electric strike/motor lock”, “Bolt message”. … .6 Door status message à The function is used to signal the door status, e.g. to an on-site building control centre. à Message function/door status: 08 Closed and locked 14 Exit only 09 Closed 15 Automatic 10 Not closed 16 Hold open 11 Open 18 Day/night mode changeover 12 Off 20 Maintenance due (see chapter … .9 “Maintenance 13 Night mode due”, p. 37.) à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a1 to the desired message function. à ST220: Set “PA1 function” to the desired message function. … 1 … 36 Building control centre (on-site) Signal input PA … 55 PA1A 56 PA1B Powerturn Configurable outputs … .7 Light control DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock! Danger of damage to the electrical control unit! Output PA1 of the control unit cannot switch the illumination directly. X Do not connect mains voltage to the PA1 output of the control unit. à The function is used to activate a light controlling device which, for example, switches on the entry illumination as soon as a contact sensor (KI, KA, KB, SIS+KI, SIS+KA) is activated or the door is opened manually. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a1 to 17 (Light control). à ST220: Set “PA1 function” to “Light control”. … 1 … Light control system (on site) Activation input PA … 55 PA1A 56 PA1B … .8 Day/night mode changeover à The function is used to mode of operation to an on-site building control centre or for switching a motor lock to day mode operation. The output contact closes if the mode of operation LS, AU 1-leaf, DO, or AU 2-leaf or a motor lock is set. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a1 to … 8 (mode of operation message “Day/night mode”). à ST220: Set “PA1 function” to “Day/night mode switchover”. à Connecting a building control centre, see chapter … .2 “Fault”, p. 38. … .9 Maintenance due à The function is used to signal that maintenance is due for the door drive to an on-site building control centre. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a1 to … 0 (Maintenance due). à ST220: Set “PA1 function” to “Maintenance due”. à Connecting a building control centre, see chapter … .2 “Fault”, p. 35. … .10 Holding magnet GF / SF For more detailed information on using a holding magnet see chapter “18 Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors” on page 55. … .11 WC timeout For more detailed information about connecting a lamp or a signal to signal when the 30 min. timer has expired for the WC function, see chapter 15 “WC control”, p. 45. 37 Configurable outputs Powerturn … Configurable output PA2 PA2 is a transistor output, switching voltage/current max. 24 V DC / … A. … .1 Gong The output is selected, if KA or SIS (for a “SIS and KA” setting) is activated. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a2 to 01 (Gong). à ST220: Set “PA2 function” to “Gong”. PA … 2 … 4 On-site power supply Door gong 24 V relay Free-wheeling diode … 3 … 2 … GND … 24 V 55 PA1A 56 PA1B 57 PA2 … .2 Fault à The fault function is used for fault messages, e.g. to an on-site building control centre. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a2 to … 2 (Fault normally open contact) or to … 3 (Fault normally closed contact). à ST220: Set “PA2 function” to “Fault normally open contact” or “Fault normally closed contact”. à The output switches to GND or locks as soon as the control detects a system fault. At the same time, the corresponding fault number is displayed on the DPS. X A relay for galvanic isolation must be installed for forwarding the fault message (e.g. to a building management system). PA … 2 … 4 Building control centre (on-site) Signal input 24 V relay Free-wheeling diode … 3 … 4 … GND … 24 V 55 PA1A 56 PA1B 57 PA2 … .3 Fault indication for MPS à The function is used to switch the fault LED at the MPS. The contact closes if the control unit determines a fault, see chapter 30 “Fault messages”, p. 107. à For connection see chapter … “Programme switch”, p. 47. à Set the parameters with: à With DPS: Set a2 to … 4 (MPS fault). à With ST220: Set “PA2 function” to “MPS fault”. … .4 Warning signal à The function is used to cyclically switch an on-site activator on/off when the door is opened or closed. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a2 to … 5 (warning signal). à ST220: Set “PA2 function” to “Warning signal”. PA … 38 24 V DC activator supplied on the drive side … 2 24 V 57 PA2 Powerturn Configurable outputs … .5 Electric strike à The electric strike function is not permitted if the drive is used for the fire protection area (Powerturn F, F/R, F-IS). à Only inductive DC electric strikes (without integrated electronics) may be connected to PA2. Electric strikes with integrated electronics must be connected to the configurable output PA1, see chapter … .5 “Electric strike”, p. 35. à The function is used to actuate an additional fail-secure or fail-safe electric strike, in addition to the electric strike connection (see chapter 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. The electric strike connection must be configured otherwise the function will not work at the PA. à The contact closes or opens as soon as the door drive is actuated. à Set the parameters with à DPS: Set a2 to … 6 (Electric strike). Set TO to the electric strike type connected, see chapter … “DPS service menu and service buttons S1/S2 with LEDs”, p. 97. à ST220: Set “PA2 function” to “Electric strike”. Set “Electric strike type” to the electric strike type connected, see chapter … “Service menu ST220”, p. 77. Alternative parameter setting, see chapter 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. PA … 1 Free-wheeling diode 1N4007 … GND … 24 V 55 PA1A 56 PA1B 57 PA2 Bolt message (RM) See chapter 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. “Electric strike/motor lock”, “Bolt message”. … .6 Door status message à The function is used to signal the door status, e.g. to an on-site building control centre. à Door modes: 08 Closed and locked 13 Night mode 09 Closed 14 Exit only 10 Not closed 15 Automatic 11 Open 16 Hold open 12 Off 20 Maintenance due à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a2 to the desired message function. à ST220: Set “PA2 function” to the desired message function. à Connection to a building control centre, see chapter … .2 “Fault”, p. 38. … .7 Day/night mode changeover à The function is used to signal the day mode of operation to an on-site building control centre. The output switches to GND, if the mode of operation LS, AU 1-leaf, DO, or AU 2-leaf is set. à Connect a 24 V DC relay as electrical isolation. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a2 to … 8 (mode of operation message “Day/night mode”). à ST220: Set “PA2 function” to “Day/night mode changeover”. à Connection to a building control centre, see chapter … .2 “Fault”, p. 38. 39 Configurable outputs Powerturn … .8 Maintenance due à The function is used to signal that maintenance is due for the door drive to an on-site building control centre. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set a2 to … 0 (“Maintenance due” message). à ST220: Set “PA2 function” to “Maintenance due”. à Connection to a building control centre, see chapter … .2 “Fault”, p. 38. PA … 2 … 4 Building control centre (on-site) Signal input 24 V relay Free-wheeling diode … 3 … 4 … GND … 24 V 55 PA1A 56 PA1B 57 PA2 … .9 Holding magnet GF / SF For more detailed information on using a holding magnet see chapter “18 Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors” on page 55. … .10 WC timeout To connect a lamp or a signal to signal when the 30 min. timer has expired for the WC function. 40 Powerturn 13 Electric strike/motor lock Electric strike/motor lock X X Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. When the door drive is used for the fire protection area (Powerturn F, F/R), an electric strike may only be connected to the terminal TOE. The outputs PA1, PA2 are not permitted for this. Connect the electric strike of the active leaf to the active leaf control and the electric strike of the passive leaf to the passive leaf control. à Potential-free relay contact, switching voltage/current max. 24 V AC/DC, … A. à Use an electric strike with a duty rating of ED 100. à For operation of the display programme switch DPS, see chapter … “Display programme switch DPS”, p. 95. à For operation of the service terminal ST220, see chapter … “Service terminal ST220”, p. 76. The state of the drive to which the ST220 is connected is displayed. With 2-leaf systems, the status of the active leaf is displayed. X Press the  key. X Select “Active leaf para” or “Passive leaf para” using the  or  key and press the  key. For further settings see the descriptions below: à Set the parameter electric strike type with: à DPS: Set TO to the desired electric strike type, see chapter … “DPS service menu and service buttons S1/S2 with LEDs”, p. 97. à ST220: Set the “Door parameters”, “Electric strike type” to the desired type, see chapter … “Service menu ST220”, p. 77. à Holding magnet MA 500 with counterplate for the magnetic locking of emergency exits. à Motor lock with panic function GEZE IQ Lock EL for 1-leaf doors. The GEZE IQ Lock EL is a self-locking anti-panic motor lock with external control. Note the wiring diagram for motor lock IQ Lock EL. IQ Lock SecuLogic set (Motor lock PZ-perforated, complete, incl. face plate and strike plate, motor lock control, connection cable for control, reed contact as well as open drip loop) X Designation IQ Lock EL 9235 IQ Lock EL 9240 IQ Lock EL 9245 IQ Lock EL 7255 IQ Lock EL 7265 IQ Lock EL 7280 IQ Lock EL 7210 Centres [mm] 92 92 92 72 72 72 72 Backset [mm] 35 40 45 55 65 80 100 à When using a motor lock without bolt message, the parameters “Opening delay day” (time in which the motor lock can unlock before the drive opens the door; only applies in the operating modes automatic and exit only) or “Opening delay night” (time in which the motor lock can unlock before the drive opens the door; only applies in night mode) must be set to give the motor lock time to unlock. à Set parameter D l for opening delay day or D N for opening delay night with: à DPS: Set D l to the required time (0 s … s). à ST220: Set “Door parameters”, “Opening delay day” or “Opening delay night” to the required time. With parameters set for electric strike type “motor lock”, the signal is activated up to the complete opening position and over the hold-open time. After the hold-open time has expired and closing movement of approx.10°, the electric strike signal is deactivated. With parameters set for electric strike type “fail-secure electric strike”, the signal is activated up to approx. 20° opening or 8s plus the optional opening delay. 41 Electric strike/motor lock Powerturn … 24 V DC electric strike supplied on drive side GEZE electric strikes for standard applications, doors with access control GEZE electric strike type A5000--B A5000-FB with lock latch guide A5300--B A5000--E Mat. Current consumpNo. tion 144590 200 mA (with 12 V) 100 mA (with 24 V) Voltage Functions Continuous operation: 12 or 24 V DC ±15% Momentary operation: 12–48 V AC/DC 144632 200 mA (with 12 V) Continuous operation: 12 or 100 mA (with 24 V) 24 V DC ±15% Momentary operation: 12–48 V AC/DC 144631 200 mA (with 12 V) Continuous operation: 12 or 100 mA (with 24 V) 24 V DC ±15% 145182 200 mA (with 8–11 V) Continuous operation: 8–28 V DC 50 mA (with 12–24 V) Momentary operation: 8–28 V AC/DC A5001--B 145183 200 mA (with 12 V) with switch contact 100 mA (with 24 V) Fail-secure electric strike, standard applications, doors with access control Fail-secure electric strike, standard applications, doors with access control Fail-safe electric strike, standard applications Fail-secure electric strike, standard applications, opening under side-load with DC voltage Continuous operation: 12 or Fail-secure electric strike, 24 V DC ±15% standard applications, doors Momentary operation: 12–48 V AC/DC with access control GEZE electric strike for fire protection doors GEZE electric strike type FT500--B Mat. Current consumpNo. tion 144634 200 mA (with 12 V) 100 mA (with 24 V) Voltage Functions Continuous operation: 12 or 24 V DC ±15% Momentary operation: 12–48 V AC/DC FT501--E 144647 200 mA (with 8–11 V) Continuous operation: 8–28 V DC with switch contact 50 mA (with 12–24 V) Momentary operation: 8–28 V AC/DC Fail-secure electric strike, fire protection doors à Max. current consumption of 1000 mA, but pay attention to the total power consumption of all the components, especially for fail-safe electric strikes. à Fail-secure electric strike for Powerturn: à IQ eStrike A5000--E à Fail-safe electric strike for Powerturn: à IQ eStrike A5300--B X Attach a free-wheeling diode 1N4007 (1) (a free-wheeling diode is not required with GEZE electric strike). … Fail-secure electric strike, fire protection doors, opening under side-load with DC voltage … 1 … TOE … GND … 24 V 31 TOEA 32 TOEB 33 RM Free-wheeling diode Wire jumper … On-site-powered 12 V AC electric strike Contact load output PA1 at 12 V AC: max. … A ~ 12V AC ~ max. 1A TOE … 42 GND … 24 V 31 TOEA 32 TOEB 33 RM Powerturn Electric strike/motor lock … Bolt message à Input RM blocks activation of the drive and prevents the drive opening against a manually locked door, for example. If the Input RM becomes active while the door is open, the door reverses and remains open. à If a further electric strike is connected with à Normally open contact: Circuit the contacts in parallel. à Normally closed contact: Switch the contacts in series. à Set the parameters with: à DPS: Set ®® to 01 (normally open contact) or … 2 (normally closed contact). à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “Bolt contact type”, “Bolt contact type” to “normally open contact“ or “normally closed contact”. à When the bolt feedback signal is pending, the drive remains in the set mode of operation but the DPS switches its own state to “night mode”. TOE … TOE … GND GND … 24 V … 24 V 31 TOEA 31 TOEA 32 TOEB 32 TOEB 33 RM 33 RM Normally open contact Normally closed contact … Activation delay for lock switch contact If a lock switch contact is used, the drive opens the door after valid activation only after … s if a change from “locked” to “not locked” has taken place. This applies for all settings of the parameters “electric strike type” apart from the “motor lock” setting. 43 Free line connections 14 Powerturn Free line connections Up to … signals can be transmitted via the flat ribbon cable between connection board DCU802 and control circuit board DCU800 using the free line connections. For example, this is prudent, if devices are installed in the attachment or intermediate cover and need to be connected to the connection board. à max. signal voltage: 30 V AC/DC à max. signal current: … A DCU802 DCU800 … 24 V GND … 2 57 56 55 … 1 98 97 96 95 DCU802 … 2 44 Internal flat ribbon cable FREE … 33 32 31 … 24 V … TOE 36 35 … 2 N.N. 13 … DCU800 GND Powerturn 15 WC control WC control X X Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. Only operates with fail-safe electric strike. For connection and parameter setting, see chapter 13 “Electric strike/ motor lock”, p. 41. Only operates with programme switch DPS, not with MPS or MPS-D. or PE1, PE2 … or … 24 V 51 PE1 52 PE2 PE1, PE2 … or - PA1 PA2 … + … + - … GND GN … 24 V 55 PA1A 56 PA1B 57 PA2 … + … 3 … 2 … 4 + PE1 52 PE2 … 1 GND GN … 24 V 55 PA1A 56 PA1B 57 PA2 KA GND … 24 V … 24 V 23 KA 23 KA … 2 24 V 51 PA1 PA2 + - K … 2 + Inside push button (switching unit with illuminated display) Illuminated OCCUPIED sign Outside push button (switching unit with illuminated display) Signal horn SLH220 (optional) Function The control recognises the operating function “WC control” based on the parameter set for the configurable input (PE1, PE2). If the WC is not occupied, the door is in automatic mode and is in the closing position. The OCCUPIED signs are off. When the “outside push button” is pressed, the WC door is opened. Once someone has entered the cubicle, the WC door is switched to exit only mode by pressing the “Internal push button” and the external push button is blocked. Alongside locking via the “inside push button”, locking is also possible via the push button “exit only LS” on the display programme switch DPS (from outside). The OCCUPIED signs light up. The WC door is locked by the fail-safe electric strike *). Pressing the “inside push button” again switches the mode of operation back to automatic. The OCCUPIED signs go off. The door opens and the “outside push button” is activated again. If the closed and locked door is opened manually from the inside or if a contact sensor KB is triggered, the mode of operation also switches back to automatic. The door can then be reopened by pressing KA. When the WC is monitored for permanent locking, the “WC alarm” signal is triggered after 30 minutes and an acoustic signal (signal horn) is switched on. The time cannot be set. The operating function “WC control” is cancelled in the following cases: à If the door is closed and locked and manual opening is detected. à If the door is opened from the outside using the mechanical contact (KB) (e.g. in an emergency). In both cases the door can then be triggered using the “Push button outside”. In the event of a power failure, the fail-safe electric strike is released and the door can be opened manually. *) Locking mechanism also possible with panic motor lock (optional). 45 WC control Powerturn … Non-contact sensor GC 307+ WC X X Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. GND 24 V PE1 … PE2 CL CL GND 24 V PA1A PA1B PA2 … 2 GND 24 V KA CL CL … 2 Push button inside Push button outside For further information about the alternative cable variant “WC control with adjustable unlocking time” see the installation instructions for GC 307+. Recommended setting at the GC 307+ WC via remote control X Set all DIP switches “colour LED” to OFF. à Colour “no detection”  green à Colour “detection”  blue à Colour “occupied/external control signal”  red … Illuminated OCCUPIED sign The illuminated OCCUPIED sign (PA1 or PA2) is activated when switching to the exit only mode of operation. Parameter setting: à DPS: à Set e1 or e2 to 21 (WC control), depending on the input used. à Set a1 or a2 to … 4 (illuminated OCCUPIED sign). à Set a1 or a2 to … 4 (alarm WC control). à Set O ® to the desired time (0–60 s). à ST220: à Set “PE1” or “PE2” to “WC control”. à Set “PA1” or “PA2”, “Function” to “Exit only”. à Set “PA1” or “PA2”, “Function” to “Alarm WC control”. à Set “Hold-open times, 1-leaf opening” to the desired time (0–60 s). Emergency shut-off switch See chapter … “Key switch”, p. 21. 46 Powerturn 16 Mode of operation Mode of operation X X Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. From software version V2.1, the following applies for the mode of operation OFF: à Powerturn: Door leaf can be moved freely. à Powerturn F, F/R: Drive in passive operation, spring closes the door. à For operation of the display programme switch DPS, see chapter … “Display programme switch DPS”, p. 95. à For operation of the service terminal ST220, see chapter … “Service terminal ST220”, p. 76. à Setting and operation using à Service button à Mode of operation key The state of the drive to which the ST220 is connected is displayed. With 2-leaf systems, the status of the active leaf is displayed. X Press the  key. X Select “Active leaf para” or “Passive leaf para” using the  or  key and press the  key. For further settings see the descriptions below. … Programme switch Mechanical programme switch (MPS) à Connection to PE2 or PE3 à MPS, AS500 MPS-ST, with key, AS500 à Operating modes OFF, NA, LS, AU 1-leaf, DO, AU 2-leaf à Follow the installation instructions à For 2-leaf systems, the MPS is connected to the active leaf. à If the MPS is used, the mode cannot be changed with DPS or via the NA, LS, AU and DO inputs. à Set the parameters of the control to which the MPS is connected, with: à DPS: Set e2 or e3 to 01 (MPS). Set a2 or a1 to … 4 (fault message for MPS). à ST220: Set “Signals”, “Input signals”, “PE2”, “PE2 function” or “PE3”, “PE3 function” to “MPS” and “Signals”, “Output signals”, “PA2”, “PA2 function” to “MPS fault” or “PA1”, “PA1 function” to “MPS fault”. … 52 57 or … PE1 PE2 - GF … GND … 24 V 51 PE1 52 PE2 53 PE3 PA1 P A2 - GF 57 PA2 … The LED at the MPS lights up in case of a fault MPS flashes when maintenance is due 47 Mode of operation Powerturn Mechanical programme switch (MPS-D) à MPS-D, AS500 à MPS-D-ST, with key, AS500 à The MPS-D is connected to the active leaf on 2-leaf systems. à Set the parameter Contact type (if changed), with: à DPS: Setting not possible. à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “AU”, “Contact type” to “normally open contact“ and “DO”, “Contact type” to “normally open contact“ (factory settings). Set “NA”, “Contact type” to “NC”. … 2 … 4 … 24 V … OFF … NA … LS … AU … DO Display programme switch (DPS) with OFF à AS500, DPS with OFF, flush-mounted, alpine white à Modes of operation: OFF, NA, LS, AU, DO, 1-leaf/2-leaf opening X Follow the installation instructions. … RS485 … 1 OFF … GND … 2 24 V … 42 RS485-A 44 41 RS485-B 41 43 SCR à DPS cannot be connected if the PE2 or 42 PE3 function is set to “MPS” (only display 100 mA possible). … X Connect DPS to the active leaf. KB à Changing the operating mode with the … 24 V DPS is only possible if 24 V is not applied 20 KB to NA, LS, AU, DO or to PE2 or PE3, if PE2 or PE3 is configured to OFF, 2-leaf opening … Display 1-leaf/2-leaf operation or 1-leaf opening. After reconnection to (LED lights up with 1-leaf operation) the mains, the drive is in the previously set … Hidden service push button mode of operation. … Additional contact in the key switch for activation of KB à It is possible to change the mode of operation if the key switch is active or with jumper 1-44. à Switching over between 1-leaf and 2-leaf operation: X Press the   keys simultaneously. Operation at the DPS is not possible during the self-test, e.g. after changing the operating mode. The control can be configured using DPS. Accessing the service menu: X Press the concealed service key and  simultaneously. Blocking or releasing DPS operation à Blocking operation by key operated button Operation of the DPS can be blocked/released by connecting a key switch to prevent the mode of operation being changed by unauthorised persons. Operation is possible when the key switch is actuated, or: X Actuate the key switch briefly to release operation. à Operation is permanently released. X To block operation, actuate the key switch briefly again. X Operation is blocked. à With the DPS, the operation block is signalled by the display “- -” when any key is pressed. à Blocking operation by assigning a password Operation of the DPS can be protected by a password in the service menu to prevent the mode of operation being changed by unauthorised people. The password can only be set and changed using the service menu on service terminal ST220. The password for operating the DPS has … digits (0...9). Factory setting: 00 = released à Changing the mode of operation with password protection set 48 Powerturn Mode of operation The mode of operation can also be released by activating the key switch rather than by entering a password. The number of times the key is pressed corresponds to the digit to be entered. X Enter the first digit using key . X Enter the second digit using key . Example: The password is 37. X Press the  key … times. X Press the  key … times. X Confirm password with key  . à Permanent release of programme switch operation X For permanent release, attach a jumper between terminals 1-44 of the DPS. – and – X Set the value “00” as the password in the service menu (factory setting). … Set the mode of operation using push buttons or switches à It is possible to set the mode of operation using push buttons or switches (e.g. timer). à The push button or switch is connected to the control of the active leaf. à The control switches to the desired mode if 24 V is applied to the corresponding input and remains in this mode of operation. A pulse signal is sufficient. à Operation at the DPS is only possible if no signal is queued at the OFF, NA, LS, AU and DO inputs. à Input NA takes precedence over inputs LS, AU and DO. If 24 V is applied at input NA the drive switches to NA mode, even if 24 V is applied to one of the other PS inputs. à Set the parameter Contact type (if changed), with à DPS: Setting not possible à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “NA”, “Contact type” to “NO”. The same applies for the contact type for “LS”, “AU”, “OFF” and “DO” (factory settings) PS-GF … 24 V … OFF … NA … LS … AU … DO 49 Mode of operation Powerturn … Change in mode of operation … .1 Changing the mode of operation using the operating modes push button/operating modes display   Changing the mode of operation (with 1-leaf-doors or active leaf) X Press the operating modes push button (1) briefly. The operating modes display immediately switches one mode of operation further. The drive itself does not change the mode of operation to the new mode of operation until … s after the last key has been pressed. Operating modes sequence: …  OFF  Night  Exit only  Automatic  Hold open  OFF  Night mode  … Thanks to the … s delay it is possible to change the mode of operation from AU (automatic) through DO (hold open) to NA (night mode) without the door opening in the DO (hold open) setting. à When ready to operate, the operating modes display LED (2) lights up in the colour of the current mode of operation. à The operating modes display LED (2) is also used to indicate faults. For more detailed information see chapter 30 “Fault messages”, p. 107. à In the OFF mode of operation, there is no fault display on the operating modes display LED. à If you do not wish to switch modes using the operating modes push button (1), this can be blocked with the service terminal using the “Mode of operation key” parameter. à If the setting is changed from enabled to disabled or vice versa, the operating modes display LED flashes yellow for … s – the setting has been applied. à If a deactivated operating modes push button (1) is actuated again, the operating modes display LED (2) flashes for … s in red – operation is not accepted. A connected external programme switch MPS takes priority. Changing the mode of operation (with passive leaf) The drive on the passive leaf is switched on and off using the operating modes push button. When the drive is switched on, the modes of operation display LED (2) lights up in the colour of the mode of operation (see below). If the drive is switched off, the operating modes display LED (2) does not light up. A disabled passive leaf behaves in a similar manner to the NA mode of operation, in the case of manual entry. Mode of operation display Mode of operation OFF (off) NA (night mode) LS (exit only) AU (automatic) DO (hold open) 50 Colour of the operating modes display LED (2) – red white green blue Powerturn Mode of operation … .2 Changing the operating mode using the service LEDs   Service key S1 Service LEDs Service key S2  … 2 …     The service LEDs are used à to indicate system signals, à to indicate and change drive parameters, à to start the production test. During normal operation the LEDs indicate the current mode of operation. The mode of operation can be changed using keys S1 and S2. S1 = previous mode of operation S2 = next mode of operation  Mode of operation   5* … LED … OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ● Night mode ○ ○ ○ ● ○ Exit only ○ ○ ● ○ ○ Automatic ○ ● ○ ○ ○ Hold open ○ ○ ○ ● ● ○ ● … 1 LED off LED on 51 2-leaf drives 17 2-leaf drives X X … Powerturn Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. Powerturn IS/TS: Active leaf automated, passive leaf with door closer à Reed switch PE1 GF or PE2 GF or PE3 GF à The closing position of the passive leaf is monitored … 24 V with a reed switch. The reed switch contact is closed 51 52 PE2 53 PE3 PE1 if the passive leaf is closed. The active leaf only closes … once the passive leaf is closed. X Set active leaf to 1-leaf. … Reed switch (normally open contact NO) X Attach the reed switch near the main closing edge of the passive leaf. The reed switch can be connected to Illustration: PE1, PE2 or PE3. Parameter E1, E2 or E3 must be set to Passive leaf not closed, contact open 06 (closing position SF) when connecting to PE1, PE2, PE3. X Set parameter EF (“Number of leaves) to 01 (“1-leaf drive”). à If the mode of operation is changed to DO, the holding magnet is powered and the passive leaf can be kept open, see chapter … “Hold-open system Powerturn F-IS/TS, Powerturn F/R-IS/TS - active leaf automated, passive leaf with door closer and holding magnet”, p. 58. … Two automated door leaves à For parameter settings, see chapter 22 “Commissioning and service”, p. 66. X Set up RS485 connection between the two drives using system cable, see chapter … “Connection via system cable RS485”, p. 53. X Set up connection to the 230 V network, see chapter … “Mains connection”, p. 54. 52 RS485 GF RS485_B … RS485_A … GND … GN BN WH RS485 SF … RS485_B … RS485_A … GND Powerturn … 2-leaf drives Connection via system cable RS485 Active leaf Passive leaf … 2 … 1 … System cable RS485, 3-wire Control circuit board DCU800 53 2-leaf drives … Powerturn Mains connection … Feeder H03VV 3G … mm2 For mains plugs install the rubber sleeves, see chapter … “Mounting plate with integrated power supply circuit”, p. 62. The mains plugs have spring-type terminals which means connection without wire end ferrules is permitted. X 230 V distributor (optional) The 230 V T-distributor (1) makes it possible to set up a junction in the 230 V AC connecting cable on 2-leaf doors with … Powerturn drives. A further additional device (2) can be connected to this and supplied with 230 V AC. This is useful for additional devices which are installed under the intermediate cover. … 1 … 54 Powerturn 18 Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors X X Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. If the door drive is used on fire protection doors, do not connect an on-site central reset switch. A central reset switch is not permitted. à In case of a fire alarm or a power failure, the electric strike (at terminal 31/32 of the DCU), valve and motor gear unit are disconnected from the control. The door closes through spring load (passive operation). à In 2-leaf doors both leaves close. à The control places a load of approx. 10 mA on the smoke switch control unit for a 1-leaf drive and approx. 20 mA for a 2-leaf drive. à The closing speed in the event of a fire alarm or power failure must be set depending on the leaf weight and spring load. More detailed information about braking force in chapter 23 “De-energised operation”, p. 71. à When a door is closed by spring load, the latching action is triggered by a latching action switch in the gear. X Do not start up the drive with unplugged latching action switch. Before commissioning and during service work with the drive de-energised: à Check the setting of the latching action switch. à Check the function of the brake power circuit by manually opening the door. Set the braking force parameters according to the installation instructions. à In the opening direction, only the spring acts as a brake. à From the open position, the door must close at slow speed due to the spring load. X After a fire alarm or restoration of power, reset the door drive on site, see chapter … “Triggering and reset of holding open”, p. 56. X … F-board DCU 801 For the smoke switch control unit or lintel-mounted smoke switch, the F-board DCU 801 is built into the door drives Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R. … Jumper X X A jumper must be inserted for controls without an F-board. Only insert jumper when switched off. In normal operation, smoke switch control unit or lintel-mounted smoke switch deliver a 24V voltage to the hold-open output. The 24V voltage supplies the F-board DCU801 and the door drive can be operated in normal operation as long as this voltage is applied. In the event of a fire alarm or power failure, the smoke switch control unit or lintel-mounted smoke switch switch this 24V voltage at the F-board DCU801 off. The door closes through spring load (passive operation). 55 Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors Powerturn … Setting latching action switch The latching action, for overcoming the lock latch, must not start until 10° before the master key system at the earliest. When a door is closed by spring load, the latching action is triggered by a latching action switch in the gear. The latching action switch is connected to the printed circuit board DCU800. The contact of the mechanically confirmed switch (when door closed) is open. For further information about setting the limit switch, see the installation instructions for Powerturn (“ … Reference documents” on page 7). … DCU8-F GF,SF END … 1 … Latching action switch … Triggering and reset of holding open Triggering of the hold-open system by a fire alarm, power failure, manual trigger switch or by manual closing of the door from the open position remains saved until the system is switched to normal operation by a “Reset fire alarm”. Always only reset a triggered hold-open system on site, and use one of the following possibilities to do this: à Switch mode of operation over at the modes of operation switch à Switch mode of operation over at the DPS (DPS must be installed in the visible area of the door) à Manual opening of the door by more than 80° or the taught opening width. “Reset by switching mode of operation” is not possible remotely (terminal 6-9) and not by radio. The system must be switched to one of the modes of operation automatic (AU), exit only (LS) or hold open (DO). The following combinations can be set using the parameter “Trigger/reset man.” (ST220) or FP (DPS). Parameters ST220/ DPS Meaning/functionality Manual trigger at the door leaf Manual trigger switch necessary Reset by manual opening Reset by chang- Reset via reset ing mode of switch operation Inactive/00 NO YES NO NO YES Reset manual/01 (default) NO YES YES YES NO Trigger manual/02 YES optional NO YES NO Trigger & reset man./03 YES optional YES YES NO With 2-leaf doors the parameters for active and passive leaf must be identical in this function. Reset by manual opening The triggered hold-open system can be rest by manual opening of the door leaf. Set the parameters with: à DPS: FP to 01 (Reset manual) or 03 (Trigger & reset manual). à ST220: “Trigger/reset man.”, “Trigger & reset man.” or “Reset manual”. X Check the reset function during commissioning and service work. Reset with reset switch Parameter setting makes it possible to use a separate reset switch like with older software versions (≤ V2.0). Set the parameters with: à DPS: FP to 00 (inactive) à ST220: “Trigger/reset man.”, “Inactive” For this, connect the smoke switch or the smoke switch control unit to terminal 62 of the DCU801 and not to terminal 63 as shown on the diagram. There must be a reset switch installed on the door drive. 56 Powerturn Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors Triggering with manual trigger switch There must be a manual trigger switch installed if there are no parameters set for triggering via door leaf movement. Connect the manual trigger switch to the smoke switch control unit or the lintel-mounted smoke switch. For more detailed information see the installation instructions for FA GC 150. Triggering by movement of the door leaf The hold-open system can be triggered by manual closing of the opened door leaf. For this, move the door leaf manually with a closing torque of 40...120 Nm in closing direction. Set parameters for “Manual triggering” of the hold-open system by closing the door with: à DPS: FP to 02 (Trigger manual) or FP at 03 (Trigger & reset manual). à ST220: “Trigger/reset man.”, “Trigger manual” or “Trigger & reset man.”. X Check triggering of the hold-open system during commissioning and service work. X When the function retention force opening is used (DPS: 0F or ST220 “Retention force opening”), set the force so that the triggering torque is between 40...120 Nm. X The “Stop” function via a configurable input (DPS: E1/E2/E3 or ST220 PE1/PE2/PE3 function) must not be used here. If this function is not used, a manual trigger switch is necessary. X The manual hold-open time is limited to 10s by triggering through movement of the door leaf (DPS: HO or ST220 hold-open times - manual). … Hold-open system Powerturn F, Powerturn F-IS with smoke switch control unit The smoke switch control unit has its own mains supply. If the manual triggering function is configured, both leaves close if one leaf has been triggered (active leaf or passive leaf). Door drive Powerturn F and F-IS DCU8-F GF DCU801 … DCU8-F SF DCU801 +24 V … 2 +24 V GND … 1 GND RSZ GND 61 61 RSZ GND RSZ 24V 63 63 RSZ 24V 62 62 61 61 10mA 10mA RSZ GND … RSZ GND RSZ … 1 … 3 … 4 HOD … GND … GND … +24 V … Powerturn F active leaf Powerturn F passive leaf, optional Smoke switch control unit RSZ Output for eternal hold-open function When manual triggering is used, the triggering torques must be measured at the active leaves. The must be between 40...120 Nm; if not, set the IS brake accordingly (see chapter “ … Reference documents” on page 7, installation instructions for IS mechanism). 57 Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors Powerturn … Hold-open system Powerturn F/R, Powerturn F/R-IS with integrated lintelmounted smoke switch The lintel-mounted smoke switch can be integrated in the ad-on set or the intermediate cover kit. The smoke switch is supplied with 24V through the Powerturn control. If the manual triggering function is configured, both leaves close if one leaf has been triggered (active leaf or passive leaf). Powerturn F/R and F/R-IS door drive DCU8-F GF DCU801 … DCU8-F SF DCU801 +24 V … 2 +24 V GND … 1 GND RSZ GND 61 61 RSZ GND RSZ 24V 63 63 RSZ 24V 62 62 61 61 10mA 10mA RSZ GND … RSZ GND GC 151 … 4 15mA … 2 … 4 HOD … GND … GND … +24 V … Powerturn F active leaf Powerturn F passive leaf, optional Integrated lintel-mounted smoke switch GC 151 Output for eternal hold-open function When manual triggering is used, the triggering torques must be measured at the active leaves. The must be between 40...120 Nm; if not, set the IS brake accordingly (see chapter “ … Reference documents” on page 7, installation instructions for IS mechanism). … Hold-open system Powerturn F-IS/TS, Powerturn F/R-IS/TS - active leaf automated, passive leaf with door closer and holding magnet The Powerturn F-IS/TS and Powerturn F/R-IS/TS hold-open systems are systems where the active leaf is automated with a Powerturn and the passive leaf has a mechanical door closer. In the hold open mode of operation, the passive leaf is held in the open position by a holding magnet. The closing position of the passive leaf is monitored with a reed-contact. For more detailed information about this, see chapter … “Powerturn IS/TS: Active leaf automated, passive leaf with door closer”, p. 52. Safe closing is guaranteed by a mechanical closing sequence control. 58 Powerturn Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors Set the parameters with: à DPS: à Set ef (3rd menu) to 01 (1-leaf drive), e1 or e2 or e3 (3rd menu) to … 9 (closing position SF) and a1 (3rd menu) to … 2 (holding magnet SF). à ST220: à Set “Door parameters”, “No. of leaves” to “1-leaf drive”, “Signals”, “Input signals”, “PE1 function or PE2 function or PE3 function” to “Closing position SF” and “Output signals”, “PA1 function” to “Holding magnet SF”. X X X X Only use the potential-free output PA1. When a door closer is used, change the system to 1-leaf. Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. … .1 Powerturn F-IS/TS with smoke switch control unit Door drive Powerturn F … PE3 … DCU802 53 PE2 52 +24 V … PE1 51 PA1A 55 PA1B 56 … +24 V GND 63mA … DCU801 +24 V … GND … RSZ GND 61 RSZ 24V 63 62 RSZ GND 61 10mA RSZ … 1 … 3 … 5 … 4 HOD … GND … GND … +24 V … Powerturn F active leaf Passive leaf with door closer Smoke switch control unit RSZ Output for eternal hold-open function Reed switch for the passive leaf closing position Holding magnet (accessory, see FA GC 150) If the passive leaf is fixed using a holding magnet, use a manual trigger switch, since manual triggering of the passive leaf is not possible. When manual triggering is used, the triggering torques must be measured at the active leaves. The must be between 40...120 Nm; if not, set the IS brake accordingly (see chapter “ … Reference documents” on page 7, installation instructions for IS mechanism). 59 Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors Powerturn … .2 Powerturn F/R-IS/TS with lintel-mounted smoke switch Door drive Powerturn F/R … 2 DCU802 PE3 PE2 53 52 +24 V … PE1 51 PA1A 55 PA1B 56 … +24 V GND 63mA … DCU801 +24 V … GND … RSZ GND 61 RSZ 24V 63 62 RSZ GND 61 10mA GC151 … 15mA … 2 … 4 … 6 60 … HOD … GND … GND … +24 V … Powerturn F active leaf Passive leaf with door closer Integrated lintel-mounted smoke switch GC151 Output for eternal hold-open function Reed switch for the passive leaf closing position Holding magnet (accessory, FA GC 150) If the passive leaf is fixed using a holding magnet, use a manual trigger switch, since manual triggering of the passive leaf is not possible. When manual triggering is used, the triggering torques must be measured at the active leaves. The must be between 40...120 Nm; if not, set the IS brake accordingly (see chapter “ … Reference documents” on page 7, installation instructions for IS mechanism). Powerturn 19 Mains connection Mains connection Transom installation … AC AC … 4 BK BK PE RD BN WH BU … 2 230 V 50 Hz L BN N PE … 1 … BU … 4 GN/YE PE L L PE PE N L N L L L L L PE PE PE PE PE PE N N N N N N … 6 … 1 … 3 … 5 Mains fuse Main switch (optional) Control AC IN Transformer Main switch, internal … 7 … 9 To second drive Mounting plate 230 V T-distributor 230 V 50 Hz additional device, max. 700 W Door leaf installation … AC AC BK … 6 BK PE 230 V 50 Hz BN L N PE … 1 … 1 … BU … 4 GN/YE PE RD BN WH BU … L L L L PE PE PE PE N N N N … 9 … 2 … 4 … Mains fuse Main switch (optional) Connection box Drip loop Control AC IN L N PE … 7 … 9 Transformer Main switch, internal Mounting plate To second drive 61 Mains connection Powerturn … Mounting plate with integrated power supply circuit … .1 Structure  à Make sure the mounting plate is in the correct position, see directional arrow (1). à Mains connection always on the hinge side (secondary closing edge). à The connection to the drive is on the facing side. … .2 Connection drive – mounting plate   X Push the drive in place so that the electric connection is established between the connector (1) on the mounting plate and the connector (2) of the drive. … .3 Connecting to the mains X X Note chapter … “Reference documents”, p. 7. Note chapter … “Accessories”, p. 112. If the mains supply line is connected to the installed drive, the connection board DCU802 must be removed. Strip the mains cable (1). à Stripping length = 40 mm à Stripping length = … mm à PE line lead = … mm … mm X … 62 max. 40 mm PE … mm Powerturn Mains connection Insert screwdriver (2) or similar into the opening of connector (3). X Push the cores into connector (3). X Remove screwdriver (2) again. X … 2 X Push the rubber sleeve (4) over the connector and cable. X Push the locking device (5) onto the connector. …  X Insert the connector with the feeder into the mounting plate. à In the connected state, the rubber sleeve (4) must completely enclose the connector (3) and cable (1). à No individual wires may be visible.    63 Motor gear unit 20 Powerturn Motor gear unit WARNING Danger of injury through link arm or lever arm snapping back! Danger of injury from hot motor gear unit! X Disconnect motor gear unit from the control only if spring is relaxed. Encoder YE Encoder … GN B … WH A … BN 5V … GND … GND … Thermo … Motor B WH WH … RD … BK M + MOT … 1 Motor A DCU800 … 2 64 Temperature sensor Motor gear unit Powerturn 21 Control unit Control unit 15 17 16 … 2 … 4 … 6 … 8 … Slot for F-board DCU801 Service buttons and service LEDs LED 24V ext Brake Ventilator Rotary encoder Motor gear unit Temperature sensor Latching action switch 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 LED solenoid valve PROG Slot for radio board WRB-5 FREE 24 V RS485 Safety fuse F1, AC IN (10 A T, … × 10 mm) Main switch 65 Commissioning and service 22 Powerturn Commissioning and service Commissioning and service can be performed using the display programme switch DPS, the internal service keys or the service app. … Commissioning … .1 Pre-conditions à Drive à attached à untaught à set to factory setting à Electrical installation is complete. à During commissioning the DPS displays “LE” and the operating modes LED is yellow. à During new teach-in of drive: both drives to automatic mode of operation. à With a 2-leaf system, the parameter “Number of leaves” (EF) must be set on both drives first. … .2 Carrying out commissioning CAUTION CAUTION Danger of injury with opened drive. With the cover removed, à do not reach into the area with moving parts. à wear tight-fitting clothes. à wear a hair net if necessary. Risk of injury by trapping, knocking, shearing and hair etc. being pulled in at unsecured points. With the cover removed, do not reach into the danger area. CAUTION Danger of injury due to sharp edges in the drive. With the cover removed, do not reach into the danger area. CAUTION Danger of injury through link arm or lever arm snapping back. Disconnect motor gear unit from the control only if spring is relaxed. Check whether the drive works mechanically when de-energised (check by hand). Switch the main switch on. X Set the peripheral equipment before the teaching run. X Perform the teaching run as described in chapter … “Teaching run”, p. 66. The safety sensor is active due to learning wall blanking. X Check the functionality of the safety sensors. X Check other functionality. X X Optional: The braking effect in de-energised state can be set for different door weights. See chapter 23 “De-energised operation”, p. 71. … Teaching run à For the teaching run to be carried out, the drive must be completely installed and supplied with voltage. à The spring load required (EN4–7) must be set before the teaching run, see Powerturn installation instructions. X Mechanically set on drive and calibrate on the door leaf. à If “Start teaching” is started using the parameter menu (DPS, ST220, service keys), the user has … minute to start the teaching process. à If the door is not moved within this time, the drive cancels the teaching run and retains the data previously stored. à As delivered, the safety sensors are configured as active. à The teaching run starts and ends in the closing position so that the drive learns the direction of opening/closing movement properly. 66 Powerturn Commissioning and service The following points must be observed: à Activating the safety sensor within the movement run (part of the teaching process) does not stop the door leaf. For this reason, only carry out a movement run under supervision or with passage safeguard. à If the door leaf is blocked within the movement run, fault message 25 is issued and the teaching run must be repeated. If a 2-leaf system has to be taught, the parameter “Number of leaves” (EF) must first be installed on both drives: X Select the parameter with service terminal ST220 or the display programme switch DPS and set the value 02 for active leaf and the value 03 for passive leaf. X Connect both drives. X Set both drives to automatic mode of operation. The drive differentiates between two conditions: à The drive is as delivered (factory setting)  untaught à Drive is already taught and needs to be taught again. 67 Commissioning and service Powerturn … Teaching a 1-leaf system Step Actions … Select parameter “Start teaching” and press the Start teaching ENTER key. X Select 1-leaf system. X Start the respective teaching in DPS (NT): LE à LE for 1-leaf system. X Exit display. ○●●●● A beep sounds (1 × … s). The drive is as delivered or has been set to the factory setting. The following system parameters are displayed in succession: X Set system parameter for the present project. Type of installation OH Leaf width F8 X When teaching using the service interface, Door weight t6 the parameters must be set before the S1 teaching begins, see chapter … “Service Closing safety sensor Safety sensor open S3 buttons S1 and S2”, p. 95. … 1 … 3a 3b 4a 4b ST220 display DPS display Service LED display (5  1) X à Testing: Testing à 24 V or energy-saving mode for GC 338 Electric strike type à GND for GC 334, GC 342, GC 342+ Bolt message contact type If the teaching is carried out again, the parameter menu 3a is no longer displayed. X Wait until the “Open manually” display appears. X Open door leaf manually up to the desired opening Open manually position. The drive gives out an an acoustic warning signal in order to display max. drive-related open positions. The interruption of the warning signals is always shorter, extending to the max. open position. tE to rr L1 ●○○○● à If the beep continues to sound, the door leaf is in the range of the max. open position (±3°). à In this setting, there is a possibility that the drive does not work properly or is permanently damaged. X Carry out the teaching run again to avoid this. … 6 … 8 … 10 68 ●○○●○ Move the door leaf by hand to the desired closing Close manually L2 position. X Press the input enter key. The display is acknowledged. ●○○●● If GC 338 is installed: Press “Teach in” L3 X Press the “Teach in” key on the sensor and wait for 10 s. Otherwise (if GC 338 is not installed), proceed with point 7. X Press the input enter key. ●○○●● Press “Teach in” L3 The display is acknowledged. ●○●○○ The movement run starts automatically after … s. Movement run L4 à Wall blanking is taught. In this run, sensors are not switched as “active”. à An obstruction is not identified. à If a blockage is detected within the movement run, fault 25 is set. The teaching run must then be repeated. When the door leaf arrives in the closing position at the end of the movement run, a beep (2 × … s) is sounded. The teaching run is finished and the display depends The main menu is displayed The main The operatupon the peripheral device. menu is ing mode is displayed displayed X Powerturn Commissioning and service … Teaching a 2-leaf system Step Actions ST220 display … Select parameter “Start teaching” and press the ENTER key. X Select 2-leaf system. X Start the respective teaching in DPS (NT): à LE for 2-leaf system. A beep sounds (1 × … s) Start teaching … 2 X DPS display Service LED display (5  1) L2 In the case of a 2-leaf system, the teaching begins on the active leaf. 3a 3b 4a 4b The drive is as delivered or has been set to the factory setting. The following parameters are displayed in succession: X Set system parameter for the present project. Type of installation OH à Testing: Leaf width F8 à 24 V or energy-saving mode for GC 338 Door weight t6 à GND for GC 334, GC 342 Closing safety sensor S1 Safety sensor open S3 Testing tE Electric strike type to Bolt message contact type rr If the teaching is carried out again, the parameter menu 3a is no longer displayed. X Wait until the “Open manually” display appears. X Open door leaf manually up to the desired opening Open manually L1 position. The drive gives out an an acoustic warning signal in order to display max. drive-related open positions. The interruption of the warning signals is always shorter, extending to the max. open position. à If the beep continues to sound, the door leaf is in the range of the max. open position (±3°). à In this setting, there is a possibility that the drive does not work properly or is permanently damaged. X Carry out the teaching run again to avoid this. 69 Commissioning and service Powerturn Step Actions … Move the door leaf by hand to the desired closing Close manually position. X Press the input enter key. The display is acknowledged. If GC 338 is installed and a wall is to be taught: Press “Teach in” L3 X Press the “Teach in” key on the sensor interface 2x and wait for 10 s. Otherwise (if GC 338 is not installed), proceed with point 7. X Press the input enter key. Press “Teach in” L3 The display is acknowledged. ●○●○○ The movement run starts automatically after … s. Movement run L4 à Wall blanking is taught. In this run, sensors are not switched as “active”. à An obstruction is not identified. à If a blockage is detected within the movement run, fault 25 is set. The teaching run must then be repeated. The active leaf opens up to the opening position automatically and remains in this position until the end of the teaching run for the passive leaf. The passive leaf is now taught in the same way as the 1-leaf system, see chapter … “Teaching a 1-leaf system”, p. 68. When the passive leaf arrives in the closing position at the end of the movement run, a beep (2 × … s) is sounded. After the teaching is finished, the active leaf closes automatically. The teaching run is finished and the display depends The main menu is displayed The main The operatupon the peripheral device. menu is dis- ing mode is played displayed … 7 … 9 10 11 12 13 ST220 display X DPS display Service LED display (5  1) L2 Teaching a 2-leaf system with service keys is not possible. … Forces and speeds … .1 Forces The forces set using “Opening force” (FO), “Opening retention force” (0F), “Closing retention force” (CF), “Force closing position” (FS) or “Closing force” (FC) always refer to N at the main closing edge. à For the ST220, the values correspond directly to the main closing edge. à For the DPS (with OFF), the values correspond to ×10 N at the main closing edge. In addition, the “Obstacle” parameter ( B h) also has an impact on the force (“Opening force” and “Closing force”) during the movement. A higher value for the obstacle parameter may be desired, depending on the mass and the desired speed of the door. This has a direct impact on manual opening, see chapter 25 “Resilience to external influences or load due to wind pressure”, p. 72. … .2 Speeds The “Opening time” ( O T), “Closing time” ( C T) and “Manual closing time” (s6 ) speeds are always calculated for a 90° opening angle. This means: à If the opening angle is taught at less than 90°, the movement time is faster than the set value. à If the opening angle is taught at greater than 90°, the movement time for the complete angle of movement is higher than the set value. à The drive continues past the 90° to the opening position at this speed. Exception: The “Closing latching action” (SC) value is not a real value. It does not correspond to a unit. 70 Powerturn 23 De-energised operation De-energised operation The door can be manually opened even when in switched-off or de-energised operation. In the opening direction, the spring load acts as a brake. In the closing direction, the door must close from the open position by means of the spring load with a slower speed. This parameter can be used to set this closing speed in de-ener­gised operation. If a fire alarm has been triggered (fault 07), the braking force cannot be set. à DPS: … 2 01 … 14. à ST220: Set “Movement parameters”, “Speeds”, “Braking force” to the desired braking force (01 … 14). In a connected state after completion of the teaching process the value for the parameters “Braking force” must be set as follows: à for personal protection; the closing time must be kept in accordance with the table minimum closing time 90° to 0° (chapter 27 Lowenergy mode) in the de-energised state. à for a fire protection door; the closing time is in the range between … s and 10 s. Here, 01 is the lowest braking force (high speed) and 14 is the highest braking force (slow speed). In an untaught condition (factory setting) or after resetting to the factory setting, the braking force is set and works in both directions of movement. After initial teaching, the value is automatically set to 13 and is only effective in the closing direction. 24 Free swing function à The parameter “free swing function” is used to determine how the drive reacts to external loading. à When the free swing function parameter is set, the drive will allow you to manually push the door to open or close it even in automatic operation. à The door movement brakes automatically before the door is opened completely by the adjusted back check. à DPS: Set … 2 (3rd menu) to 01 . à ST220: Set “Movement parameters” and “Free swing function” to “Yes”. The free swing function parameter is not set for exposed exterior doors with high load due to wind pressure or doors exposed to overpressure, otherwise the drive cannot optimally respond to the external load, such as wind load. 71 Resilience to external influences or load due to wind pressure 25 Powerturn Resilience to external influences or load due to wind pressure In the event of exposed exterior doors with high load due to wind pressure or doors exposed to overpressure, the drive can be set using the “Opening force, FO”, “Closing force, FC” and “Obstacle, B h” parameters to ensure an optimal response to external influences. The drive pushes against the external influences with the set force and for the set time (“Obstacle, B h” parameter). The higher the set value, the more resilient the drive towards load due to wind pressure, for example, ensuring reliable opening and closing. However, manual passage is then no longer as convenient. Manual passage of the door is easier with low set values. However, this also reduces the resilience to load due to wind pressure, for example. 26 Door closer operation If frail people and/or children use the door and the risk analysis states that appropriate safety measures must be selected, the “Door closer mode” ( Ts) parameter must be set to … or … and the “Door closer torque” ( D f) parameter must be set to 0. This does not apply, if the door closing movement in the door closer mode is safeguarded with safety sensors. The behaviour of the drive can be set so that its function corresponds to that of a mechanical door closer. X In the service menu, set the “Door closer mode” ( Ts) parameter to the desired behaviour in the door closer mode. The speed within the torque-controlled closing is set using the “Manual closing” parameter. X X Note low-energy mode, see chapter 27 “Low-energy mode”, p. 73. In a 2-leaf swing door system, both drives must always be set to the same door closer mode. Door closer operation function table ( Ts) Setting of door closer operation Manually Door closing torque ( D f) equal to … Nm ( Ts = 00) Door closing torque ( D f) 01 … 70 Nm Automatic ( Ts = 01) 72 Door closing torque ( D f) equal to … Nm Door closing torque ( D f) 01 … 70 Nm Explanation Speed-controlled closing after automatic and manual opening (SIS and obstacle detection active). Speed-controlled closing after automatic opening (SIS and obstacle detection active). Following activation by KI, KA or KB and parameter setting “Rev. closing auto”, “Active”, the door reverses in the event of a blockage during closing. In the event of manual opening and parameter setting “Rev. closing manual”, “Active” reverses the door in the event of a blockage during closing. Torque-controlled closing following manual opening (SIS active or inactive). Drive closes the door at the set door closing torque. The drive pushes against an obstacle or reverses depending on the SIS parameter setting. Speed-controlled closing after automatic and manual opening (SIS and obstacle detection active). Torque-controlled closing after automatic and manual opening (SIS active or inactive). The drive always closes the door at the set door closing torque. Following activation by KI, KA or KB and parameter setting “Rev. closing auto”, “Active”, the door reverses in the event of a blockage during closing. In the event of manual opening and parameter setting “Rev. closing manual”, “Active” reverses the door in the event of a blockage during closing. Powerturn Low-energy mode Observing low-energy operation The table shows compliance with low-energy function depending on door width and max. door closing torque. Door width [m] … 27 max. door closing torque [Nm] 48 54 60 66 70 70 70 70 70 Low-energy mode à Doors set to low-energy function generally do not require any additional protective devices, if no people in special need of protection are expected to use the door. à In the case of 2-leaf doors both drives must be set to low-energy operation. The Powerturn drive can be operated as a low-energy drive if the following conditions are met: à in a de-energised state: à The spring's retention force and opening force must be set to <67 N at the main closing edge. à The closing time must be set from 90° to 0° using the table below. X Once the power is connected, set the value for the “Braking force” parameter so that the closing time is complied with in the de-energised state. à in an electrified state: à Static force on the main closing edge is <67 N. X The opening and closing force must be set to 60 using the “Opening force” and “Closing force” or FO and FC parameters. à The kinetic energy in the door leaf has to be limited to … J. X The opening time and the closing time of the door must be set accordingly using the parameters “Opening time” or O T and “Closing time”, “Manual closing time” or C T and s6 in line with the table below. X The hold-open times (or, oH, OP, HO, oS parameters) must be set to >5 s. The following table shows the minimum opening time from 0° to 80° and the minimum closing time from 90° to 10°. Door weight [kg]/ 60 Leaf width [mm] 800 … 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 370 400 430 460 490 520 550 580 600 … 5 … 6 … 7 … 7 900 … 5 … 6 … 7 … 8 … 9 1000 … 5 … 7 … 8 … 9 … 10 1100 … 6 … 7 … 8 … 9 10 10 1200 … 6 … 8 … 8 10 10 11 11 1300 … 7 … 8 … 10 11 11 12 – 1400 … 7 … 9 10 11 11 12 – 1500 … 8 … 10 11 11 12 – – 1600 … 8 … 10 11 12 – – – … 8 … 9 … 9 … 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 12 – 12 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – … 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Example: Leaf weight: 90 kg, leaf width 1000 mm The opening time must be set to … s and closing time must be set to … s. If the drive does not fulfil these requirements, it is in low-energy function. The leaf movement must then be safeguarded using protective devices. The set static and dynamic forces must be measured in. 73 Servo mode 28 Powerturn Servo mode The GEZE Powerturn drive can be operated as a servo drive. It supports the user torque-controlled during manual opening. The servo drive is operated and set within the automatic operating mode. The servo mode can only be used for 1-leaf doors. The power support is divided into … functional areas: à Servo support with additional servo torque à Servo support with additional servo torque and additional torque for fire alarm … Servo support with additional servo torque The drive supports the force required to manually open the door so that the door can be opened manually even under adverse environmental conditions such as wind or dynamic pressure in a staircase. The servo support can be adjusted. The door can be accelerated manually with the aid of the servo drive up to the maximum speed at low-energy. If this speed is reached, the drive slows the door movement. The following parameters must be set: à Servo duration ( aD ): Duration of the servo support from activation à Additional servo torque ( a O ): force-supporting torque for easy manual opening When activation is via KI, KA, PE-KI, PE-KA, PE-switch function, FK1, or KI+SIS, KA+SIS or with Push & Go bracket set, the drive opens the door with the additional servo torque set. The drive closes the door again after the set servo duration ( aD ) has expired. In the event of activation via KB, FK2 opens the drive speed-controlled with the set values “Opening force”, “Closing force”, “Opening time” and “Closing time”. à The additional servo torque ( a O ) must be set for the low-energy function. à The safety sensors SIO and SIS are evaluated and react as set. In night mode, the drive does not reverse in the case of a blockage, it presses against the obstacle with the set force or torque. … Servo support with additional servo torque and additional torque servo fire alarm … .1 Servo function with additional torque servo fire alarm à Project-related approval is required for use of the function on fire protection doors. à The drive must be supplied by a on-site safety power supply or an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). à Only manually operated activation devices (e.g. push buttons, contact mats) are permitted. X Connect lintel-mounted smoke switch GC 151 to the drive as described in chapter 18 “Smoke switch control unit”. Function The servo support function with fire alarm and additional torque applies for fire protection doors which are installed in stairwells and which open towards the staircase as escape route exit doors in the event of a fire alarm in the building (not triggered locally at the drive through the smoke switch control unit). The excess air pressure in the staircase to clear smoke from the escape routes makes manual opening of the door more difficult. With the set torque “Servo fire alarm”, the drive supports every activation if a 24V signal “Fire alarm” from the building control centre is queued at input PE1, PE2 or PE3. In the event of a fire in the direct vicinity of the door, the lintel-mounted smoke switch installed in the door area triggers a shut-down of the drive motor and the electric strike. In this case, the door closes by spring load. The door can then only be opened manually, without force support by the drive. The door drive can only be operated again in normal operation after a reset fire alarm has been carried out. For more detailed information on the reset fire alarm see chapter 18 “Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors”, p. 55. 74 Powerturn Servo mode … PE1 PE2 PE3 … 2 24 V 51 PE1 or 52 PE2 53 PE3 … 2 On-site building control centre The potential-free output switches the configurable input “Fire alarm servo”. WARNING Risk of injury due to high dynamic forces of the servo function with fire alarm! X In the event of a fire alarm, no-one may be near the door when it opens. With activation (KB), the drive opens the door at a set additional servo torque ( a O ) plus the set opening torque “Servo fire alarm” ( fa). The “Servo fire alarm” opening torque ( fa) is only available as long as the fire alarm signal (24V) is queued at the configurable input (PE1 or PE2 or PE3, set function “Servo fire alarm”). Set the following parameters: à Duration of the servo support (0–20 s): à with DPS: Set aD to the desired time. à with ST220: Set “Movement parameters”, “Servo duration” to the desired time. à Level of desired additional opening torque (0–50 Nm): à with DPS: Set a O to the desired additional torque level. à with ST220: Set “Movement parameters”, “Additional servo torque” to the desired amount. à Fire alarm function of the configurable input PE1 or PE2 or PE3: à with DPS: Set e1 or e2 or e3 to … 2 (fire alarm servo). à with ST220: Set “Signals”, “Input signals”, “PE … function” or “PE … function” or “PE … function” to “Fire alarm servo”. à Level of additional “Servo fire alarm” opening torque (0–70 Nm) in case of fire: à with DPS: Set fa to the desired additional opening torque level in case of fire. à with ST220: Set “Movement parameters”, “Servo fire alarm” to the desired amount. Torque [Nm] à The additional servo torque ( a O ) must be set for the low-energy function. à Safety sensor open (SIO) is not evaluated in the event of an activated “Fire alarm servo” function. The drive pushes against an obstacle in the opening direction with the set additional servo torque plus the torque servo fire alarm. à Safety sensor close (SIS) is not evaluated in the event of an activated “Fire alarm servo” function. The drive pushes against an obstacle in the closing direction with the set closing torque. 0–50 Nm Additional servo torque Servo duration 0–20 s 0–70 Nm Servo fire alarm 0–50 Nm Additional servo torque Servo duration 0–20 s Duration [s] 75 Service menu 29 Powerturn Service menu … Service terminal ST220 à Commissioning of the drive is possible with the service terminal ST220, software version V2.1 or higher. à Connection either via 5-pin connector RS485 or using … mm TRS connector (with adapter cable). … .1 ST220 operation Key Function à Cursor upwards à Increase number value à Scroll upward (if key is pressed longer than … s) à Cursor downwards à Decrease number value à Scroll downward (if key is pressed longer than … s) à Cancel input Any input can be cancelled by pressing the x key. The input position then changes to the first menu position or one menu level back. à Select à Update display à Accept new value Entering values in service terminal ST220 X Change value with  and . X Confirm using  . X Abort using x if necessary. Display directly after connection GEZE Service terminal … XXXXXYWWJJZZZZZZV Software version ST220 V2.1 Serial number ST220 … .2 Service mode ST220 à The change to service mode occurs when the service terminal is connected to DCU8. à Service is possible in modes of operation LS, AU, OFF and DO. à In service mode, the door remains in operation in the current mode of operation (not when teaching is activated). à From software version … upwards, the hardware version is recognised. If there is no compatibility, the drive changes to safety switch-off and sets the fault “Wrong HW/SW combination”. Display after connection to the door controller Powerturn V2.1 F0 DCU8ST Automatic Closed or Powerturn V2.1 F1 DCU8GD Automatic Closed 76 Drive type Basic board DCU200 Mode of operation Door mode Software version V2.1, hardware version F0 Powerturn Service menu … Connecting service terminal ST220 Service terminal ST220 is connected to connection board DU802 (3) using the socket for the … mm TRS connector (1) or alternatively at the connector plug for DPS (2). … Service menu ST220 See chapter … “DPS service menu and service buttons S1/S2 with LEDs”, p. 97. for explanations of the individual parameters. … .1 Parameter setting for a 2-leaf drive Selection of active leaf/passive leaf parameter setting Selection GF SF Active leaf Para* Passive leaf Para Selection of the parameter setting GF or SF Setting of active leaf parameter setting Setting of passive leaf parameter setting … .2 Main menu A 4-digit password must be entered before the main menu can be accessed: Password ---- Only possible if the menu is password-protected. Designation Mode of operation Door parameters Movement parameters Signals Diagnosis Standard values Reset DCU8 Start teaching Factory setting Delete maintenance Password Language Reference see section … .3 “Mode of operation”, p. 78. see section … .4 “Door parameters”, p. 78. see section … .5 “Movement parameters”, p. 79. see section … .6 “Signals”, p. 82. see section … .7 “Diagnosis”, p. 91. see section … .8 “Standard values”, p. 92. see section … .9 “Reset DCU8”, p. 93. see section … .10 “Start teaching”, p. 93. see section … .11 “Factory setting”, p. 93. see section … .12 “Delete maintenance”, p. 93. see section … .13 “Password”, p. 94. see section … .14 “Language”, p. 94. 77 Service menu Powerturn … .3 Mode of operation Designation Setting values Operation mode* Off Night Shop closing Automatic Permanent Open Type Opening … leaf Open … leaves Open Open Door Open Door Explanation Operating mode setting Press the  key Only open active leaf. Open active and passive leaves when activated. Activate the door using ST220. … .4 Door parameters Designation Number of leaves 1. Sub-menu 1-leaf drive moving leaf fixed leaf Leaf width value: 11 x10cm min … x10cm max 16 x10cm value: 100 kg 200 kg 300 kg 600 kg DCU8 DCU8 _ F KM BS GLS KM BG GLS KM BG GST TM BS GLS TM BS GST TM BG GLS spring force close Auto operation 000000000000 Leaf weight Control Unit Type Mounting Type Drive type Operating Mode Operator serial no Maintenance Locking Type 78 operation time number of cycles no locking fail-secure fail-safe Motor lock f.-secure w. pressure f.-safe w. pressure Motor lock pressure 2. Sub-menu Explanation The parameters are used to set the leaf on which the drive is installed. The door weight influences the safe speed. Display only KM BG HS GLS GST TM Auto operation operation time value 12 month min … month max 99 month number of cycles value … min … max … Transom installation Opposite hinge side Hinge side Guide rail Link arm Door leaf installation Entry of the Serial Number The cycle counter is incremented by one: à every time the opening position is reached after automatic activation à every time the standstill position is reached after manual opening if the drive would like to close afterwards. Electric strike type, drive, has no closing force before opening. Drive has closing force before opening. Set in connection with an opening delay. Powerturn Service menu Designation Opening delay Day 1. Sub-menu value: … s * … min … s * … max 90 s * … Opening delay Night value: min max ECO Mode not activ activ GEZE-bus adress value: min max 2. Sub-menu Explanation Delayed opening day: Time before the drive opens the door. Only applies in the automatic, exit only operating modes. Delayed opening night mode: Time before the drive opens the door. Only applies in the night operating mode. The 24 supply voltage (24VSENS) at terminal … is switched off after switchover to the modes of operation DO and OFF (after <10s) and NA (after 10min). Note: Activation via access control of KB in the event of NA, as well as closing the door when switching from DO to AU, requires a few seconds, as the system first has to boot up. For DCU103 … s * … s * … 90 s * … 0 99 value value value … .5 Movement parameters Designation Speeds 1. Sub-menu Opening Time Close Time Manual closing time latching speed Obstacle reaction 2. Sub-menu value: … s max 25 s value: … s max 25 s value: … s max 25 s value: … max 50 min min min min … 5 … 0 Off Obstacle Motor On Obstacle Motor Off Drive release *) no yes s s s Explanation Opening time*) with automatic opening. Setting pursuant to the table in the Powerturn installation instructions. Closing time*) after automatic opening. Setting pursuant to the table in the Powerturn installation instructions. Closing time after manual opening or after automatic opening with set automatic door closing mode. Setting pursuant to the table in the Powerturn installation instructions. Sets the speed at which the drive moves to the closing position shortly before closing. This is required e.g. for operation with a motor lock. Latching action also applies for manual passage. In the event of further opening attempts, the drive stops before the obstacle in the opening range. Drive presses against obstacle in the opening range. Drive presses against obstacle in the opening range and reduces motor current to … A. For doors without external loads, such as wind or pressure, the “Free swing function” parameter can be activated in order to enable optimum passage of the door. The values for opening time and closing time refer to an opening angle of 90°. 79 Service menu Designation Powerturn 1. Sub-menu Close power fail 2. Sub-menu value: 13 min Forces Opening force Closing force Obstacle Per opening pressure Per closing pressure latching force Manual torque … value max 14 value: 150 N min 10 N max 250 N value: 150 N min 10 N max 250 N value: … s min … s max 20 0,1 s value: 00 N min 00 N max 70 N value: 00 N min 00 N max 70 N value: min max 50 N 00 N 150 N value: min max … Nm … Nm 70 Nm Explanation Braking force during closing via spring action following power failure or fire alarm. Open static force at the main closing edge. Close static force at the main closing edge. Time for which the drive pushes against an obstacle with the set static force. Constant force at the main closing edge in open position. Constant force at the main closing edge in closed position. Force acts after the end of the latching action in the closed position. Manual opening is more difficult during the set time. The greater the force set, the longer the duration. Examples: for 10 N= … s, for 150 N = … s Door closing torque time after manual opening. 0...40: 41...70: Hold-open times Push and Go Manual value: … s max 60 s min … s min value: max … s 70 s nein … leaves (Summer) value: … s 1.leaf (Winter) value: max 60 s KB 80 … s min min … s … s … s max 60 s value: … s max 60 s min … s or safety sensors necessary. Hold-open time during passage with Push and Go. Hold-open time for manual opening. “No” corresponds to an unlimited hold-open time, no automatic closing. If manual triggering is set, the value is limited to max. 10s. With activation KI, KA 2-leaf opening (AU-So) Setting on GF control. With activation KI, KA 1-leaf drive (AU-Wi, AU-So) 2-leaf opening (AU-So) Setting on GF control. For activation by KB. Powerturn Designation Service menu 1. Sub-menu Close delay GF 2. Sub-menu -> EN16005 min … s max Reversing Servo Duration dynamic HO increase no yes Rev. manual Close not activ activ Rev. autom. Close not activ activ Explanation 16 s value: min max value: min max … s … s 20 s … Nm … Nm 50 Nm Servo Fire alarm value: min max … Nm … Nm 70 Nm Release/Reset man. inactive Release/Reset man. Ausloesung manuell Reset manually value: 50 % min 10 % max 80 % value: 10 % min … % max 95 % Servo torque Backcheck Fixed start point Push and Go Wert: min max … % … % 20 % … s: both leaves close simultaneously. 01 … 15 s: The active leaf closes some time after the passive leaf. 16 s: Active leaf does not close until after the passive leaf has closed completely. When actuated, the passage frequency is taken into account in the hold-open time. The door does not close as fast when passage requirements are increased. Reversing in the event of an obstruction within closing following manual opening. Reversing in the event of an obstruction within closing following automatic opening. Adjustable duration of the force support in servo mode. Adjustable torque of force support for manual opening (limited in time through “servo duration”). Adjustable torque for powersupport for fire alarm if 24 V applied to PE1 or PE2. Acts in addition to “additional servo torque”. See servo function with fire alarm, chapter … .1 “Servo function with additional torque servo fire alarm”, p. 74. Settable functions for manual triggering and reset via the door leaves, see chapter 18. Application of the back check, referenced to maximum opening range (manual opening). Start of the passive leaf at opening range of the active leaf, referenced to its maximum opening range. Note EN 16005 with 50 cm gap between the two main closing edges. 0%: No Push And Go 1–20%: Push And Go Response range referenced to maximum opening range (=100). 81 Service menu Powerturn Designation Adjust Opening angle 1. Sub-menu close pos. tolerance Door closer mode Manual interference 2. Sub-menu value: min max Explanation The value is only for fine adjustment. The value is taught during the teaching run and then corresponds to point 0. This allows it to be adjusted manually and, again, subsequently corresponds to point 0. The opening value can thus be manually adjusted step-by-step. Is not set in the factory setting. value: 30 *0,1 degree Angle on the drive axle to finemin … *0,1 degree tune the tolerance in the closing max 90 *0,1 degree position from which the drive attempts to close again. X Set the value so that the door gap is as small as possible before the drive closes again. Manual Manual: The door only closes Automatic with the set door closing torque after manual opening, otherwise speed-controlled. Automatic: The door always closes with the set door closing torque regardless of the type of activation. value: … value Sets, within the automatic closmin … value ing, the option to manually inmax 10 value tervene in the door movement from the SIO page. When active, the door can then be manually reopened. 0: = off, 1: = easy, 10: = difficult … Grad -9 Grad … Grad … .6 Signals Designation Input signals 1. Sub-menu 2. Sub-menu SI1-terminal SIS Current state SI1 contact SIS function 3. Sub-menu SI1-terminal SIS Z->not active K->normally closed F->SIS rev unused normally closed Frequence SIS rev SIS and KI SIS and KA SIS stop 82 Explanation Parameter sets the use of the safety sensor close contact type. If the safety sensor close triggers, the door reverses. If the safety sensor close triggers, the drive reacts as with activation KI. If the safety sensor close triggers, the drive reacts as with activation KA. If the safety sensor close triggers during a closing movement, the drive stops. Powerturn Designation Service menu 1. Sub-menu 2. Sub-menu SIS Manual SI3-terminal SIO Current state SI3 contact SI3 function 3. Sub-menu not activ activ Explanation Closing safety sensor active/ inactive when closing after manual opening in door close mode. SI3-terminal SIO Z->not activ K->normally closed F->SIO stop unused normally closed Frequence SIO stop SIO stop SF GF SI3 wall blanking value: min max … % … % 99 % not activ activ Lock monitoring Current state Lock monitoring Z->not activ K->normally open F->Bolt switch Lock monitoring normally open normally closed KB Current state KB Z->not activ K->normally open KB contact unsed normally open normally closed SIO Manual Parameter sets the use of the safety sensor open contact type. If the safety sensor open triggers, only the drive on the detected door leaf stops. If the behaviour should be the same for active leaf and SF, both drives must be set to SIO stop SF GF. If the safety sensor open triggers, both active leaf and passive leaf drive stop. 0%: No wall blanking. The range of application for the wall blanking of the safety sensor open is taught during commissioning and can be corrected here. Maximum opening range of the door = 99%. Safety sensor open (SIO) not active during manual opening. Feedback e.g. of a motor lock. The input KB is active in the operating modes AU, LS and NA. With 2-leaf assemblies the mechanical contact can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. On activation the active leaf opens and, if switched on, the passive leaf. Active in every mode of operation when the door is not closed. 83 Service menu Designation Powerturn 1. Sub-menu KI 2. Sub-menu Current state KI contact KI delay KA Current state KA contact KA delay NA Current state NA contact LS Current state LS contact AU Current state AU contact DO Current state DO contact OFF 84 Current state 3. Sub-menu KI Z->not activ K->normally open A->*0.1s unused normally open normally closed value: … s * … min … s * … max 90 s * … KA Z->not activ K->normally open A->*0.1s unused normally open oeffner value: … s * … min … s * … max 90 s * … NA Z->not activ K->normally open unused normally open normally closed LS Z->not activ K->normally open unused normally open normally closed AU Z->not activ K->normally open unused normally open normally closed DO Z->not activ K->normally open unused normally open normally closed OFF Z->not activ K->normally open Explanation The input KI is active in AU and LS mode. With 2-leaf assemblies the contact sensor inside can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. On activation the active leaf opens and, if switched on, the passive leaf. Active in every mode of operation when the door is not closed. Only active when the door is in a closing position. The input contact sensor outside is only active in the AU operating mode. With 2-leaf systems, the contact sensor outside can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. On activation, the active leaf opens and, if switched on, the passive leaf. Active in every mode of operation when the door is not closed. Only active when the door is in a closing position. Powerturn Designation Service menu 1. Sub-menu 2. Sub-menu OFF contact PE1 Current state PE1 function 3. Sub-menu unused normally open normally closed PE1 Z->not activ K->unused F->unused unused Switchover summer Explanation For connection of a push button for the summer function. Switchover winter For connection of a push button for the winter function. Only for switching from 1-leaf to 2-leaf opening, not for actually opening the door. Sabotage NC Permanently switched. If the contact is interrupted KB is not evaluated in the night mode of operation. All other functions remain the same. Closed Pos GF NO Closing position contact of the door leaf à for 1-leaf door à for 1-leaf door drive with manual passive leaf (door closer): Closing position contact of the active leaf à for 2-leaf door: Active leaf contact to GF control, passive leaf contact to SF control P-KI activatin NO Additional contact sensor (P-KI, P-KA activatin NO P-KA). open-close button NO On activation, the output of the push button is closed. With 2-leaf assemblies the push button can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. If the push button is connected to the passive leaf control, both door leaves open and close on activation of the switch function. When the push button is pressed once, the drive opens the door. When the push button is pressed again, the drive closes the door. 85 Service menu Designation Powerturn 1. Sub-menu 2. Sub-menu 3. Sub-menu open-close with HO NO Pushbutn-Reset double push Stop Stop Closed Pos SF WC Control Fire alarm Servo … leaf open PE2 Current state PE2 function 86 PE2 Z->not activ K->unused F->unused unused MPS Switchover summer Switchover winter Sabotage Explanation On activation, the output of the push button is closed. With 2-leaf assemblies the push button can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. If the push button is connected to the passive leaf control, both door leaves open and close on activation of the switch function, even if the type of opening 1-leaf opening is active (bed opening). When the push button is pressed once, the drive opens the door and closes after the hold-open time has expired. When the push button is pressed again (within the hold-open time) the drive closes the door without waiting for the hold-open time to expire. If the push button is connected to the active leaf, the 1-leaf hold-open time is used with 1-leaf use, and the 2-leaf holdopen time with 2-leaf use. NO For restarting the drive. Function as reset. NO 1× press = 1-leaf opening 2× press = 2-leaf opening NO For connection of a stop push NC button. Closing position contact of the passive leaf with 2-leaf door with manual passive leaf (door closer). Connection to the internal push button for the WC function. If active, the function additional servo torque is set with servo fire alarm torque for the duration (servo). In 2-leaf systems, when the signal is active on the active leaf only … leaf is opened. Display only for 2-leaf drives. MPS For connection of an MPS. For connection of a push button NO for the summer function. For connection of a push button NO for the winter function. NC see PE1 Powerturn Designation Service menu 1. Sub-menu 2. Sub-menu 3. Sub-menu Closed Pos Explanation Closing position contact of the door leaf à for 1-leaf door à for 1-leaf door drive with manual passive leaf (door closer): Closing position contact of the active leaf à for 2-leaf door: Active leaf contact to GF control, passive leaf contact to SF control Emerge.lock.20KOhm The input can be used to conNO nect an emergency lock switch. When the emergency lock switch is activated, the contact is closed and … V is applied to the input. The door closes and locks. The contact sensors KA, KI and KB, safety sensors SIS and SIO as well as obstacle detection are hidden. The door remains closed as long as the emergency lock signal is applied to the input. P-KI activatin NO Additional contact sensor (P-KI, P-KA activatin NO P-KA). For connection of additional closing contacts. open-close button NO see PE1 open-close with HO see PE1 NO Stop 12 kOhm NO For the connection of a stop push button with 12 kOhm terminating resistor. Pushbutn-Reset NO For restarting the drive. Function as reset. double push NO 1× press = 1-leaf opening. 2× press = 2-leaf opening. Stop NO For connection of a stop push button. Stop NC For connection of a stop push button. Closed Pos SF Closing position contact of the passive leaf with 2-leaf door with manual passive leaf (door closer). Stop 20 kOhm For the connection of a stop push button with 20 kOhm terminating resistor. WC Control Connection to the internal push button for the WC function. GF NO Fire Alarm Servo See PE1 1-leaf opening In 2-leaf systems, when the signal is active on the active leaf only … leaf is opened. Display only for 2-leaf drives If active, the safety sensors are hidden and the door opens and closes at a safe speed. Fire alarm w/o SI 87 Service menu Designation Powerturn 1. Sub-menu PE3 2. Sub-menu Current state PE3 function 3. Sub-menu PE3 Z->not active K->unused F->unused unused MPS MPS Switchover summer NO Switchover winter NO Sabotage NC Closed Pos GF NO Emerge.lock.20KOhm NO P-KI activatin NO P-KA activatin NO Operating m. button Current state button contact 88 Explanation For connection of an MPS. For connection of a push button for the summer function. For connection of a push button for the winter function. see PE1 Closing position contact of the door leaf à for 1-leaf door à for 1-leaf door drive with manual passive leaf (door closer): Closing position contact of the active leaf à for 2-leaf door: Active leaf contact to GF control, passive leaf contact to SF control see PE2 Additional contact sensor (P-KI, P-KA). For connection of additional closing contacts. open-close button NO see PE1 open-close with HO see PE1 NO Stop 12 kOhm NO For the connection of a stop push button with 12 kOhm terminating resistor. Pushbutn-Reset NO For restarting the drive. Function as reset. double push NO 1× press = 1-leaf opening 2× press = 2-leaf opening Stop NO For connection of a stop push button. Stop NC For connection of a stop push button. Closed Pos SF NO Closing position contact of the passive leaf with 2-leaf door with manual passive leaf (door closer). Stop 20 kOhm NO For the connection of a stop push button with 20 kOhm terminating resistor. WC Control NO Connection to the internal push button for the WC function. Fire Alarm Servo NO See PE1. 1-leaf opening See PE2. Fire alarm w/o SI See PE2. Operating m. button Z -> not activ K -> normally open unused Operating modes push button on the drive not active. Normally open Operating modes push button on the drive active. Powerturn Designation Output signals Service menu 1. Sub-menu PA1 2. Sub-menu Current state PA1 function 3. Sub-menu PA1 Z->not activ F->unused K->normally open unused Gong Error NO Error NC Error MPS Warningsignal add. locking type closed locked closed not closed open Off Night Exit only Automatic Hold open Light activation Day/Night status Service due holding magnet GF holding magnet SF WC Timeout Explanation If KA is triggered. The function is used for fault messages, e.g. to an on-site building control centre. The contact closes or opens respectively if the control determines a fault. The function is used to switch the fault LED at the MPS. The contact closes if the control determines a fault. When maintenance is due, the output is switched cyclically, the fault LED on the MPS flashes. The function is used to cyclically switch an activator on/of while the door is opening or closing. For connection of an additional electric strike. Function in accordance with parameters “Electric strike type”. The function is used to signal the door status, e.g. to a building control centre. The function is used to activate a light controlling device which, for example, switches on the entry illumination as soon as a contact sensor (KI, KA, KB, SIS+KI, SIS+KA) is activated or the door is opened manually. The function is used to signal the day mode of operation to a customer building control centre. The output switches to GND if the mode of operation LS, AU 1-leaf, DO, or AU 2-leaf is set. The function is used to signal the door status, e.g. to a building control centre. For setting the holding magnet (active leaf). For setting the holding magnet (passive leaf). For connection of a lamp or a signal to indicate when the 30min. timer has expired for the WC function. 89 Service menu Designation Powerturn 1. Sub-menu 2. Sub-menu 3. Sub-menu TOE f.secure NO TOE f.safe PA2 Current state PA2 function NC PA2 Z->not activ F->unused K->normally open unused Gong Error NO Error NC Error MPS Warningsignal add. locking type unused closed locked closed not closed open Off Night Exit only Automatic Hold open Light activation Day/Night status unused Service due holding magnet GF holding magnet SF WC Timeout Test SI Current state Test SI Operating Mode LED Current state LED function 90 TOE f.secure NO TOE f.safe NC Test SI Z->not activ K->unused F->No testing no testing Testing with 24V Testing with GND Energy-saving mode Operating Mode LED Z->not activ K->unused F->Operation mode Operation mode inactiv Explanation For connection of a fail-secure electric strike. Only works when the TOE function is active. For connection of a fail-safe electric strike. Only works when the TOE function is active. If KA is triggered. see PA1 see PA1 The function is used to cyclically switch an activator on/off while the door is opening or closing. For connection of an additional electric strike. See PA1. The function is used to signal the door status, e.g. to a building control centre. see PA1 see PA1 see PA1 For setting the holding magnet (active leaf). For setting the holding magnet (passive leaf). For connection of a lamp or a signal to indicate when the 30-minute timer has expired for the WC function. See PA1. See PA1. Testing the safety sensor. Depending on the type used, the testing must be set to 24V or GND here. Disables the mode of operation LED on the drive. Powerturn Service menu … .7 Diagnosis Designation current Values 1. Sub-menu inputs outputs internal data current conditions inputs 2. Sub-menu Explanation SI1 … V SI3 … V RM … V KB … V KI … V KA … V NA … V LS … V AU … V DO … V OFF … V PE1 … V PE2 … V PE3 … V S1 … V S2 … V S3 … V FK1 … V FK2 … V END … V PA1 closed PA2 … V TOE 24 V TEST 24 V FAN … V MAG … V current position 23 % act. Motor current Mot DCU800 … A Voltages Power On 24 V internal xy.z V 24 V external xy.z V Temperatures DCU800 41 degree C M DCU800 45 degree C Statistics Total cycles … Manual cycles … hours 1352 hours Ser 112 Yoke cycle 235 SI1 off SI3 off RM off KB off KI off KA off NA off LS off AU off DO off OFF off PE1 off PE2 off PE3 off S1 off S2 off S3 off FK1 off FK2 off END off 91 Service menu Powerturn Designation 1. Sub-menu outputs error memory current errors 2. Sub-menu PA1 PA2 TOE TEST FAN MAG Error … Error … Error … Error … old errors Error … Error … delete curr.errors delete old errors Configuration drive control unit myGEZE Bluetooth Mod software off off off off off off Cause … Cause … Cause … Cause … Cause … Cause … Cause … Cause … Explanation Cause … Cause … Cause … Cause … no yes no yes Ser Nr 000000000000 OEW left ?xyz Mot.Resist: 1770mOhm Curr.M.Res: 0mOhm Type Powerturn Fer Dat KW xy xzyx SVN 1280:161711 (example) Software Version (only available at DCU112) Start BT-Pairing start pairing at DCU112 Powerturn … F0 SVN 2637:2640M CRC bfd8a87 Id.Nr. 158511 (example) … .8 Standard values Designation Default Values 92 1. Sub-menu no yes 2. Sub-menu Explanation Values are set to standard settings. Position, SIO wall blanking and opening angle are retained. Fault memory is deleted. A teaching run and initialisation run are not necessary. Powerturn Service menu … .9 Reset DCU8 Designation Reset DCU8 1. Sub-menu no yes 2. Sub-menu Explanation Fault memory is deleted. Position and opening angle are not deleted. The processor restarts. A teaching run is not necessary, an initialisation run is necessary. 1. Sub-menu … leaf learning … leaves learning 2. Sub-menu Explanation Starts the teaching procedure. For the procedure, see chapter … “Teaching run”, p. 66. 1. Sub-menu no yes 2. Sub-menu Explanation Reset all the values to the factory settings. The state is like after delivery. Values to standard setting, fault memory, position and opening angle are deleted. A teaching run and initialisation run are necessary. 2. Sub-menu Explanation Clear the maintenance values. … .10 Start teaching Designation Start learning … .11 Factory setting Designation Factory setting … .12 Delete maintenance Designation Service reset 1. Sub-menu no yes 93 Service menu Powerturn … .13 Password Designation Password ST220 1. Sub-menu Password old 0000 Password new ---Password old 00 Password new -- Password DPS Block parameters 2. Sub-menu no yes Explanation for access to the service menu with ST220. Is used to enable the DPS instead of enabling via a key switch. Disabling reoccurs automatically after … minute without push button activation. The first digit specifies how often the key  has to be actuated and the second digit how often the key  has to be actuated to release operation of the DPS. Entering the password in control unit ST220 X Change digit with  or . X Confirm digit and change to next position with  . X Abort with x. Display of the current position by the asterisk under it. X After completing entry, press  to accept the password. à After … minute without a button being pressed or when the service menu is accessed again, the password is required before changes to the operating mode setting or to the parameter settings can be carried out. à The password has to be set separately for the active leaf and passive leaf drive. The active leaf drive and the passive leaf drive can have different passwords. à When the password for ST220 is set, access to the service menu via DPS is no longer possible. à If the password has been forgotten, a special flash file with which the password on the control can be reset to 00 has to be requested from GEZE. à The password cannot be deleted by installing a new software version. … .14 Language Designation Language 94 Setting values german english francais svensk Explanation Powerturn Service menu … Display programme switch DPS The DPS can be used for commissioning and service: à for changing the drive parameters à for teaching the drive à for diagnosis Operating mode Na Night mode ls aU Exit only Automatic DO Hold open Of + simultaneously Service key (1) +  simultaneously Service mode × Cancel and return to first menu level confirm   scroll up increase value  scroll down Reduce value … 2 … OFF Change – – 2-leaf operation 1-leaf operation Change mode of operation / service mode … OFF … 2 … 4 Service button Position unknown Illuminated for maintenance Lights up at 1-leaf operation    Service key S1 Service LEDs Service key S2  … 2 …     … Service buttons S1 and S2   The service buttons S1 and S2 have the following functions: à For diagnosis à For indicating and changing drive parameters à For “teaching” the drive During normal operation the LEDs indicate the current mode of operation. The mode of operation can be changed using keys S1 and S2. Function Input and reaction Open/leave the parameter menu X Simultaneously press buttons S1 and S2 longer than … s. LED5 flashes slowly, corresponding to the selected parameter level: Level 1: … pulse + … s pause Level 2: … pulses + … s pause LED1 through LED4 display the parameter. X Briefly press key S2 (+) or key S1 (–). Parameter selection Switch to value setting Change value X Keep key S1 pressed longer than … s. In the value menu, LED5 is off and LED1 through LED4 display the value in accordance with the value table. X Briefly press key S2 (+) or key S1 (–). Confirm value X Press key S1 longer than … s. Value setting without exiting value change X Press key S2 longer than … s. Reset the values to the factory settings X Set parameter 24 (factory settings) to 01 . 95 Service menu Powerturn System signals à If one or more faults are pending, these are displayed consecutively alternatively with the current mode of operation in encoded form with service LEDs … to 4. à The red LED5 flashes quickly (10 Hz) on the fault display. à The mode of operation is displayed for … s, the respective fault message for … s. Service mode à Individual parameters can be set for the control in service mode. à Within the first … minutes of the mains voltage being switched on, the device can be changed to service mode using keys S1 and S2. à There is a time limit to changing to service mode using keys S1 and S2 so that safety-related parameters are not changed unintentionally during operation. à It is possible to change from any mode of operation to the service mode. à The control automatically changes back to normal operation if no key is pressed in service mode for … minutes. à In service mode, the door drive does not open and close automatically. à The door can be opened and closed manually. Changing to the parameter selection menu X Simultaneously press keys S1 and S2 longer than … s. The control changes to the parameter selection menu. In this menu, the red LED5 flashes once (parameter level 1) or twice (parameter level 2) at … Hz. The parameters are indicated in coded form by the other … LEDs. The desired parameters are selected using keys S1 (–) and S2 (+). Changing to the value menu X Press key S1 for longer than … s. The control changes to the value menu. à All … LEDs are used for coding the values. à The desired value is selected using keys S1 (–) and S2 (+). à After key S1 has been kept pressed for more than … s the control takes over the value indicated. à Input can always be aborted by pressing key S2 for more than … s; the control then changes back to the value menu or the parameter menu. à Service mode is quit by pressing keys S1 and S2 simultaneously for more than … s. Display values service LEDs 96 … ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ … ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● … ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ● … ○ ○ ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ○ … ○ ● ○ ● ○ ● ○ ● ○ ● ○ ● ○ Value … 1 … 3 … 5 … 7 … 9 10 12 14 … ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● … ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ● … ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ● ● ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ● … ○ ○ ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ○ … ○ ● ○ ● ○ ● ○ ● ○ ● ○ ● ○ Value 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 ○ ● ● ○ ● 16 ● ● ● ○ ● 90 ○ ● ● ● ○ 18 ● ● ● ● ○ 95 ○ ● ● ● ● 20 ● ● ● ● ● 100 Powerturn Service menu … DPS service menu and service buttons S1/S2 with LEDs à Changing to the service mode is possible in the NA, LS, AU and DO operating modes. à If no key is pressed in service mode for a period of … minutes, an automatic change to the operating mode takes place. à In service mode, the door remains in operation in the current mode of operation (not when teaching is activated). à Service mode via the DPS is blocked if the service app at the drive is active (display nS). 1st menu DPS Service LEDs … 4 … 2 OT * ○ ○ ○ Parameter Setting values Explanation … ● Opening time 03…04…06…25 * ○ ○ ● ○ Closing time 05…06…25 in s; Opening time*) with automatic opening. Setting pursuant to the table in the Powerturn installation instructions. in s; * ○ ● ○ ● Leaf width 07…11…16 Door weight 01, 02, 03, 06 CT fb T6 pU * ○ ● ○ ○ Push and Go 00 01 sc * ○ ● ● ○ Latching action closing 00…10 12…20 25…50 O® * ○ ● ● ● Hold-open times, 1-leaf (winter) f1 * ● ○ ○ ● SIS function 00…01…10 12…20 25…50 60 01 SIS rev f3 Te * * ● ● ○ ○ ● ● ○ ● SI3 function Testing SI 02 SIS and KI 03 SIS and KA 04 SIS and Stop 05 SIO Stop 06 SIO Stop SF-GF 00 01 02 03 No testing Testing with 24 V Testing with GND Energy-saving mode in mm × 100; Influences the forces at the main closing edge. in kg × 100; Influences the safe speed. 0%: No Push And Go 1–20%: Push And Go Response range referenced to maximum opening range (=100). Sets the speed at which the drive moves to the closing position shortly before closing. This is required e.g. for operation with a motor lock. Latching action also applies for manual passage. in s; With 2-leaf drive for winter operation With activation KI, KA If the safety sensor close triggers, the door reverses. If the safety sensor close triggers, the drive reacts as with activation KI. If the safety sensor close triggers, the drive reacts as with activation KA. If the safety sensor close triggers during a closing movement, the drive stops. If the safety sensor open triggers, only the drive on the detected door leaf stops. If the behaviour should be the same for active leaf and SF, both drives must be set to SIO stop SF GF. If the safety sensor open triggers, both active leaf and passive leaf drive stop. Testing the safety sensor. Depending on the type used, the testing must be set to 24V or GND here. For energy-related reasons, the Powerturn can switch the GC 338 automatically to standby mode as long as it is not required. See chapter … “Pair of safety sensor strips GC 338”, p. 13. *) The values for opening time and closing time refer to an opening angle of 90°. 97 Service menu Powerturn DPS Service LEDs … 4 … 2 TO * ● ● ○ … ○ Parameter Setting values Electric strike type 00 oh – * – ● ● – ● ● – ○ ● – ● ○ Control unit type Type of installation No electric strike 01 Fail-secure 02 Fail-safe 03 Motor lock 06 Working closing pressure Drive has closing force (pressure in the closing position) before opening. Set in connecStatic closing pressure tion with an opening delay. Motor closing pressure 80 DCU8 81 DCU8-F 01 KM HS GLS Transom installation hinge side - guide rail 02 KM BG GLS 03 KM BG GST 04 TM HS GLS Transom installation opposite hinge side guide rail Transom installation opposite hinge side link arm Door leaf installation hinge side - guide rail 05 TM HS GST Door leaf installation hinge side - link arm 06 TM BG GLS Door leaf installation opposite hinge side guide rail Drive type 00 Spring load closes Ts Door closer mode 00 01 Manual Automatic he Manual interference 00 Not active 01 …10 Active Software version e.g. SL, 10, 00 for DCU8 V1.0 aT ep Ne 98 * – – – – – Drive does not have closing force (pressure in the closing position) before opening. 04 05 sT Explanation Only display, no setting option. Manual: The door only closes with the set door closing torque after manual opening, otherwise speed-controlled. Automatic: The door always closes with the set door closing torque regardless of the type of activation. Sets, within the automatic closing, the option to manually intervene in the door movement from the SIO page. When active, the door can then be manually reopened. or SF, 10, 01 for DCU8-F V1. … for special solutions; Scroll forwards using “arrow downwards”, menu has … levels Level …  SL; Level …  10; Level …  00 (00 -> standard / 01 for tailormade solutions …). next level Powerturn Service menu 2. Menu DPS Service LEDs op ho Oh Parameter Setting values Explanation … 4 … 2 … – – – – – Push And Go holdopen times 00 in s; Hold-open time during passage with Push and Go. – – – – Hold-open times, manual 00 in s; Hold-open time for manual opening; Values corresponding to the time. – – – – – – Hold-open time 2-leaf (Summer) 01 … 10 12 … 20 25 … 50 60 01 … 10 12 … 20 25 … 50 60 No 00 01 … 10 12 … 20 24 … 50 60 00 … 90 Dl – – – – – Opening delay Day DN – – – – – Opening delay Night 00 … 90 mode su – – – – – Close delay GF No automatic closing. If manual triggering is set, the value is limited to max. 10s. in s; With 2-leaf drive for summer operation. (AU-So). Setting on GF control. Valid for KI, KA. in s x 0,1; Delayed opening day: Time before the drive opens the door. Only applies in the automatic and exit only operating modes. in s x 0,1; Delayed opening night mode: Time before the drive opens the door. Only applies in the night operating mode. 00 Simultaneous closing of both leaves. 01 …10 … 15s The active leaf closes some time after the passive leaf. 99 fl – – – – – Passive leaf start range 00 … 10 … 95 aD – – – – – Servo duration 00 … 20 aO – – – – – Additional servo torque 00 … 50 fa – – – – – Servo fire alarm 00 … 70 Active leaf does not close until after the passive leaf has closed completely. This value must be set in order to fulfil EN 16005. The value does not correspond to the time. in % Start of the passive leaf at opening range of the active leaf, referenced to its maximum opening range. in s; Adjustable duration of the force support in servo mode. in Nm; Adjustable torque of force support for manual opening (limited in time through “servo duration”). in Nm; Adjustable torque for power-support for fire alarm if 24 V applied to PE1 or PE2. Acts in addition to “additional servo torque”. See servo function with fire alarm, chapter … .1 “Servo function with additional torque servo fire alarm”, p. 74. 99 Service menu Powerturn DPS Service LEDs Parameter Setting values … 4 … 2 … fp – – – – – Trigger/reset manual 00…01…03 Df – – – – – Door closing torque 00, 16 … 40 Explanation 00: Inactive 01: Reset manual 02: Trigger manual 03: Trigger& reset manual in Nm; Door closing torque time after manual opening. … 40: 41 … 70 41 … 70: a6 – – – – – Wall blanking 00 … 01 … 99 le * ● ● ● ● Start teaching ->1 leaf Teach Start teaching ->2 leaf Teach Start/terminate l2 Start/terminate e® – – – – – Current errors ce Oe – – – – – Delete old faults ce cp ** ○ ○ ○ ● Factory setting cP lp ** ○ ○ ● ○ Standard values dP pp ** ○ ○ ● ● Reset DCU8 * ** 100 … flashing pulse + … s pause … flashing pulses + … s pause or sensor strips required. 00: No wall blanking. The range of application for the wall blanking of the safety sensor open is taught during commissioning and can be corrected here. Maximum opening range of the door = 99. Teaching a 1-leaf system. For the procedure, see chapter … “Teaching run”, p. 66. Teaching a 2-leaf system. For the procedure, see chapter … “Teaching run”, p. 66. Display of the current faults in the fault memory. Delete with ce. Display of old faults in the fault memory. Delete with ce. Reset all the values to the factory settings. The state is like after delivery. Values to standard setting, fault memory, position and opening angle are deleted. A teaching run and initialisation run are necessary. All values are set to the standard setting after acknowledgement. Position and opening angle are retained. Fault memory is deleted. A teaching run and initialisation run are not necessary. After acknowledgement the display jumps to 88. Position and opening angle are not deleted. The processor restarts. A teaching run is not necessary, an initialisation run is necessary. Powerturn Service menu 3. Menu DPS Service LEDs Parameter Setting values Explanation 00 … 01 … 10 12 … 20 25 … 50 60 00 no 01 yes in s; Hold-open time after activation with KB. … 4 … 2 … Os – – – – – Hold-open time KB OD – – – – – Dyn extension s6 * ○ ○ ● ● Manual closing time 05 … 06 … 15 … 25 Da – – – – – Back check 10 … 12 … 20 … 25 … 50 … 60 … 80 e0 – – – – – Setting opening width –9 … 00 … 09 cl – – – – – Reversing limit 00 … 30 … 90 o2 – – – – – Door opening 00 01 No Yes Move towards open 00 No 01 Obstruction Motor on Obstruction Motor off 1-leaf drive 2-leaf active 2-leaf passive Not used Normally closed contact Frequency Not used Normally closed contact Frequency ol 02 ef – – – – – Number of leaves s1 ** ○ ● ○ ○ SI1 contact type s3 ** ○ ● ○ ● SI3 Contact type 01 02 03 00 02 04 00 02 04 When actuated, the passage frequency is taken into account in the hold-open time. The door does not close as fast when passage requirements are increased. in s; Closing time after manual opening or after automatic opening with set automatic door closing mode. Setting pursuant to the table in the Powerturn installation instructions. Application of the back check, referenced to maximum opening range (manual opening). in degrees; The value is only for fine adjustment. The value is taught during the teaching run and then corresponds to point 0. This allows it to be adjusted manually and, again, subsequently corresponds to point 0. The opening value can thus be manually adjusted step-by-step. Is not set in the factory setting. In … degrees of the drive axle. Angle on the drive axle to fine-tune the tolerance in the closing position from which the drive attempts to close again. X Set the value so that the door gap is as small as possible before the drive closes again. For doors without external loads such as wind or pressure, the parameter “free swing function” can be activated in order to enable optimum passage of the door. In the event of further opening attempts, the drive stops before the obstacle in the opening range. Drive pushes against the obstacle and turns motor gear unit off. Drive pushes against the obstacle and turns motor gear unit on. Parameter sets which of the door leaves the drive is installed on. Parameter sets the use of the safety sensor close contact type. Parameter sets the use of the safety sensor open contact type. 101 Service menu Powerturn DPS Service LEDs Parameter Setting values Explanation The input KB is active in the operating modes AU, LS and NA. With 2-leaf assemblies the mechanical contact can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. On activation the active leaf opens and, if switched on, the passive leaf. Active in every mode of operation when the door is not closed. The input KI is active in AU and LS mode. With 2-leaf assemblies the contact sensor inside can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. On activation the active leaf opens and, if switched on, the passive leaf. Active in every mode of operation when the door is not closed. in s x 0,1; only active when the door is in a closing position. Can be adjusted in steps of … . The input contact sensor outside is only active in the AU operating mode. With 2-leaf systems, the contact sensor outside can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. On activation, the active leaf opens and, if switched on, the passive leaf. Active in every mode of operation when the door is not closed. in s × … ; only active when the door is in a closing position. Can be adjusted in steps of … . … 4 … 2 … c6 – – – – – KB contact type 00 01 02 Not used Normally open contact normally closed contact c1 – – – – – KI contact type 00 01 02 Not used Normally open contact Normally closed contact 1a – – – – – KI delay 00 … 90 cO – – – – – KA contact type 00 01 02 aa – – – – – KA delay 00 … 90 e1 – – – – – PE1 function 00 Not used 03 Selector switch Summer NO For connection of a push button for the summer function. Selector switch Winter NO For connection of a push button for the winter function. Only for switching from 1-leaf to 2-leaf opening, not for actually opening the door. Sabotage NC Permanently switched. If the contact is interrupted KB is not evaluated in the night mode of operation. All other functions remain the same. Closing position GF NO Closing position contact of the door leaf à for 1-leaf door à for 1-leaf door drive with manual passive leaf (door closer): Closing position contact of the active leaf à for 2-leaf door: Active leaf contact to GF control, passive leaf contact to SF control P-KI activation NO Additional contact sensor (P-KI, P-KA). P-KA activation NO For connection of additional closing contacts. 04 05 06 08 09 102 Not used Normally open contact Normally closed contact Powerturn Service menu DPS Service LEDs … 4 … 2 Parameter Setting values Explanation … 10 e2 – – – – – NO On activation, the output of the push button is closed. With 2-leaf assemblies the push button can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. If the push button is connected to the passive leaf control, both door leaves open and close on activation of the switch function, even if the passive leaf control is switched off (bed opening). When the push button is pressed once, the drive opens the door. When the push button is pressed again, the drive closes the door. 11 Switch function OHZ NO On activation, the output of the push button is closed. With 2-leaf assemblies the push button can be connected to the active leaf control or to the passive leaf control. If the push button is connected to the passive leaf control, both door leaves open and close on activation of the switch function, even if the type of opening 1-leaf opening is active (bed opening). When the push button is pressed once, the drive opens the door and closes after the hold-open time has expired. When the push button is pressed again (within the hold-open time) the drive closes the door without waiting for the hold-open time to expire. If the push button is connected to the active leaf, the 1-leaf hold-open time is used with 1-leaf use, and the 2-leaf hold-open time with 2-leaf use. 13 Reset push button NO For restarting the drive. For the function, see chapter … .9 “Reset DCU8”, p. 93. 14 Double push button NO 1× press = 1-leaf opening 2× press = 2-leaf opening 15 Stop normally open For connection of a stop push button. contact NO 16 Stop normally closed contact NC 19 Closing position SF Closing position contact of the passive leaf with 1-leaf door with manual passive leaf (door closer). 21 WC control Connection of the internal button for the WC function. 22 Fire alarm servo NO If active, the additional servo torque function is set with the servo fire alarm torque is set for the duration. 23 1-leaf opening In 2-leaf systems, when the signal is active on the active leaf only … leaf is opened. Configurable input … 00 Not used e3 – – – – – Configurable input … 01 03 04 Switch function MPS For connection of a mechanical programme switch Selector switch Summer NO For connection of a push button for the summer function. Selector switch Winter NO For connection of a push button for the winter function. Only for switching from 1-leaf to 2-leaf opening, not for actually opening the door. 103 Service menu Powerturn DPS Service LEDs … 4 … 2 Parameter Setting values Explanation … 05 Sabotage 08 P-KI activation 09 P-KA activation 10 Switch function NC Permanently switched. If the contact is interrupted KB is not evaluated in the night mode of operation. All other functions remain the same. NO Closing position contact of the door leaf à for 1-leaf door à for 1-leaf door drive with manual passive leaf (door closer): Closing position contact of the active leaf à for 2-leaf door: Active leaf contact to GF control, passive leaf contact to SF control The input can be used to connect an NO emergency lock switch. When the emergency lock switch is activated, the contact is closed and … V is applied to the input. The door closes and locks. The contact sensors KA, KI and KB, safety sensors SIS and SIO as well as obstacle detection are hidden. The door remains closed as long as the emergency lock signal is applied to the input. NO Additional contact sensor (P-KI, P-KA). NO For connection of additional closing contacts. NO see PE1 06 Closing position GF 11 Switch function OHZ NO see PE1 12 Stop 12 kOhm 13 Reset push button NO For the connection of a stop push button with 12 kOhm terminating resistor. NO For restarting the drive. Function as reset. 14 Double push button 07 Emergency lock. 20 KOhm NO 1× press = 1-leaf opening 2× press = 2-leaf opening For connection of a stop push button. NO 15 Stop normally open contact 16 Stop normally closed contact NC 19 Closing position SF Closing position contact of the passive leaf with 2-leaf door with manual passive leaf (door closer). 20 Stop 20 kOhm NC For the connection of a stop push button with 20 kOhm terminating resistor. 21 WC control Connection of the internal button for the WC function. 22 Fire alarm servo See PE1. a1 – – – – – a2 – – – – – Configurable output … Configurable output … 23 1-leaf opening 29 Fire alarm without SI 00 Not used 01 Gong 02 Fault normally open contact 03 Fault normally closed contact 104 In 2-leaf systems, when the signal is active on the active leaf only … leaf is opened. If active, the door opens and closes at safe speed, safety sensors are hidden. If KA is triggered. The function is used for fault messages, e.g. to an on-site building control centre. The contact closes or opens respectively if the control determines a fault. Powerturn Service menu DPS Service LEDs … 4 … 2 Parameter Setting values Explanation 04 Fault MPS 05 Warning signal 06 Electric strike The function is used to switch the fault LED at the MPS. The contact closes if the control determines a fault. When maintenance is due, the output is switched cyclically, the fault LED on the MPS flashes. The function is used to cyclically switch an activator on/off while the door is opening or closing. For connection of an additional electric strike. Function in accordance with parameters “Electric strike type”. The function is used to signal the door status, e.g. to a building control centre. … 08 Closed locked 09 Closed 10 Not closed 11 Open 12 Off 13 Night mode 14 Exit only 15 Automatic 16 Hold open 17 Light control 20 Maintenance due 21 Holding magnet GF The function is used to signal the door status, e.g. to a building control centre. To set the active leaf holding magnet. 22 Holding magnet SF To set the passive leaf holding magnet. 24 WC timeout 25 Electric strike NO 26 Electric strike NC For connection of a lamp or a signal to indicate when the 30-minute timer has expired for the WC function. For connection of a fail-secure electric strike. For connection of a fail-safe electric strike. The function is used to activate a light controlling device which, for example, switches on the entry illumination as soon as a contact sensor (KI, KA, KB, SIS+KI, SIS+KA) is activated or the door is opened manually. 18 Day/night mode changeo- The function is used to signal the day mode ver of operation to a customer building control centre. The output switches to GND if the mode of operation LS, AU 1-leaf, DO, or AU 2-leaf is set. 19 Not used f0 – – – – – Opening force 01 … 15 … 25 fc – – – – – Closing force 01 … 15 … 25 Bh – – – – – Obstacle 01 … 06 … 20 of – – – – – Opening retention force 00 … 01 … 07 ×10 N; Static force at the main closing edge opening. ×10 N; Static force at the main closing edge closing. × … s; Time for which the drive pushes against an obstacle with the set static force. ×10 N; Constant force at the main closing edge in open position. 105 Service menu Powerturn DPS Service LEDs Parameter Setting values Explanation – Closing retention force 00 … 01 … 07 – – Closing position force 00 … 05 … 15 – – – Basic function 01 Yes ×10 N; Constant force at the main closing edge in closed position. x10 N, force acts after the end of the latching action in the closed position. Manual opening is more difficult during the set time. The greater the force set, the longer the duration. Examples: for 10 N= … s, for 150 N = … s The drive is in automatic mode. – – – Bolt contact type 01 Feedback e.g. of a motor lock. – – – – SIO manual 00 Normally open contact Normally closed contact Not active 01 Active SIO active during manual opening. – – – – 00 Not active 01 Active 00 Not active 01 Active 00 Not active SIS not active during closing after manual opening. SIS active during closing after manual opening. Reversing in the event of an obstacle within closing following manual opening: not active. Reversing in the event of an obstruction within closing following manual opening: active. Reversing in the event of an obstruction within closing following automatic opening: not active. 01 Active 00 Not active 01 Active … 4 … 2 … cf – – – – fs – – – 6a – – – – – – ®® sh ss ph pa s8 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 02 SIS manual Manual rev. closing Auto rev. closing ECO mode 82 – – – – – Braking force 01 … 13 … 14 sp – – – – – Language 00 german english cs – – – – – 01 02 03 Delete maintenance cS 86 – – – – – Operating Duration Co CH Ho So Ns 106 – – – – – * ** … flashing pulse + … s pause … flashing pulses + … s pause no Service SIO not active during manual opening. Reversing in the event of an obstruction within closing following automatic opening: active. The 24V supply voltage (24SENS) at terminal … is switched off after switchover to the modes of operation DO and OFF (after <10s) and NA (after 10 min). Note: Activation via access control of KB in the event of NA, as well as closing the door when switching from DO to AU, requires a few seconds, as the system first has to boot up. Braking force in de-energised operation; e.g. to stop the door from slamming shut. Set it so that the door closes in … s, see chapter 23 “De-energised operation”, p. 71. Language of the drive. french swedish Total no. of cycles/100 No. of manual cycles/100 Operating hours/4 Reset maintenance counter, switch off service LED. After acknowledgement the display switches between CS  cS Display 6-digits each. Scroll forwards with “downward arrow”. Operating hours/4 to next service If the service app is active, the service mode is blocked via DPS. Powerturn 30 Fault messages Fault messages … Fault messages ST220 and DPS … .1 Fault display On the DPS à Currently queued fault messages are displayed on the display programme switch in cycles. In addition, they are also entered in the e® and O e fault memories. à The mode of operation is displayed for … s, the fault message for … s. à Individual faults are indicated by the fault ID. à If the faults are group faults, only the main fault number is indicated e.g. 22. On the control unit ST220 à Faults are shown using the text form of the fault names. Fault example: SIS SF On the operating modes push button à If the control has not been taught at this point, the operating modes display LED lights up yellow (continuous light). à If the control has not been initialised yet, the operating modes display LED lights up in the colour of the current mode of operation, periodically interrupted by two short flashing impulses (1 Hz.). à If one or more faults are queued, the operating modes display LED flashes quickly (10 Hz.) in the colour of the current mode of operation. à In the OFF mode of operation, there is no fault display on the operating modes display LED. … .2 Fault messages Fault no. Message Message on the ST220 on the DPS Fault description 01 01 24 V missing Control faulty, short circuit at 24 V. 03 03 230 V fault Power failure, 230 V group fault. 230 V low voltage 230 V low voltage. 230 V high voltage 230 V high voltage. Fire alarm Group fault fire alarm. Fire alarm F-board Smoke detector or manual trigger switch has triggered. Fire alarm man GF Manual triggering door leaf GF. Fire alarm man SF Manual triggering door leaf SF. Fire alarm PE Group fault fire alarm at configurable input. Fire alarm without SI Fire alarm without suppression of the safety sensors active. Fire alarm servo Fire alarm with increased servo torque active. Line fault PE Fault in the line monitoring for fire alarm with suppression of the safety sensors. Rotary encoder GF Group fault rotary encoder. Rotary encoder model Rotary encoder displays fault. Edge counter Error in identifying the rotary encoder edges. Position check Rotary encoder position error. Fault direction Direction of rotation of motor gear unit or rotary encoder is incorrect. 07 09 10 07 09 10 11 11 Motor gear unit … short Motor current too large. 12 12 Motor gear unit … Motor gear unit defective. 13 13 SIS1 defective Safety sensor close active leaf, group fault. Permanent activation Safety sensor close GF” activated for more than … min. Testing Error in testing safety sensor close GF. 107 Fault messages Powerturn Fault no. Message Message on the ST220 on the DPS Fault description 14 14 MPS Inconsistent state at the PS inputs or line break MPS. 15 15 Comm. DPS No communication between control - display programme switch. 16 16 Locking mechanism Electric strike does not block. 17 17 Unlocking Electric strike does not trigger. TOE short-circuit Faulty electric strike. TOE relay Faulty electric strike relay at DCU800. SIS SF fault Safety sensor close passive leaf, group fault. Permanent activation Safety sensor close SF” activated for more than … min. Testing Error in testing safety sensor close SF. Mech. fault GF A mechanical fault has occurred at the active leaf; group fault. Rotate angle A cam skip has been detected. Fault solenoid valve The solenoid valve of the energy storage device is defective. Mech. fault SF A mechanical fault has occurred at the passive leaf; group fault. Rotate angle A cam skip has been detected. Fault solenoid valve The solenoid valve of the energy storage device is defective. Teaching run fault GF Teaching run group fault, teaching run invalid. Latching action switch Teaching run invalid, e.g. incorrectly set latching action switch. Teach obstacle Obstacle of the door leaf during the teaching procedure. Teaching time- out Time-out expired within 60 s of teaching. Teaching run fault SF Passive leaf teaching run group fault, teaching run invalid. Latching action switch Teaching run invalid, e.g. incorrectly set latching action switch. Teach obstacle Obstacle of the door leaf during the teaching procedure. Teaching time- out Time-out expired within 60 s of teaching. 19 22 23 25 26 19 22 23 25 26 28 28 Relay DCU800 Motor relay defective. 29 29 SIO SF fault Safety sensor open passive leaf, group fault. Permanent activation Safety sensor open SF activated for more than … min. Testing Error in testing safety sensor open SF. 32 32 Sabotage Sabotage active. 35 35 Permanent activation PE1 Expected configuration as MPS, sabotage, stop, emergency lock. 36 36 Permanent activation PE2 Expected configuration as MPS, sabotage, stop, emergency lock. 37 37 Permanent activation KI Movement detector defective or activation > … min. 38 38 Permanent activation PE3 Expected configuration as MPS, sabotage, stop, emergency lock. 39 39 Permanent activation KA Activation longer than … min. 40 40 Permanent activation KB Activation longer than … min. 41 41 SIO … Safety sensor open active leaf, group fault. Permanent activation Safety sensor open GF activated for more than … min. Testing Error in testing safety sensor open GF. Emergency lock Group fault emergency lock. Activation active If the function is active via PE. Push button defective If the push button for the function is detected as defective. 42 108 42 Powerturn Fault messages Fault no. Message Message on the ST220 on the DPS Fault description 44 44 Input stop Stop is active. 45 45 Motor gear unit hot Motor gear unit or control temperature higher than 95 °C. 46 46 T-sensor motor gear unit Motor temperature sensor defective. 47 47 T-sensor ctrl. Control temperature sensor is defective. 48 48 Overtemp Motor gear unit or control temperature higher than 105 °C. 51 51 24 V missing SF Control defective passive leaf. 53 53 230 V error SF 230 V passive leaf group fault. 54 54 Comm. DPS NT Communication error DPS NT. 57 57 Fire alarm SF Smoke detector active passive leaf. 60 60 Ctrl. DCU800 Internal control fault, group fault for active leaf. EEPROM value – EEPROM comparison – Fault current measurement Error in motor current measurement. EEPROM time-out – Quartz tolerance – RAM test – ROM CRC test – VCC test – Quartz failure – Motor gear unit resistance – Comm. M1-M2 – Wrong HW/SW combination – 63 63 SW version Active leaf and passive leaf have different software versions. 65 65 Comm. SF-GF No communication active leaf/passive leaf control. 66 66 Locking mechanism SF Electric strike not blocking (passive leaf). 67 67 Unlocking SF Electric strike not triggering (passive leaf). 70 70 Ctrl. DCU800 SF Internal control fault, group fault such as fault 60. For detail, log into SF. 71 71 Motor gear unit SF short Motor current too large. 72 72 Motor gear unit SF Motor gear unit defective. 74 74 Rotary encoder SF Rotary encoder signals faulty. 75 75 DCU800 hot Passive leaf drive, motor gear unit or control temperature higher than 95 °C. 76 76 Sensor motor gear unit SF Motor temperature sensor defective. 77 77 T-sensor SF Control temperature sensor is defective. 78 78 Overtemp SF Motor gear unit or control temperature higher than 105 °C. 79 79 Relay SF Motor relay defective, passive leaf. x .x Position Leaf position unknown (dot on left display). x x. Maintenance Maintenance requirement (number of cycles, operating hours, dot on right display). … .8 . DPS No communication with control - display programme switch. -- DPS Operation at programme switch. 109 Fault messages Powerturn Fault no. Message Message on the ST220 on the DPS 110 OO DPS 00 DPS ®s Reset Ns DPS Fault description Release operation at programme switch. Change in mode of operation: not possible using programme switch (internal PS not set to 0, or MPS is parameterised). On starting the teaching procedure: Reset switch not pressed or 24 V RSZ missing. No service possible if another service tool is active. Powerturn Fault messages … Fault messages on the service button LEDs  Display service button LEDs ○ ● *   Service key S1 Service LEDs Service key S2  … 2 …     à Fault messages of fault groups are displayed on the service button LEDs. The exact fault can be determined using the fault number in chapter … .2 “Fault messages”, p. 107. à For the service button LEDs, LED … flashes at 10 Hz.   Designation of the fault group Fault no. in chapter … .2 “Fault messages”, p. 107. … 4 … 2 … * ○ ○ ○ ● Alarm 07, 57 * ○ ○ ● ○ Power failure 03, 53 * ○ ○ ● ● Drive too hot 45, 46, 48, 75, 76, 78 * ○ ● ○ ○ SIO 29, 41 * ○ ● ○ ● Mechanical faults 22, 23 * ○ ● ● ○ SIS 13, 19 * ○ ● ● ● Locking mechanism 16, 17, 66, 67 * ● ○ ○ ○ Motor gear unit 10, 11, 12, 71, 72, 74 * ● ○ ○ ● Control unit 01, 28, 47, 51, 60, 63, 70, 77, 79 * ● ○ ● ○ Communication 15, 54 * ● ○ ● ● Activation 14, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 44, 73 – – – – – No operating voltage – LED off LED on LED flashes at 10 Hz 111 Disposal and accessories 31 Disposal and accessories … Disposal of the door system Powerturn à The door system is made up of materials that should be sent for recycling. For this purpose, the individual components should be sorted corresponding to material type: à Aluminium (profiles, cover, deflection pulleys, slide nuts, …) à Iron (drivers, screws, …) à Plastic à Electronic components (bolt, motor gear unit, control unit, transformer, sensors, …) à Cables The parts can be disposed of at the local recycling depot or by a scrap recycling company. à Rechargeable batteries contain pollutants and heavy metals. Do not dispose of these with household waste. Hand in rechargeable batteries to your local recycler, too. … Accessories 112 Mat. no. Designation relevant chapter 024467 Additional contact … “Programme switch”, p. 47. 024740 Retention magnet MA 500 with counterplate 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. 081476 Safety sticker … “Safety precautions”, p. 6. 087261 Service terminal ST220 … “Service terminal ST220”, p. 76. 092777 Reed switch … “Powerturn IS/TS: Active leaf automated, passive leaf with door closer”, p. 52. 099575 Remote control … “Radar movement detector GC 302 R”, p. 22. 100061 Remote control … “Sensor GC 334/GC 335”, p. 16. … “Non-contact activation sensor GC 307+”, p. 23. 103352 24 V relay … .1 “Gong”, p. 38. … .2 “Fault”, p. 38. … .7 “Day/night mode changeover”, p. 39. … .8 “Maintenance due”, p. 40. 103601 IQ Lock EL 9235 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. 103699 IQ Lock EL 9245 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. 103700 IQ Lock EL 7255 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. 103701 IQ Lock EL 7265 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. 106571 IQ Lock EL 7280 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. 106572 IQ Lock EL 7210 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. 112321 Spot finder … “Pair of safety sensor strips GC 338”, p. 13. 113226 MPS, AS500 … “Programme switch”, p. 47. 113227 MPS-ST, with key, AS500 … “Programme switch”, p. 47. 114077 Plastic elbow switch, stainless steel 15 “WC control”, p. 45. 114078 Plastic elbow switch, white 15 “WC control”, p. 45. 115013 IQ Lock EL 9240 13 “Electric strike/motor lock”, p. 41. 115293 Free-wheeling diode 1N4007 … .5 “Electric strike”, p. 35. … .5 “Electric strike”, p. 39. … “24 V DC electric strike supplied on drive side”, p. 42. 115339 Rain cover … “Radar movement detector GC 302 R”, p. 22. 115384 Ceiling installation kit … “Radar movement detector GC 302 R”, p. 22. 115934 SLE220 indicator lamp, flush-mounted, AS500, AW 15 “WC control”, p. 45. 115939 SLH220, signal horn, ASW500, AW, complete 15 “WC control”, p. 45. 116266 Manual trigger switch “18 Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors” on page 55. Powerturn Disposal and accessories Mat. no. Designation relevant chapter 117996 SCT key switch, single-pole, flushmounted, AS500 without Euro profile half cylinder … “Programme switch”, p. 47. 118417 MPS-D, AS500 … “Programme switch”, p. 47. 118418 MPS-D-ST, with key, AS500 … “Programme switch”, p. 47. 119898 Stainless steel elbow switch 15 “WC control”, p. 45. 119952 CAN interface DCU103 … “Supply terminals”, p. 10. 120048 System cable … “Two automated door leaves”, p. 52. 120061 System cable … “Two automated door leaves”, p. 52. 120503 Surface-mounting cap, single, AS500 … “Programme switch”, p. 47. 120880 Manual trigger switch “18 Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors” on page 55. 124087 GC 302 R black … “Radar movement detector GC 302 R”, p. 22. 124088 GC 302 R according to RAL … “Radar movement detector GC 302 R”, p. 22. 128582 Stainless steel elbow switch LS 990, surface-mounted 15 “WC control”, p. 45. 128583 Stainless steel elbow switch LS 990, flush-mounted 15 “WC control”, p. 45. 128609 Surface-mounting cap, double, AS500 … “Programme switch”, p. 47. 131209 1-channel remote control WTH-1 … “Radio control”, p. 26. 131210 2-channel remote control WTH-2 … “Radio control”, p. 26. 131211 4-channel remote control WTH-4 … “Radio control”, p. 26. 131212 Transmitting module WTM … “Radio control”, p. 26. 135170 Radio reception board WRB-5 … “Radio control”, p. 26. 144631 IQ eStrike A5300--B … “24 V DC electric strike supplied on drive side”, p. 42. 145182 IQ eStrike A5000--E … “24 V DC electric strike supplied on drive side”, p. 42. 151524 DPS with OFF, flush-mounted AS500, alpine white … “Programme switch”, p. 47. 155810 DPS with OFF and SCT, without Euro profile half cylinder, flush-mounted, AS500, alpine white … “Programme switch”, p. 47. 157266 Adapter cable … “Service terminal ST220”, p. 76. 166272 230 V T-distributor 19 “Mains connection”, p. 61. 180408 Reset switch “18 Powerturn F and Powerturn F/R on fire protection doors” on page 55. 193226 GC 307+ standard flush-mounted … “Non-contact activation sensor GC 307+”, p. 23. … “Non-contact activation sensor GC 307+”, p. 25. … “Non-contact sensor GC 307+ WC”, p. 46. 195727 GC 307+ standard surface-mounted … “Non-contact activation sensor GC 307+”, p. 23. … “Non-contact activation sensor GC 307+”, p. 25. … “Non-contact sensor GC 307+ WC”, p. 46. 203603 GC 308 R, black … “Radar movement detector GC 308 R”, p. 23. … “Radar movement detector GC 308 R”, p. 25. 203604 GC 308 R, white … “Radar movement detector GC 308 R”, p. 23. … “Radar movement detector GC 308 R”, p. 25. 203605 GC 308 R, stainless steel … “Radar movement detector GC 308 R”, p. 23. … “Radar movement detector GC 308 R”, p. 25. 203606 GC 308 R, according to RAL … “Radar movement detector GC 308 R”, p. 23. … “Radar movement detector GC 308 R”, p. 25. 113 Disposal and accessories 114 Powerturn Powerturn  115 Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l. Unipersonale E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru Türkiye GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Scandinavia – Estonia GEZE Scandinavia AB eesti filial E-Mail: estonia@geze.com www.geze.ee Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua Scandinavia – Finland GEZE Scandinavia AB Filial Finland E-Mail: finland@geze.com www.geze.fi United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae Scandinavia – Latvia GEZE Scandinavia AB Latvijas filiāle E-Mail: latvia@geze.com www.geze.lv United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax.: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com Scandinavia – Lithuania GEZE Scandinavia AB Filial Lietu. E-Mail: lithuania@geze.com www.geze.lt

Powerturn user manual valid for variants: Powerturn (1-leaf/2-leaf), Powerturn F (1-leaf), Powerturn F-IS (2-leaf), Powerturn F/R (1-leaf), Powerturn F/R-IS (2-leaf), Powerturn F/R-IS/TS

Powerturn Valid for variants: Powerturn (1-leaf/2-leaf ) Powerturn F (1-leaf ) Powerturn F-IS (2-leaf ) Powerturn F/R (1-leaf/2-leaf) Powerturn IS/TS (2-leaf ) Powerturn F-IS/TS (2-leaf ) Powerturn F/R-IS/TS (2-leaf) 156539-04 Translation of the original operating instructions EN User manual  Powerturn Contents Symbols and illustrations … Product liability … Special cases … 2 … Notes … Intended use … Reasonably foreseeable misuse … Safety notes … Reference documents … 2 Description … … .1 … .2 … .3 … Possible types of installation and versions … Structure … Overview of the modes of operation … Operating elements … Operating modes push button with operating modes display … Mechanical programme switch MPS (optional) … Display programme switch (optional) … Door in normal operation … 3 Operation … 11 … Selecting the mode of operation using the operating modes push button … 11 Selecting the mode of operation at the mechanical programme switch MPS … 12 Selecting the mode of operation using the display programme switch … 12 … Troubleshooting … 13 … Cleaning and maintenance … 15 … Cleaning … 15 Maintenance … 15 Inspection by an expert … 15 … Technical data … 16 … Glossary … 17 Powerturn  Symbols and illustrations Warning notices Warning notices are used in these instructions to warn you of personal injury and property damage. X Always read and observe these warning notices. X Observe all measures marked with the warning symbol and warning word. Warning symbol Warning word Meaning CAUTION Danger to persons. Non-compliance can result in minor to medium injuries. Further symbols and illustrations Important information and technical notes are highlighted to explain correct operation. Symbol Meaning means “important note”; information about avoiding property damage means “additional Information” The user's attention should be drawn to important addition information. There is no danger to persons or property, but it is particularly useful to read the additional information carefully. X Symbol for an action: This means you have to do something. X If there are several actions to be taken, keep to the given order. Product liability In compliance with the liability of the manufacturer for his products as defined in the German “Product Liability Act”, compliance with the information contained in this brochure (product information and intended use, misuse, product performance, product maintenance, obligations to provide information and instructions) must be ensured. Failure to comply releases the manufacturer from his statutory liability. Special cases In certain cases, deviations from the information given in this user manual may occur. Examples: à special wiring à special function settings (parameters) à special software X Ask the service technician responsible for further information. … Notes … Powerturn Notes The automatic swing door drive is partly completed machinery. It complies with all the relevant regulations of the guidelines 2014/35/EU and 2014/30/EU and may be installed and operated in automatic door systems in accordance with the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer of this machine must ensure that all requirements resulting from the Machinery Directive are observed. A risk assessment must be carried out and documented. Before initial commissioning, the manufacturer of the machine must issue an EC Declaration of Conformity in accordance with Annex II of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and attach the CE marking visibly and permanently to the door system. … Intended use The Powerturn/Powerturn F door drive is designed for the automatic opening and closing of side-hung leaf single-action doors. The Powerturn is designed solely for use à in dry rooms, à in entrances and interior areas of pedestrian traffic in commercial plants and public areas, à in private areas. The Powerturn à may be used on escape and rescue routes, à must not be used on fire and smoke protection doors, à must not be used for potentially explosive areas. The Powerturn F à is designed for use on fire or smoke protection doors, à may be used on escape and rescue route doors, à must not be used for potentially explosive areas. Any other use than the intended use, such as permanent manual operation, as well as any modification to the product, are not permitted. … Reasonably foreseeable misuse à à à à à à à à à à à à à à à à … Operation without safety device. Permanent manual operation. Operation without door stopper. Changes to the drive, as non-instructed person. Use of a wedge. Blocking the travel path. Removal of the hood during operation. Changing the wiring. Aggressive passage through the door (e.g. by kicking). Missing maintenance. Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner. Cleaning with corrosive, non-compatible cleaning agents. Locking the door in the open position. Operation in rooms that are not dry. Operation in a potentially explosive area. Children playing (in and at the door). Powerturn … Notes Safety notes For the user Note the user information before commissioning the door. Observe the following safety notes: à Operating, maintenance and repair conditions specified by GEZE must be observed. à The commissioning, mandatory installation, maintenance and repair work must be performed by experts authorised by GEZE. à The connection to the mains voltage must be made by a professional electrician. à No changes may be made to the system without prior agreement from GEZE. à GEZE shall assume no liability for damage caused by unauthorised changes to the system. à The building operator is responsible for safe operation of the system. à Have a service technician check the safe operation of the system at regular intervals. à Should safety devices be misaligned, thus preventing them from fulfilling their intended purpose, further operation is not permissible. The service technician must be informed without delay. à Make sure that the safety stickers are attached visibly to any glass leaves and are in a legible state. à Protect the programme switch against unauthorised access. à Danger of injury by sharp edges on the drive when removing the cover à Danger of injury by parts hanging down à This appliance can be used by children aged from … years and above and persons with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities or lack of experience and knowledge if they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the appliance in a safe way and understand the hazards involved. à Children shall not play with the appliance. à Cleaning and user maintenance shall not be made by children without supervision. For the service technician à GEZE does not accept any warranty for combinations with third-party products. à Only combine third-party products with original parts following agreement by GEZE. Furthermore, only original GEZE parts may be used for repair and maintenance work. à The mains connection and protective earth connection test must be performed according to DIN VDE 100-600. à Use an on-site automatic circuit-breaker as the line-side disconnecting device. Its dimensioning is matched to the type, cross-section, type of laying and ambient conditions of the on-site power supply circuit. The automatic cut-out must have at least … A and may have max. 16 A. … Reference documents Material no. 154917 154919 079141 Document Installation and service instructions Wiring diagram Inspection book Product Powerturn Powerturn Hold-open systems FA GC 150/160 The diagrams are subject to change without notice. Use only the most recent version. … Description Powerturn … Description … Possible types of installation and versions à The door drive can be mounted in transom installation at the lintel or in door leaf installation on the door leaf. à The door drive is available as 1-leaf or 2-leaf version. à The Powerturn F-IS and Powerturn F-IS/TS systems can only be mounted in transom installation. … Structure The door system shown is only a schematic diagram. For technical reasons, we cannot show all of the possibilities here. The operating elements can be arranged individually. Example: Door drive Powerturn, 1-leaf, transom installation … 2 … 4 … 6 … 8 … 10 … 6 Door drive Link arm or roller guide rail Smoke switch control unit 2) Activation device outside (KA) (optional) Activation device authorised (KB) (optional) Smoke switch 2) Activation device inside (KI) (optional) Programme switch (optional) Key switch for enabling the programme switch (optional) Emergency stop switch (optional) 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 “CLOSE DOOR” manual trigger switch … Electric strike (optional) Door handle with door lock (on site) Inside building Outside building Closing safety sensor (SIS) (optional) Door transmission cable (optional) Opening safety sensor (SIO) (optional) Socket for service adapter ST 220 and Bluetooth adapter Operating modes push button with operating modes display optional, in connection with Powerturn F. If the function “manual trigger/reset” activates, there is no need for the manual trigger switch and reset switch. Powerturn … Description Overview of the modes of operation The following modes of operation can be set on the Powerturn: à Automatic mode à Exit only à Hold open Mode of operation à Night mode à OFF MPS/MPS-ST* DPS** Key Automatic Explanatory notes Display aU à Opening of … leaves à Opening of … leaf Door opens and closes again. The inside and outside activation devices are active. Refer also to chapter “ … on page 8”. When the keys are pressed simultaneously, the mode of operation changes between 1-leaf opening and 2-leaf opening. On the DPS the LED is lit in 1-leaf operation. Exit only ls Door only opens and closes if someone exits. Only the inside activation devices are active. Hold open DO Door remains open. Night mode Na Door opens and closes only when activated using the key switch. The inside and outside activation devices are inactive. Of OFF Powerturn: Door is enabled and can be moved by hand. OFF OFF Powerturn F: Door closes by spring, so behaves like a door closer The inside and outside activation devices are inactive. * mechanical programme switch (MPS)/mechanical programme switch with integrated key switch (MPS-ST) ** display programme switch … Operating elements The modes of operation can be set using the following operating elements: à Operating modes push button (21) on the door drive (chapter “ … .1 on page 7”.) à Mechanical programme switch MPS with/without integrated key switch (option) (“ … .2 on page 8”.) à Display programme switch (option) (chapter “ … .3 on page 8”.) … .1 Operating modes push button with operating modes display The operating mode on the door drive can be selected using the operating modes push button (21). The operating modes display (21) lights up in the colour of the current mode of operation: Operating modes displays Mode of operation OFF Night mode Exit only Automatic Hold open Colour of the operating modes display (21) – red white green blue Information and fault displays Colour of the operating modes display (21) yellow (continuous light) lights up in the colour of the current mode of operation periodically interrupted by two brief flashing impulses (1 Hz) One or more faults are queued flashes quickly (10 Hz) in the colour of the current mode of operation The operating modes push button is deac- operating modes display is switched off tivated Status The control has not been taught The control has not been initialised yet In the OFF mode of operation, there is no fault display on the operating modes display (21). … Description … .2 Powerturn Mechanical programme switch MPS (optional) à Can be connected in addition to the operating modes push button (21). At the mechanical programme switch MPS, the mode of operation for the system is selected and the corresponding programme is displayed. The mechanical programme switch is accessible for everyone without a key operated button. Mechanical programme switch MPS With the mechanical programme switch MPS-ST, selection of the modes of operation is disabled if the key provided has been removed. Mechanical programme switch MPS-ST with integrated key switch … .3 Display programme switch (optional) à Additionally, it can be connected to the internal operating modes push button. If a dot appears in the bottom right-hand part of the display, maintenance is due. If a dot appears in the middle of the display, the door has not yet been fully initialised after the mains voltage has been switched on. Initialisation is carried out automatically when the drive opens and closes the door. OFF Display programme switch … Door in normal operation In normal operation, the door is automatically opened and closed. When Powerturn IS/TS is used, only the active leaf opens automatically. The passive leaf has to be opened manually. … Powerturn What happens? An activation device (push button, switch or movement detector) is triggered. Closing safety sensor (SIS) is triggered when the door is open (e.g. light switch). Closing safety indicator (SIS) is triggered while the door is closing. Opening safety sensor (SIO) is triggered while door is opening. Description What does the door do? Door opens, waits the hold-open time and then closes. Door remains open. The door immediately opens again or stops depending on the parameter setting. The door stops and remains in position until the end of activation (door opens) or until the end of the hold-open time (door closes). Door remains closed. Opening safety sensor (SIO) is triggered when the door is closed. A person moves toward the opened door and a movement Door remains open. detector is activated. A person moves toward the closing door and a movement Door reopens immediately. detector is activated. Door contacts an obstruction when opening. The opening Door stops, waits and attempts again to move to the open safety sensor has not been activated. position at a reduced speed. Then the door closes again. Door contacts an obstruction when closing. The closing Door reopens immediately, waits the hold-open time and safety sensor has not been activated. then closes at a reduced speed. When door closer mode is used with the closing safety sensor deactivated, the drive presses against the obstacle with the force set. Additional door functions Which switch/push button? Emergency-stop switch What does the switch/push button do? The door stops immediately (in every mode of operation) and holds the position until the emergency stop switch is unlocked. Key switch of the display programme switch If a key switch is connected to the display programme switch, the operation of the display programme switch can be locked or released with it. Activation device authorised (KB) (e.g. outside key switch) Door opens once and closes after the hold-open time. The set mode of operation is retained. Activation device with radio board Door opens once and closes after the hold-open time. The set mode of operation is retained. If the key in radio channel … is pressed for longer than … s, the controller changes to the DO mode of operation. After the key has been pressed again for at least … s, the control changes back to the AU mode of operation. Switch function The automated door can be activated using the switch function. Normal switch function: à Switch contact opens the door and the door remains in the open position. à Switch contact closes the door. Switch function with hold-open time: à Switch contact opens the door. à Switch contact closes the door or the door starts to close after the hold-open time. Double push button In the case of 2-leaf drives, a button with a double function can be connected via a configurable push button. This means that 1-leaf or 2-leaf opening is possible by pressing the push button. If the push button is pressed once, only the active leaf opens and closes after the hold-open time has expired. If the button is pressed twice within … s, both leaves open and close after the double leaf hold-open time has expired. … Description Which switch/push button? Emergency lock WC control Manual trigger switch or manual triggering (Powerturn F and fire protection doors) 10 Powerturn What does the switch/push button do? When the emergency lock is used, a switch can close the 1- or 2-leaf system immediately. The doors close with the set force and without sensor strips and obstacle detection. There is an increased risk of injury. The door opens after the elbow switch on the outside of the toilet has been pressed, and closes automatically after the set hold-open time has passed. When the push button is activated inside the toilet cabin, the system is switched to the exit only mode of operation, which means the outer push button no longer opens the door. At the same time, the lights indicate that the toilet is occupied. The electric strike is supplied with current, preventing manual opening of the door from the outside. Activating the “inner” push button again or through manual opening from inside, the WC function (exit only mode of operation) is cancelled and the drive switched back to the automatic mode of operation. The occupied displays and lights go out. Pressing the manual trigger switch or pulling the door closed manually triggers the hold-open system and the fire protection drive goes into safe operation. The drive closes the door via the spring. The same thing happens if a fire alarm is detected at the drive or in the event of a power failure. To leave this state again and reactivate the drive, the alarm has to be acknowledged (carry out a reset). For this purpose, depending on the setting, the mode of operation has to be changed (to hold open, automatic or exit only) or the door has to be opened by at least 80°. Powerturn … Operation Operation The set parameters of the drive functions may only be modified by a service technician. … Selecting the mode of operation using the operating modes push button The operating modes push button can be deactivated by a service technician. Changing the mode of operation (with single-leaf doors or active leaf) Press the operating modes push button (21) with operating modes display briefly. The operating modes display (2) immediately switches one mode of operation further. The drive itself does not change the mode of operation to the new mode of operation until … s after the last key has been pressed. Operating modes sequence, with the colour of the operating modes display in brackets: …  OFF (–)  Night mode (red)  Exit only (white)  Automatic (green)  Hold open (blue)  OFF (–)  Night mode (red)  … Thanks to the … s delay it is possible to change the mode of operation from automatic through hold open to night mode without the door opening in the hold open setting. X Changing the mode of operation (with passive leaf) X Press the operating modes push button (21) with operating modes display briefly. The drive on the passive leaf is switched on and off. If the drive is switched on, the operating modes display lights up in the colour of the mode of operation (see chapter … .1). If the drive is switched off, the operating modes display does not light up. 11 Operation … Powerturn Selecting the mode of operation at the mechanical programme switch MPS With the programme switch MPS X Turn the rotary switch (22) to the desired mode of operation. The mode of operation is set. 22 Mechanical programme switch MPS With the programme switch MPS-ST (key operated button) Operation of the mechanical programme switch MPS-ST is only possible with the supplied key (23). X Insert the key (23) into the mechanical programme switch MPS-ST. X Turn the key rotary switch (24) to the desired mode of operation. The mode of operation is set. X Remove the key. The mechanical programme switch MPS-ST is locked.   Mechanical programme switch MPS-ST with integrated key switch … Selecting the mode of operation using the display programme switch Touch the desired mode of operation on the display programme switch. The mode of operation is set and indicated on the display (25). X 25 OFF Display programme switch Fault messages on the display If a fault occurs in the door system, it is displayed on the display programme switch about every 10 seconds. X Read off the number of the fault message, note it down and notify the service technician. 12 Powerturn … Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Problem Door only opens and closes slowly Cause Obstruction on travel path Closing safety sensor (SIS) soiled Door only opens a crack Closing safety sensor (SIS) misaligned or defective Obstruction on travel path Irradiation or reflections, e.g. reflective floor, falling rain Misaligned movement detector Obstruction on travel path Door does not open Obstruction on travel path Door opens and closes constantly Movement detector misaligned or defective (outside) Emergency stop button actuated Mode of operation “night mode” “Exit only” mode of operation Door locked mechanically Electric strike does not release Fire alarm active (only Powerturn F) Drive defective Remedy X Remove obstruction and check door leaf for ease of movement X Have the door close completely once; door moves after obstruction at a safe speed until the complete closing procedure has been completed X Clean the closing safety sensor X Have the door close completely once; door moves after obstruction at a safe speed until the complete closing procedure has been completed X Notify a service technician X X Clear the obstruction Check detection area of movement detector Check detection area of movement detector Remove obstruction and check door leaf for ease of movement X Remove obstruction and check door leaf for ease of movement X Check the movement detector, notify a service technician if necessary X Unlock emergency stop button X Select a different mode of operation X Select “Automatic” mode of operation X Unlock the door X Notify a service technician X Carry out a reset (depending on the configuration of the drive, by pressing the reset switch, by changing the mode of operation or by manually opening the door). X Notify a service technician X X 13 Troubleshooting Problem Door does not close (After … minutes of permanent activation by the safety sensor, the Powerturn/Powerturn F automatically closes the door in low-energy mode) Powerturn Cause Closing safety sensor (SIS) soiled Closing safety sensor (SIS) misaligned or defective Obstruction on travel path Movement detector triggers constantly “Hold open” mode of operation Current impulse push button function controls Display programme switch Display programme switch is disabled cannot be operated Display programme switch defective Display programme switch Connection between display programme displays 88 switch and control unit faulty Display programme switch or control unit defective Display programme switch Power failure is dark Connection between display programme switch and control unit faulty Display programme switch or control unit defective Display of fault messages Fault in the door system on the display programme switch 14 Remedy X Clean the closing safety sensor (SIS) X Notify a service technician Remove obstruction and check door leaf for ease of movement X Check the movement detector, notify a service technician if necessary X Select a different mode of operation X Terminate activation by pressing the push button again X Activate key switch for release X Notify a service technician X Notify a service technician X X Notify a service technician X X Check mains fuse Notify a service technician X Notify a service technician Note fault messages. Up to 10 different fault messages can occur in succession. The display changes about every 10 seconds. X Notify a service technician X Powerturn … Cleaning and maintenance … Cleaning Cleaning and maintenance CAUTION! Danger of injury due to impact and crushing! X Set the mode of operation to OFF. X Secure door leaves against accidental movement before carrying out cleaning work. What is to be cleaned? Closing safety sensor (SIS) (e.g. light switch) Glass surfaces Stainless surfaces Coated surfaces Anodised surfaces Display programme switch … How is it to be cleaned? X Wipe with damp cloth X Wipe with a cold vinegar/water mixture; then dry. X Wipe with soft cloth X Wipe with water and soap X Wipe with non-alkaline potassium soap (pH value … 7) X Wipe with damp cloth. Do not use a cleaning agent. Maintenance The building operator must ensure that the system is working perfectly. To guarantee perfect operation, the door system must be serviced regularly by a service technician. Maintenance must be carried out at least once a year or according to the maintenance display on the display programme switch. Installation, maintenance and repair work must be performed by experts authorised by GEZE. If a dot appears in the bottom right-hand part of the display, maintenance is due. X Notify a service technician. The maintenance display lights up after the specified calendar period or number of opening cycles, depending on what occurs first: Powerturn (F) … year or 500,000 cycles GEZE offers maintenance contracts with the following services: à Inspection of fastening elements for firm fit à Performance of miscellaneous adjustment work à Performance of operational checks à Checking all the safety and control equipment of the door system à Lubrication of all the moveable parts … Inspection by an expert In compliance with the “Guidelines for windows, doors and gates” (ASR A1.7 and GUV … ) Section 6, power-operated doors must be inspected for safety by an expert before initial commissioning and at least once a year. 15 Technical data … Powerturn Technical data Mains voltage 230 V AC –15%, +10% Frequency 50/60 Hz Protection class I Capacity rating 200 W Mains connection Fixed connection (installation cable or drip loop) Primary fuse – Secondary fuse 10 A slow-blow, 5×20 mm Secondary voltage (transformer) 33 VAC (46 VDC) Control voltage for external components 24 VDC ±10% 16 Output current control voltage 24 V 1200 mA permanently 1800 mA briefly (2 s, duty ratio 30%) Fuse protection <24 V … A; reversible Temperature range –15…+50 °C IP rating IP30 Emission sound pressure level < 70 dB (A) Opening time 3…25 s Closing time 5…25 s Powerturn … Glossary Glossary Term Hinge side Explanation The side of the door where the hinges from which the door leaf is suspended are located. Usually that side of the door located in the opening direction. Opposite hinge side The side of the door facing the hinge side. Usually that side of the door located in the direction of closing movement. Active leaf The active leaf of a double-leaf door. When the door is used, the active leaf must open as the first door leaf and close as the last door leaf. Passive leaf The secondary leaf of a double-leaf door. When the door is used, the passive leaf may not open until the active leaf has left the closing position and must close again as the first door leaf. Activation device inside (KI) Push button, switch or movement detector for activating the door drive. The activation device is located within the room enclosed by the door. Activation function in the AUTOMATIC and EXIT ONLY modes of operation. The activation device does not have any function in the NIGHT/OFF mode of operation. Activation device outside (KA) Push button, switch or movement detector for activating the door drive. The activation device is located outside the room enclosed by the door. Activation function in the AUTOMATIC mode of operation. The activation device does not have any function in the EXIT ONLY and NIGHT/OFF modes of operation. Activation device Access control function (for example key switch or card reader) used by authorised authorised (KB) persons to activate the door drive. The activation function is active in the AUTOMATIC, EXIT ONLY and NIGHT/OFF modes of operation. Activation device with current Push button for opening and closing the door. Activation function only in the AUTOimpulse function MATIC and EXIT ONLY modes of operation. The door is opened automatically when the button is first pressed and closed again automatically when the button is pressed the second time. The function can be activated during commissioning by parameter setting using the display programme switch, ST 220 or GEZEconnects. If the activation device is connected to the passive leaf control system by means of the “current impulse” function, both door leaves open when activated, even when the passive leaf control system is deactivated. Push&Go When the door is pressed manually out of the closing position with an activated Push&Go function in the AUTOMATIC mode of operation, the door automatically opens as soon as a specific adjustable opening angle is exceeded. Opening safety sensor (SIO) Presence detector (e.g. active infrared light sensor) for protecting the swivelling range of the door in the opening direction. As a rule the sensor is located on the hinge side of the door on the door leaf. Closing safety sensor (SIS) Presence detector (for example active infrared light sensor) for protecting the swivelling range of the door in the closing direction. As a rule the sensor is located on the opposite hinge side of the door leaf. Emergency stop button Self-locking switch with which immediate stopping of the door drive can be triggered in case of danger. The door drive remains in its current position until the user unlocks the emergency stop switch again, thus terminating the emergency stop situation. Low-energy function The GEZE Powerturn can be used as a low-energy drive. In low-energy mode, the force is reduced to 67 N during opening and closing of the door. The opening and closing time are also reduced, minimising the risk of injury through impact at the moving leaf. If people in special need of protection pass through the door, special measures must be taken to eliminate the contact hazard (e.g. use of sensor strips). 17 Glossary Powerturn Term Closing sequence control Electric strike Bolt feedback Reset Door closer mode Servo operation 18 Explanation Electrical closing sequence control In normal operation of double-leaf door drives, the closing sequence of the door leaves is controlled by the control units of the door drives, with the passive leaf being closed first. The active leaf remains in the open position until the passive leaf has reached the closing position, then the active leaf begins to close. Integrated closing sequence control (-IS) The closing sequence is controlled mechanically in the case of a power failure at double-leaf door systems with Powerturn F-IS and Powerturn F-IS/TS. The door leaves are closed by means of the energy storage device of the drives, with the active leaf being kept open by the integrated mechanical closing sequence control. When the passive leaf has reached the closing position, it releases the active leaf by means of the mechanical elements of the integrated closing sequence control so that it can also close completely Fail-secure electric strike Available as AC or DC electric strike version. When the door drive is activated, the electric strike is switched on by the control unit of the door drive provided the door is in the closing position. The electric strike remains activated until the door has left the closing position. Fail-safe electric strike Available as DC electric strike version. The electric strike is switched off when the door drive is activated provided the door is in the closing position. The electric strike remains switched off until the door has left the closing position. The bolt feedback function is a contact integrated in the door catch that is activated when the door is locked mechanically by the tie bolt of the door lock. It signals to the control unit that the door is locked mechanically and can therefore not be opened by the door drive. In this case the control unit ignores the control commands of all the activation devices. Restarting the drive after the operating voltage has been switched on or after a fire alarm has been terminated. In automatic mode (normal operation) the automatic swing door drive can behave like a door closer. This means that closing is torque-controlled. This closing torque can be adjusted and adapted to the respective passage situation. If a servo is used, the swing door drive supports manual opening through torque. The support torque and the support period can be set for this support. Powerturn Glossary 19 Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l. Unipersonale E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru Türkiye GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Scandinavia – Estonia GEZE Scandinavia AB eesti filial E-Mail: estonia@geze.com www.geze.ee Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua Scandinavia – Finland GEZE Scandinavia AB Filial Finland E-Mail: finland@geze.com www.geze.fi United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae Scandinavia – Latvia GEZE Scandinavia AB Latvijas filiāle E-Mail: latvia@geze.com www.geze.lv United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax.: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com Scandinavia – Lithuania GEZE Scandinavia AB Filial Lietu. E-Mail: lithuania@geze.com www.geze.lt

Powerturn IS mechanism

Powerturn Mechanism for integrated closing sequence control 158635-03 EN Installation manual  Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control Contents … 1 Symbols and illustrations … 2 Product liability … 3 Safety … Proper use … Standards … Reference documents … Safety notices … 4 Tools and aids … 5 Types of installation … Type of installation transom installation hinge side … Type of installation transom installation opposite hinge side … 6 Product description … Areas of application … Drive unit with pre-mounted mechanism for integrated closing sequence control … 7 Installing the integrated closing sequence mechanism … Installing the mechanism for integrated closing sequence control for the active leaf drive … Install the mechanism for integrated closing sequence control for the passive leaf drive … 11 Connecting the mechanism for integrated closing sequence control of active and passive leaf … 13 … Function check … 17 … CE marking … 17 10 Commissioning … 18 11 Service and maintenance … 18 12 Troubleshooting … 18 Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control … Symbols and illustrations Symbols and illustrations Important information and technical notes are highlighted to explain correct operation. Symbol Meaning means “important note” means “additional information” X … Symbol for an action: Here you have to do something. X If there are several actions to be taken, keep to the given order. Product liability In compliance with the liability of the manufacturer for his products as defined in the German “Product Liability Act”, compliance with the information contained in this brochure (product information and intended use, misuse, product performance, product maintenance, obligations to provide information and instructions) must be ensured. Failure to comply releases the manufacturer from his statutory liability. … Safety … Proper use The Powerturn IS closing sequence control has been designed for mechanical control during the closing of double-leaf single-action swing leaf doors. The construction components required are a supplement to the Powerturn drive and must be installed according to these instructions. The Powerturn IS closing sequence control à is designed for use on fire or smoke protection doors. à may be used on emergency exit systems. à must not be used for potentially explosive areas. Any improper use such as permanent manual operation, as well as any modification to the product, is not permitted. Observe the “GEZE Product information for door closers”. … Standards During installation of the closing sequence control, the applicable standards must be heeded corresponding to Powerturn. DIN EN 1158 is also applicable … Reference documents à Powerturn installation manuals à Powerturn wiring diagram The diagrams are subject to change without notice. Use only the most recent version. … Safety notices The description of the overall installation of the drive is not the subject of these instructions. This information can be found in the Powerturn installation manuals. All the necessary safety notices for conversion or extension to a double-leaf version can be found on the following pages. … Tools and aids … Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control Tools and aids Tool Size Drill bit Ø … mm Open-ended spanner Size … Allen key … mm Allen key … mm Cross-tip screwdriver … Types of installation … Type of installation transom installation hinge side With this type of installation, only roller guide rail and lever can be used. Details about permissible reveal depth, door overlap and installation holes can be found in the Powerturn installation manuals. passive leaf … active leaf Type of installation transom installation opposite hinge side With this type of installation, both link arms as well as roller guide rail and lever can be used. Details about permissible reveal depth, door overlap and installation holes can be found in the Powerturn installation manuals. passive leaf active leaf Door leaf installation is not possible with mechanical, integrated closing sequence control. … Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control … Product description … Areas of application Product description See Powerturn installation manuals for mechanical and electrical data. … Drive unit with pre-mounted mechanism for integrated closing sequence control … .1 Active leaf drive transom installation hinge side DIN left … 1 … 3 … 5 … .2 … 3 … 1 … 2 Brake unit Setting lever Wire cable tensioner Tension spring for tautening the wire cable Spring attachment Passive leaf drive transom installation hinge side DIN right … 1 … 3 Rocker for integrated closing sequence control Return pulley Integrated closing counterpiece … Product description … .3 Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control Active leaf drive transom installation hinge side DIN right … 1 … 3 … 5 … .4 … 3 … 5 Brake unit Setting lever Wire cable tensioner Tension spring for tautening the wire cable Spring attachment Passive leaf drive transom installation hinge side DIN left … 1 … 3 … Rocker for integrated closing sequence control Return pulley Integrated closing counterpiece … 3 Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control … .5 Product description Active leaf drive transom installation opposite hinge side DIN right … 1 … 3 … 5 … .6 … 3 … 1 Brake unit Setting lever Wire cable tensioner Tension spring for tautening the wire cable Spring attachment Passive leaf drive transom installation opposite hinge side DIN left … 1 … 3 … 1 Rocker for integrated closing sequence control Wire cable guide roller Integrated closing counterpiece … Product description … .7 Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control Active leaf drive transom installation opposite hinge side DIN left … 1 … 3 … 5 … .8 … 4 … Brake unit Setting lever Wire cable tensioner Tension spring for tautening the wire cable Spring attachment Passive leaf drive transom installation opposite hinge side DIN right … 1 … 3 … 2 Rocker for integrated closing sequence control Wire cable guide roller Integrated closing counterpiece … 2 Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control Installing the integrated closing sequence mechanism … Installing the integrated closing sequence mechanism … Installing the mechanism for integrated closing sequence control for the active leaf drive … 2 SW 2,5 … 7 … 5 … 9 Installing the integrated closing sequence mechanism Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control Transom installation opposite hinge side. Installation position brake unit: Opposite Hinge Side (OHS) Transom installation hinge side Installation position brake unit: Hinge Side (HS) … SW 5,5 … SW 2,5 10 11 X During installation of the setting lever, heed the adjustment of the mechanism for integrated closing sequence control as set out in chapter … . X The spring is always installed on the same side as the setting lever. See chapter … for details on adjusting the mechanism for integrated closing sequence control. 10 Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control … Installing the integrated closing sequence mechanism Install the mechanism for integrated closing sequence control for the passive leaf drive Transom installation hinge side Damage to the rocker for integrated closing sequence control by the integrated closing counter piece. X When the IS-mechanism has been pre-mounted, only put the passive leaf drives into electrical operation when the drives with roller lever or link arm have been installed on the door. DIN left DIN right … SW 1,5 SW 1,5 … 2 … 3 … Position of rocker for integrated closing sequence control and counter piece after insertion (drive not yet installed on the door): Position of rocker for integrated closing sequence control and counter piece after insertion (drive not yet installed on the door): … 4 Rocker for integrated closing sequence control must be able to rotate easily on the shoulder of the rocker for integrated closing sequence control. The curved end of the rocker for integrated closing sequence control is facing the gear 11 Installing the integrated closing sequence mechanism Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control Transom installation opposite hinge side. Damage to the rocker for integrated closing sequence control by the integrated closing counter piece. X When the IS-mechanism has been pre-mounted, only put the passive leaf drives into electrical operation when the drives with roller lever or link arm have been installed on the door. DIN right DIN left SW 1,5 SW 1,5 … 1 … 2 … 3 Position of rocker for integrated closing sequence control Position of rocker for integrated closing sequence control and counter piece after insertion (drive not yet installed on and counter piece after insertion (drive not yet installed the door): on the door): … 4 Rocker for integrated closing sequence control must be able to rotate easily on the shoulder of the rocker for integrated closing sequence control. The curved end of the rocker for integrated closing sequence control is facing the gear. 12 Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control … Installing the integrated closing sequence mechanism Connecting the mechanism for integrated closing sequence control of active and passive leaf X Install the drives and levers. See the Powerturn installation manuals for details of drive installation. Connection of the active and passive leaf drive: … 1 Passive leaf (1) Active leaf (2) For wire cable connection see chapter … “Drive unit with pre-mounted mechanism for integrated closing sequence control”. Route of wire cable passive leaf drive hinge side DIN left: Route of wire cable passive leaf drive hinge side DIN right: Route of wire cable passive leaf drive opposite hinge side Route of wire cable passive leaf drive opposite hinge side DIN right: DIN left: 13 Installing the integrated closing sequence mechanism Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control X With continuous cover, remove the additional side panels. X Drill passageways in additional side panels for divided cover: Ø … mm Route of wire cable near the control: Position of setting lever with the brake closed: 14 Position of setting lever with the brake opened: Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control Installing the integrated closing sequence mechanism Attach the wire cable and spring on the wire cable tensioner … 2 … 4 SW … 2 Setscrew (1), tension spring (2) … 3 Position of the setting lever (3) = brake opened, active leaf closing. 15 Installing the integrated closing sequence mechanism Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control Set the retaining action of the integrated closing brake SW 2,5 The correct setting of the entire mechanism for integrated closing sequence control has been achieved when, with the brake closed and passive leaf closed, the setting lever takes up the position as designated for the opened brake. The wire cable must be tensioned both with opened and closed integrated closing brake between the active and passive leaf drive. 16 Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control … Function check Function check X Open the active and passive leaves up to the waiting position. X Release the passive and active leaves. The passive leaf must start the closing movement immediately. The active leaf must remain in position until the brake is opened by the mechanism for integrated closing sequence control on the passive leaf. The active leaf closes. Further test requirements: see national/international standards and regulations. … CE marking Permitted installation types: à With roller guide rail in the closer size range EN4-6 (1) à With link arm in the closer size range EN6-7 (2) Reinhold-Vöster-Str. 21-29 D-71229 Leonberg 0432-CPR-00143-01 EN 1158:1997 + A1:2002 4-6 K-BS-RS, K-BGS-RS, T-BS-RS 5-6 T-BGS-RS 6-7 K-BGS-GST, T-BS-GST … 8 … 6 … 1 … 0 … 5 … ID 164343 … 2 à Remove the foil from the identification plate (4) and stick it to the inside of the cover (3). … 4 17 Commissioning 10 Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control Commissioning See Powerturn installation manuals and wiring diagram for electrical connection, spring force setting and teaching process. 11 Service and maintenance à The maintenance work on the closing sequence control must be carried out by an expert during the maintenance cycle of the Powerturn drive. à See Powerturn installation manuals for maintenance instructions. 12 Troubleshooting For troubleshooting and fault elimination see the fault table in the wiring diagram, “Fault messages” section. 18 Powerturn mechanism for integrated closing sequence control Commissioning 19 Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se Baltic States Lithuania / Latvia / Estonia E-Mail: baltic-states@geze.com Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l. Unipersonale E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Türkiye GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com

IQ windowdrive

IQ windowdrive Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT E 250 NT AB Power lock 148327-11 DE Anschlussplan EN Wiring diagram FR Plan de raccordement ES Diagrama de conexiones PL Schemat połączeń RU Схема подключения ZH 接线图  IQ windowdrive Inhaltsverzeichnis … 2 Symbole und Darstellungsmittel … Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung … Zielgruppe … Produktbeschreibung … 3 … Produkthaftung … Sicherheitshinweise … 5 … Montagehinweise … Leitungsverlegung und elektrischer Anschluss … 7 … 9 10 11 12 13 Prüfen der montierten Anlage … Inbetriebnahme … Antrieb für Syncro-Betrieb konfigurieren … Betriebsarten … 10 Wartung … 10 Entsorgung der Fensteranlage … 11 Technische Daten … 12 … Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise … Sicherheitsbewusstes Arbeiten und Benutzen … Elektrischer Anschluss am Fenster … Anhang: Austausch des Anschlusskabels am Antrieb … A-I Betriebsart Lüftung/Alarm … A-II Betriebsart permanenter Alarmbetrieb … A-III Betriebsart Lüftung ohne Alarm-Funktion … A-IV/V EG-Konformitäts- und Einbauerklärungen … A-VI DE … IQ windowdrive … Symbole und Darstellungsmittel Symbole und Darstellungsmittel Warnhinweise In dieser Anleitung werden Warnhinweise verwendet, um Sie vor Sach- und Personenschäden zu warnen. X Lesen und beachten Sie diese Warnhinweise immer. X Befolgen Sie alle Maßnahmen, die mit dem Warnsymbol und Warnwort gekennzeichnet sind. Warnsymbol Warnwort GEFAHR Bedeutung Gefahren für Personen. Nichtbeachtung führt zu Tod oder schweren Verletzungen. Weitere Symbole und Darstellungmittel Um die korrekte Bedienung zu verdeutlichen, sind wichtige Informationen und technische Hinweise besonders herausgestellt. Symbol Bedeutung bedeutet „Wichtiger Hinweis“ bedeutet „Zusätzliche Information“ X Symbol für eine Handlung: Hier müssen Sie etwas tun. X Halten Sie bei mehreren Handlungsschritten die Reihenfolge ein. … Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung … Zielgruppe Dieses Dokument richtet sich an geschultes Fachpersonal und eingewiesene Betreiber von elektrischen Lüftungs-, Rauch- und Wärmeabzugsanlagen (RWA/NRA/NRWG) mit entsprechenden Kenntnissen der Betriebsarten und potentiellen Gefahren der Anlage. … Produktbeschreibung Die IQ windowdrive sind Elektrokettenantriebe (Slimchain, Powerchain) bzw. Elektrospindelantriebe (E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB) zum elektromotorischen Öffnen und Schließen bzw. Verriegeln (Power lock) von Fenstern im Fassaden- und Schrägfassadenbereich. Geeignet für folgende Anwendungen: à einwärts und auswärts öffnende Kipp-, Klapp- und Drehflügel; à zur täglichen Be- und Entlüftung; DE … Produkthaftung IQ windowdrive à für den Einsatz als einzelner Antrieb (Solo-Antrieb) oder als Mehrfachmontage (Syncro-Antriebe) an einem Fenster à Betriebsspannung 24 V DC à zur Verwendung in trockenen Räumen im Innenbereich, bei E 250 NT AB auch in geschütztem Außenbereich. … Produkthaftung à Gemäß der im Produkthaftungsgesetz definierten Haftung des Herstellers für seine Produkte sind die hier und in den zugehörigen Montageanleitungen des Produkts enthaltenen Informationen (Produktinformationen und bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung, Fehlgebrauch, Produktleistung, Produktwartung, Informations- und Instruktionspflichten) zu beachten. Die Nichtbeachtung entbindet den Hersteller von seiner Haftungspflicht. à Nur Sachkundige, die von GEZE autorisiert sind, dürfen Montage, Funktionsprüfung und Wartung durchführen. Eigenmächtige Veränderungen an der Anlage schließen jede Haftung von GEZE für daraus resultierende Schäden aus. à Bei Kombination mit Fremdgeräten übernimmt GEZE keine Gewährleistung. Auch für Reparatur- und Wartungsaufgaben nur GEZE-Originalteile verwenden. … Sicherheitshinweise Für die Sicherheit von Personen ist es wichtig, diesen Sicherheitshinweisen Folge zu leisten. Diese Anweisungen sind aufzubewahren! … Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise Nach der Maschinenrichtlinie 2006/42/EG ist vor der Inbetriebnahme der Anlage die Risikobeurteilung durchzuführen und die Anlage gemäß Anhang III der EG-Maschinenrichtlinie mit der CE-Kennzeichnung zu versehen. X Den neuesten Stand von Richtlinien, Normen und länderspezifischen Vorschriften beachten, insbesondere: à BGV A1 „Unfallverhütungsvorschrift, Grundsätze der Prävention“ à BGV A3 „Elektrische Anlagen und Betriebsmittel“ à ASR A1.6 „Fenster, Oberlichter, lichtdurchlässige Wände“ à VDE 0100, Teil 600 „Errichten von Niederspannungsanlagen Teil 6. Prüfungen“ à DIN EN 60335-1 „Sicherheit elektrischer Geräte für den Hausgebrauch und ähnliche Zwecke - Teil 1: Allgemeine Anforderungen“ à DIN EN 60335-2-103 „Sicherheit elektrischer Geräte für den Hausgebrauch und ähnliche Zwecke - Teil 2-103: Besondere Anforderungen für Antriebe für Tore, Türen und Fenster à Das Produkt ist nicht dafür bestimmt durch Personen, einschl. Kinder, mit eingeschränkten physischen, sensorischen oder geistigen Fähigkeiten oder mangels Erfahrung und/oder mangels Wissen benutzt zu werden, DE … IQ windowdrive Sicherheitshinweise es sei denn, sie werden durch eine für ihre Sicherheit zuständige Person beaufsichtigt oder erhielten von ihr Anweisungen, wie das Produkt zu benutzen ist. X Kinder nicht mit fest montierten Regel- und/oder Steuereinrichtungen spielen lassen und Fernsteuerungen außerhalb der Reichweite von Kindern halten. X Personen, einschl. Kinder, sind fernzuhalten, wenn ein Schalter mit AusVoreinstellung betätigt wird oder wenn sich ein Fenster schließt, das durch ein Rauch- und Wärmeabzugssystem geöffnet wurde. X Sicherstellen, dass ein Einschließen zwischen dem angetriebenen Teil und den umgebenden Teilen aufgrund der Öffnungs- und Schließbewegung des angetriebenen Teils verhindert wird. à Wenn die Anschlussleitung dieses Geräts getauscht werden muss, darf dies nur durch eine Elektrofachkraft durchgeführt werden. Bei Montage beachten: à Bei Kippfenstern eine geeignete Fangsicherung verwenden (z.B. GEZE Sicherheitsschere Nr. 35) à Zur Befestigung dürfen nur Original-Konsolen verwendet werden. à Zur Montage geeignete Befestigungselemente benutzen. Empfehlungen finden sich in den Montageanleitungen. Sicherstellen, dass die Befestigungselemente im Profil für einen sicheren Halt der montierten Teile sorgen. … Sicherheitsbewusstes Arbeiten und Benutzen Arbeitsplatz gegen unbefugtes Betreten sichern. Schwenkbereich langer Anlagenteile beachten. X Vor Arbeiten an elektrischen Anlagen die Spannungszufuhr unterbrechen und die Spannungsfreiheit prüfen. Bei Verwendung einer unterbrechungsfreien Stromversorgung (USV) ist die Anlage auch bei netzseitiger Freischaltung unter Spannung. X Antriebe beim Einrichten nur im Tastbetrieb ansteuern. à Verletzungsgefahr bei geöffnetem Antrieb durch bewegte Teile (Einziehen von Haaren, Kleidungsstücken usw.) à Verletzungsgefahr durch nicht gesicherte Quetsch-, Stoß-, Scher- und Einzugsstellen. à Verletzungsgefahr durch Glasbruch. à Anfassen der Fensteranlage während des Betriebs kann zu Verletzungen führen. X X DE … Montagehinweise … IQ windowdrive Montagehinweise Falsche Montage kann zu ernsthaften Verletzungen führen, darum folgende Anweisungen beachten: à Der Antrieb ist dazu bestimmt, an Fenstern in einer Höhe von ≥ 2,5 m über der Zugangsebene montiert zu werden. à Laut den oben genannten Normen/Regeln muss die Schließgeschwindigkeit unter … mm/s liegen, wenn keine weiteren Sicherungsmaßnahmen am Fenster selbst getroffen werden bzw. wenn das Fenster unter 2,5 m Höhe eingebaut ist (siehe hierzu S.6 ASR A1.6). Unsere Antriebe sind werksseitig auf diese Geschwindigkeit eingestellt. à Bei Einbauhöhen unter 2,5 m über Zugangsebene folgendes beachten: à Einen Schalter mit Aus-Voreinstellung (Taster) verwenden. à Das Betätigungselement von Schaltern mit Aus-Voreinstellung muss in direkter Sichtweite vom Fenster, aber entfernt von sich bewegenden Teilen angebracht sein. Falls kein Schlüsselschalter verwendet wird, muss das Betätigungselement in einer Höhe von mindestens 1,5 m und unzugänglich für die Öffentlichkeit angebracht sein. à Gemäß EN60335-2-103 Abschn. … darf bei Einbauhöhen unter 2,5 m über Zugangsebene nur der Hub von ≤200 mm eingestellt werden. X Lesen und beachten Sie die Angaben in der Montageanleitung und bewahren Sie diese für den späteren Gebrauch auf. Alle Maßangaben sind am Bau eigenverantwortlich zu prüfen. à Der Antrieb ist ausschließlich für den Einsatz in trockenen Räumen (bei E 250 NT AB auch in geschütztem Außenbereich) bestimmt und darf keiner stark korrosionsgefährdenden Umgebung ausgesetzt werden (z.B. Meeres- oder Seeluft). X Um Verletzungen zu vermeiden, sind Schutzkappen auf überstehende Gewinde der Befestigungsschrauben zu setzen. X Prüfen, ob die auf dem Typenschild des Antriebes angegebenen Bedingungen wie Umgebungstemperatur und elektrische Daten am vorgesehenen Einbauort eingehalten werden. X Vor dem Einbau prüfen, ob das angetriebene Teil in einem guten mechanischen Zustand ist, gewichtsmäßig ausgeglichen ist und sich leicht schließen lässt. X DE … Bitte beachten Sie, dass die Zertifizierung nur gültig ist, wenn die ansteuerung der Produkte den Anforderungen der geltenden SKG-IKOB - AE 3104 entspricht. IQ windowdrive … Leitungsverlegung und elektrischer Anschluss Leitungsverlegung und elektrischer Anschluss Nur die im Anschlussplan angegebenen Kabel verwenden. Kabelart, Leitungslänge und -querschnitt gemäß den technischen Angaben ausführen. X Für Litzenkabel grundsätzlich Aderendhülsen verwenden. X Nicht benutzte Adern isolieren. X Bei 24 V DC und langer Zuleitung muss das Kabel einen genügend großen Querschnitt aufweisen, um einem Spannungsabfall vorzubeugen. Querschnitt berechnen (siehe Kabelplan für RWA-Zentralen)! … Elektrischer Anschluss am Fenster GEFAHR Lebensgefahr durch Stromschlag. X Vor Arbeiten an der elektrischen Anlage die Spannungszufuhr unterbrechen, gegen Wiedereinschalten sichern und auf Spannungsfreiheit prüfen. X Bitte beachten Sie hierzu die zugehörigen Anschlusspläne (A-II bis A-V) im Anhang dieses Dokuments. Aufliegende Antriebe gemäß der gewählten Montageart (siehe Montageanleitung) am Fenster montieren. X Bei Syncro-Betrieb und bei Betrieb mit Verriegelungsantrieben alle Antriebe eines Fensters in der Anschlussdose verbinden. X Siehe A-I Das Anschlusskabel des Antriebs kann im Falle eines Defekts ausgetauscht werden. Bitte beachten Sie hierzu das zugehörige Hinweisblatt (A-I) im Anhang dieses Dokuments. Der Austausch ist nur durch eine Elektrofachkraft zulässig. DE … Prüfen der montierten Anlage … IQ windowdrive Prüfen der montierten Anlage à Maßnahmen zur Absicherung bzw. Vermeidung von Quetsch-, Stoß, Scher- und Einzugsstellen sind insbesondere bei Gefahrenstellen von unter 2,5 m zu prüfen und durchzuführen. Eine Maßnahme ist z.B. die Verwendung eines Schalters mit Aus-Voreinstellung (z.B. GEZE Lüftertaster LTA-LSA ID 118476). Bei Kindern oder Personen mit eingeschränktem Urteilsvermögen muss ein Schlüsselschalter mit Aus-Voreinstellung verwendet werden (z.B. GEZE ID 117996 für SCT, ID 090176 für Zylinder). Das Betätigungselement von Schaltern mit Aus-Voreinstellung muss in direkter Sichtweite vom Fenster, aber entfernt von sich bewegenden Teilen angebracht sein. Falls kein Schlüsselschalter verwendet wird, muss das Betätigungselement in einer Höhe von mindestens 1,5 m und unzugänglich für die Öffentlichkeit angebracht sein. X Nach der Installation ist zu überprüfen, dass die Anlage richtig eingestellt ist und richtig und gefahrlos funktioniert. X Alle Funktionen durch Probelauf überprüfen. à Der Endanwender muss nach der Fertigstellung in allen wichtigen Bedienschritten eingewiesen werden. … Inbetriebnahme Der Antrieb kann beim ersten Anlegen der Betriebsspannung sowohl in „AUF“-Richtung als auch in „ZU“-Richtung (24V A = +24V, 24V B = GND) betrieben werden. Die Schließposition des Fensters erkennt der Antrieb beim ersten Schließen automatisch und speichert diese ab. Es ist zu beachten, dass dabei keine Behinderung besteht. Sollte der Antrieb beim Erreichen der Schließlage reversieren (Antrieb öffnet um ca. 15 mm) muss eine Inbetriebnahmefahrt gestartet werden, gehen Sie dazu wie folgt vor: X Das Fenster mind. 100 mm öffnen. X Schalter zum Schließen des Fensters betätigen (Fenster beginnt zu schließen). X Leitungen „B“ und „L“ für mind. … Sekunden verbinden. X Verbindung „B“ und „L“ wieder trennen. Nun wird eine erneute Inbetriebnahmefahrt durchgeführt. Bei Syncrosystemen wird die Inbetriebnahmefahrt mit allen Antrieben gemeinsam gestartet. Der Antrieb kann mit Hilfe des Inbetriebnahmekoffers (ID 142586) und des Programmiergeräts ST 220 (ID 087261) parametriert werden. Weitere Information hierzu finden Sie in der Anleitung zum Inbetriebnahmekoffer. DE … IQ windowdrive … Antrieb für Syncro-Betrieb konfigurieren Antrieb für Syncro-Betrieb konfigurieren Je Fenster können maximal … Fensterantriebe und bis zu … Verriegelungsantriebe angeschlossen werden. Standardmäßig sind alle Antriebe als „Solo“ konfiguriert. Bei Syncro-Betrieb muss daher vor der Montage jeder Antrieb gemäß seiner Vervendung am Fenster neu konfiguriert werden. FA VA Slimchain, Powerchain X Fensterantrieb (E 250 NT, S­ limchain, Powerchain) Verriegelungsantrieb (Power lock) Power lock E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB Anzahl der Slaves am Master einstellen und Slaves adressieren. DIP (FA) … 2 … Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT E 250 NT AB OFF OFF OFF (4) Master Antrieb SOLO OFF ON ON MASTER OFF ON OFF MASTER SLAVE SLAVE OFF OFF ON MASTER SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE … 2 … ON ON ON MASTER ON ON OFF MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … ON OFF ON MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … SLAVE (4) Slave Antrieb - SLAVE … DIP (VA) … 2 … Power lock ON ON OFF VA … VA … ON OFF ON VA … VA … SLAVE … Verriegelungsantrieb DE … Betriebsarten IQ windowdrive à Jede Adresse des Antriebs darf pro Fenster nur einmal vergeben werden. à Wichtig für Beschlagsystem RWA 105 NT: DIP-Schalter … bei E 250 NT dient der Einstellung der Laufrichtung, DIP4= OFF Ò Fenster AUF = Spindel ausfahren (Normalzustand), DIP4= ON Ò Fenster AUF = Spindel einfahren bzw. Fenster ZU = Ausgefahrene Spindel (Beschlagsystem RWA 105 NT). Bei Antrieben, die im Syncrobetrieb laufen, muss an beiden Antrieben der DIP … gleich eingestellt werden. 10 Betriebsarten Siehe A-II Betriebsart Lüftung/Alarm / Ansteuerung über Relais Alarm à Bei Lüftung: Antrieb öffnet mit Lüftungsgeschwindigkeit bis zum Lüftungshub à Bei Alarm: Antrieb öffnet mit Alarmgeschwindigkeit bis zum Alarmhub à Unterschiedliche Hübe für Lüftung und Alarm möglich. Betriebsart permanenter Alarmbetrieb Antrieb öffnet immer mit Alarmgeschwindigkeit bis zum Alarmhub Siehe A-III Betriebsart Lüftung ohne Alarm-Funktion Antrieb öffnet immer mit Lüftungsgeschwindigkeit bis zum eingestellten Lüftungshub. Siehe A-IV, A-V Bei Kettenantrieben ist der Lüftungshub auf 300 mm eingestellt. Mit Hilfe des Inbetriebnahmekoffers und des Programmiergeräts ST 220 kann der Lüftungshub parametriert werden. 11 Wartung GEZE schreibt eine regelmäßige Wartung (mindestens 1x jährlich) vor. Diese ist von einem Sachkundigen auszuführen. Dabei müssen die Funktion sowie der Zustand der Mechanik (Ungleichgewicht oder Anzeichen von Verschleiß, Beschädigung von Befestigungsteilen) und der elektrischen Anschlüsse sowie der Sicherheitssysteme (Anschluss der IQ box Safety und Sensorik sowie ggfs. deren Erfassungsbereich), falls vorhanden, überprüft werden. Während der Reparatur- und Einstellarbeiten darf die Anlage nicht benutzt werden. X Vor Beginn der Wartungsarbeiten die Spannungszufuhr (24 V DC) unterbrechen, gegen Wiedereinschalten sichern und auf Spannungsfreiheit prüfen. X Befestigungen und Klemmschrauben auf festen Sitz prüfen. X Bei Wartung den Antrieb von Verunreinigungen befreien. DE 10 IQ windowdrive Entsorgung der Fensteranlage Achtung: Quetsch- und Klemmgefahr ! Das Fenster schließt automatisch ! Vor Montage beiliegende Sicherheitshinweise lesen und bei Montage und Betrieb des Antriebs beachten ! Gewährleistungsansprüche setzen eine fachgerechte Montage, Installation und Wartung nach den Angaben des Herstellers voraus. X X 12 Zur Information des Elektrikers diesen Anschlussplan aushändigen. Der Antrieb ist vor Bauschmutz und Strahlwasser zu schützen. Entsorgung der Fensteranlage Die Fensteranlage besteht aus Materialen, die der Wiederverwertung zugeführt werden sollten. Dazu sind die Einzelkomponenten entsprechend ihrer Materialart zu sortieren. à Aluminium (Profile) à Eisen (Schrauben, Kette, ...) à Kunststoff à Elektronikteile (Motor, Steuerung, Transformator, Relais, ....) à Kabel X Die Teile entsprechend den gesetzlichen Bestimmungen entsorgen. DE 11 Technische Daten 13 IQ windowdrive Technische Daten Verriegelungsantriebe Power lock Mechanische Daten Zugkraft [N] Druckkraft [N] 600 600 Hublänge [mm] (siehe Typenschild Antrieb) max. 22 Standard Lüftungshub 22 * parametrierbar DE 12 Hubgeschwindigkeit [mm/sek.] * parametrierbar Öffnen: 2* Öffnen Alarm: … Schließen: 2* Endlagenabschaltung ausgefahren elektronisch über int. Weggeber Endlagenabschaltung eingefahren elektronisch über Weg und Last Überlastabschaltung elektrisch, elektronisch über Stromaufn. Gewicht [kg] 0,8 Hub / Länge Antrieb [mm] 22 / 422 Emissions-Schalldruckpegel Elektrische Daten <70 dB Spannung [V DC] 24 +/-25% SELV max. Restwelligkeit U_ss [%] 20 Einschaltdauer [%] 30 Kurzzeitbetrieb [min] … Leistungsaufnahme [W] max. 36 Stromaufnahme Lüftungsbetrieb [A] Stromaufnahme Alarm-Betrieb [A] 1,5: 24V DC 1,5: 18V DC Umgebungstemperatur [°C] -5 / +70 Schutzart [IP] / Schutzklasse IP 42 / III Anwendungsbereich Trockene Räume Anschlusskabel … x 0,75 mm² Anschlusslänge … m, Silikon ummantelt IQ windowdrive  Fensterantriebe Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB 300 max. 200 (hubabhängig) 600 max. 600 (hubabhängig) 750 750 300 - 800 300* 600 - 1200 300* 100 - 1000 100-1000* (hubabhängig) Öffnen Lüftung: 5* Öffnen Alarm: max. 15 Schließen: 5* Öffnen Lüftung: 5* Öffnen Alarm: max. 15 Schließen: 5* Öffnen Lüftung: 5* Öffnen Alarm: … (bei Hub 500: 10) Schließen: 5* elektronisch über internen Weggeber elektronisch über Weg und Last elektrisch, elektronisch über Stromaufnahme 1,1 - 1,5 2,2 - 3,0 1,1 - 3,0 300 / 498 500 / 598 800 / 748 600 / 693 800 / 793 1200 / 993 100 / 384 150 / 434 200 / 484 230 / 514 300 / 584 500 / 784 750 / 1034 1000 / 1284 <70 dB 24 +/-25% SELV 20 30 … 6 … max. 22 max. 36 max. 22 max. 27 (bei Hub 500) 0,9: 24V DC 1,1: 18V DC 1,2: 24V DC 1,5: 18V DC 0,9: 24V DC 1,1: 24V DC (bei Hub 500) 1,0: 18V DC 1,3: 18V DC (bei Hub 500) IP 40 / III IP 40 / III -5 / +70 IP 65 / III Trockene Räume (E 250 NT AB: geschützter Außenbereich) … x 0,75 mm² … m, Silikon ummantelt Technische Änderungen vorbehalten! DE 13 IQ windowdrive Contents … 2 Symbols and illustrations … Intended use … Target audience … Product description … 3 … Product liability … Safety notices … 5 … Installation information … Routing cables and electrical connection … 7 … 9 10 11 12 13 Inspection of installed system … Commissioning … Configure drive unit for synchronous operation … Modes of operation … 10 Maintenance … 11 Disposal of the window unit … 11 Technical data … 12 … General safety notices … Safety-conscious working and usage … Electrical connection to the window … Appendix: Replacing connection cable of drive … A-I Operating mode ventilation/alarm … A-II Operating mode permanent alarm operation … A-III Operating mode ventilation without alarm-function … A-IV/V EC-declarations of conformity and incorporation … A-VI EN … Symbols and illustrations IQ windowdrive … Symbols and illustrations Warning notices In these instructions, warnings are used to warn against material damage and injuries. X Always read and observe these warning notices. X Observe all measures marked with the warning symbol and warning word . Warning symbol Warning word DANGER Meaning Danger to persons. Non-compliance will result in death or serious injuries. Other symbols and means of illustration Important information and technical notes are highlighted to explain correct operation. Symbol Meaning means “important note” means “additional Information” X Symbol for an action: This means you have to do something. X If there are several actions to be taken, keep to the given order. … Intended use … Target audience This document addresses trained specialists and instructed operators or electrically operated ventilation, smoke and heat extraction systems (Smoke and heat extraction systems/NRA/SHEV) with corresponding knowledge of the modes of operation and potential hazards of the system. … Product description IQ windowdrive are chain drives (Slimchain, Powerchain) or electric spindle drives (E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB) for electronically opening and closing or locking (Power lock) windows in façade and sloped façade areas. Suitable for the following applications: à Inward and outward opening bottom-hung, top-hung and side-hung leaves; à for daily ventilation and exhaust; à for use as an individual drive unit (solo drive) or multiple units installed (syncro drive units) on one window EN … Product liability IQ windowdrive à Operating voltage 24 V DC à for use in dry rooms in internal applications, E 250 NT AB can also be used in secured outer areas. … Product liability à In accordance with the liability of the manufacturer for their products as defined in the German “Produkthaftungsgesetz” (Product Liability Act), the information contained in this brochure and in the corresponding installation instructions of the product (product information and proper use, misuse, product performance, product maintenance, obligations to provide information and instructions) is to be observed. Failure to comply releases the manufacturer from their statutory liability. à Only qualified personnel who are authorised by GEZE may carry out mounting, function check and maintenance. GEZE shall not be liable for injuries or damage resulting from unauthorised modification of the equipment. à GEZE shall not be liable if devices from other manufacturers are used with GEZE equipment. Use only original GEZE parts for repair and maintenance work as well. à … Safety notices To ensure personal safety, it is important to follow these safety instructions. These instructions must be kept. … General safety notices In accordance with Machine Directive 2006/42/EC, a risk assessment must be performed and the system identified with the CE marking in accordance with Appendix III of the EC Machine Directive before commissioning the system. X Observe the latest versions of guidelines, standards and country-specific regulations, in particular: à BGV A1 “Accident-prevention regulations, Principles of prevention” à BGV A3 “Electrical installations and equipment” à ASR A1.6 “Windows, fanlights, translucent walls” à VDE 0100, 600 “Installation of low voltage systems - Part 6. Tests” à DIN EN 60335-1 “Safety of electrical devices for home use and similar purposes - Part 1: General requirements” à DIN EN 60335-2-103 “Safety of electrical devices for home use and similar purposes - Part 2-103: Special requirements for drives for gates, doors and windows à The product has not been designed to be used by people, including children, who have restricted physical, sensory or mental abilities or a lack of experience and/or knowledge, unless they are supervised by a person responsible for their safety or have received instructions from that person, as to how the product is to be used. EN … IQ windowdrive Safety notices Do not allow children to play with permanently installed control equipment of any kind and keep remote controls out of reach of children. X People, including children, must be kept out of the way when a switch with OFF default setting is actuated or when a window that has been opened by a smoke and heat extraction system closes. X Ensure that it is not possible to become trapped between the driven part and the surrounding parts due to the opening and closing movement of the driven part. à If the connection cable of this device has to be replaced, this work may only be carried out by a qualified electrician. X During installation, heed the following: à With bottom-hung windows, use a suitable collecting safety device (e.g. GEZE safety scissor stay no. 35) à Only genuine consoles may be used for attachment. à Use suitable fastening elements for installation. Recommendations can be found in the installation instructions. Make sure that the fastening elements in the profile guarantee safe fixing of the installed parts. … Safety-conscious working and usage Secure workplace against unauthorised entry. Watch the swivelling range of long system parts. X Before working on the electrical system interrupt the power supply and verify the safe isolation from supply. Note that if an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) is used, the system will still be supplied with voltage despite the fact that the power supply is disconnected. X During the set-up activate the drives only in switching operation. à Risk of injury when a drive is opened through moving parts (drawing in of hair, clothing, etc.) à Risk of injury by trapping, knocking, shearing and hair etc. being pulled in at unsecured points. à Danger of injury due to glass breakage. à Touching the window unit can result in injuries during operation. X X EN … Installation information … IQ windowdrive Installation information Incorrect installation can result in serious injuries, so please observe the following instructions: à The drive unit has been designed for installation , on windows at a height of ≥ … m above the access level. à According to the above-mentioned standards/regulations, the closing speed must be less than 5mm/s if no further safety measures are taken on the window itself or if the window is installed at a height of less than … m (see p.6 ASR A1.6). Our drive units have been adjusted to this speed in the factory. à For installation heights less than … m above the access level, please observe the following: à A switch with an OFF default setting (push button) must used. à The activating element for switches with an off default setting must be attached in the direct line of sight of the window, but removed from moving parts. If a key operated button is not used, the activating element must be installed at a height of at least … m, and may not be accessible to the public. à In compliance with EN60335-2-103 section. … , only a stroke of ≤200 mm may be set for installation heights under … m. X Read and observe the specifications in the installation instructions and keep these for later use. All the dimensions specified have to be checked on site on own initiative and responsibility. à The drive is designed solely for use in dry rooms (E 250 NTAB is also designed for use in secured outer areas) and may not be subjected to highly corrosive environments (e.g. sea air or marine air). X In order to avoid injuries, protective caps are to be placed onto projecting threads of the fastening screws. X Check whether the conditions specified on the information plate of the drive such as the ambient temperature and electrical data are observed at the planned installation site. X Before mounting the driven part check whether it is in a good mechanical state, has a balanced weight and can be closed easily. X EN … “Please note that the certification is valid only if the control of the products meets the requirements as stated in the applicable SKG-IKOB - AE 3104.” IQ windowdrive … Routing cables and electrical connection Routing cables and electrical connection Use only cables prescribed in the wiring diagram. Implement the cable type, line length and cross-section in accordance with the technical specifications. X Always use wire-end ferrules for wire cores. X Insulate wires that are not used. X In the case of 24 V DC and a longer power supply cable, the cable must have a sufficiently large cross-section in order to prevent a voltage drop. Calculate the cross-section (see cable plan for smoke and heat extraction control panels)! … Electrical connection to the window DANGER Danger of fatal injury through electric shock. X Before working on the of electrical system interrupt the power supply, secure it against being switched on again and verify the safe isolation from supply. X Please note the corresponding wiring diagrams (A-II to A-V) attached to this document. Mount the surface-mounted drive units appropriate for the selected type of installation (see the installation instructions) on the window. X In case of synchronous mode and the mode with locking drives, link all the drives of a window to a connection socket. X Cf. A-I The drive unit connection cable can be replaced if it is defective. Please note the corresponding information sheet (A-I) attached to this document. Replacement is only permissible when carried out by a qualified electrician. EN … Inspection of installed system … IQ windowdrive Inspection of installed system à The measures for protection and prevention of crushing, impact, shearing or drawing-in spots, in particular at points with a height of less than … m are to be considered and carried out. One measure, for example, is the use of switch with OFF default setting (e.g. GEZE vent switch LTA-LSA ID 118476). In the case of children or persons with a limited ability to judge, a key operated button with an OFF default setting must be used (e.g. GEZE ID 117996 for key switch, ID 090176 for cylinders). The activating element for switches with an off default setting must be attached in the direct line of sight of the window, but removed from moving parts. If a key operated button is not used, the activating element must be installed at a height of at least … m, and may not be accessible to the public. X After installation has been completed, check that the system is set correctly and is functioning correctly and safely. X Check all the functions by carrying out a trial run. à The end user has to be instructed in all the important operating and handling steps after completion. … Commissioning After applying the operating voltage for the first time, the drive can be operated in the “OPEN” direction as well as in the “CLOSE” direction (24V A = +24V, 24V B = GND). The drive automatically detects the closing position of the window when closing for the first time and saves it. It must be ensured that there is no hindrance at that time. Should the drive reverse after reaching the closing position (drive opens by approximately 15 mm), a commissioning run must be started. To do this, proceed as follows: X Open the window at least 100 mm. X Press the switch to close the window (window begins to close). X Connect cables “B” and “L” for at least … seconds. X Disconnect “B” and “L” once again. Now, another commissioning run will be completed. In the synchro-systems, the commissioning run is started along with all the drives. Parameters can be set for the drive unit with the help of the service case (ID 142586) and the programming device ST 220 (ID 087261). For more information, please refer to the instructions for the service case. EN … Configure drive unit for synchronous operation IQ windowdrive … Configure drive unit for synchronous operation A maximum of … window drives and up to … locking drives can be connected for each window. All drive units are configured as “Solo” drive units as a default. Therefore, with synchronous operation each drive unit must be reconfigured according to its use on the window before installation. FA VA Slimchain, Powerchain X Window drive (E 250 NT, S­ limchain, Powerchain) Locking drive (Power lock) Power lock E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB Adjust the number of slaves on the master and address the slaves. DIP (FA) … 2 … Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT E 250 NT AB OFF OFF OFF (4) Master drive unit SOLO OFF ON ON MASTER OFF ON OFF MASTER SLAVE SLAVE OFF OFF ON MASTER SLAVE SLAVE (4) Slave drive unit SLAVE … 2 … ON ON ON ON ON OFF MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … ON OFF ON MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … DIP (VA) … 2 … Power lock ON ON OFF VA … VA … ON OFF ON VA … VA … MASTER - SLAVE SLAVE … SLAVE … Locking drive EN … Modes of operation IQ windowdrive à Every address of the drive must be assigned only once per window. à Important information for fitting system RWA 105 NT: DIP switch … with E 250 NT is used to set the direction of travel, DIP4 = OFF Ò Window OPEN = extend the spindle (normal state), DIP4 = ON Ò Window OPEN = retract the spindle or window CLOSE = extended spindle (hardware system RWA 105 NT fitting system). In case of drives that run in synchronous mode, the DIP … must have the same setting on both the drives. 10 Modes of operation Cf. A-II Mode of operation Ventilation/alarm / Activation via relay alarm à In case of ventilation : Drive unit opens at ventilation speed up to ventilation stroke à In case of alarm: Drive opens at alarm speed up to the alarm stroke à Different strokes for ventilation and alarm possible Permanent alarm operating mode Drive unit always opens at alarm speed to the alarm stroke Cf. A-III Ventilation mode of operation without alarm function Drive unit always opens with ventilation speed to the set ventilation stroke. See A-IV, A-V In case of chain drives, the ventilation hub must be set to 300 mm. The ventilation stroke can be configured with the help of the service case and the programming device ST 220. EN 10 IQ windowdrive 11 Maintenance Maintenance GEZE prescribes regular maintenance (at least once a year). This is to be carried out by a suitably qualified person. The function and condition of the mechanisms (imbalance or signs of wear, damage to fastening parts) and electrical connections must be checked, as well as the safety systems (connection of IQ box Safety and sensors as well as their detection area), if available. The system may not be used during repair and setting work. X Before starting maintenance work, interrupt the power supply (24 V DC), secure it against being switched on again and verify it is safely isolated from the supply. X Inspect the fixations and fixing screws for firm fit. X Clean soiling from the drive during maintenance. Attention: Danger of pinching and clamping! The window closes automatically! Before installation, read the enclosed safety notes and consider them during installation and operation of the drive! Warranty claims require proper mounting, installation and maintenance in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. X X 12 Inform the electrician by handing out this wiring diagram. The drive must be protected from construction dirt and splashwater. Disposal of the window unit The window unit consists of materials that have to be recycled. The individual components have to be sorted in accordance with their material type. à Aluminium (profiles) à Iron (screws, chain, ...) à Plastic à Electronic components (motor gear unit, control unit, transformer, relay, ...) à Cables X Dispose of the parts in accordance with the statutory regulations. EN 11 Technical data 13 IQ windowdrive Technical data Locking drives Power lock Mechanical data Pulling force [N] Compressive force [N] 600 600 Stroke length [mm] (see drive unit identification plate) Standard ventilation stroke * configurable max. 22 Stroke speed [mm/sec] * configurable Open: 2* Open alarm: … Close: 2* End position cut-off extended electronically via int. pathfinder End position cut-off retracted electronically via path and load Overload cut-off electric, electronic via current consumption Weight [kg] … Stroke / drive length [mm] 22 / 422 Emission sound pressure level Electrical data <70 dB Voltage [V DC] 24 +/-25% SELV max. residual ripple U_ss [%] Duty rating [%] Short-term operation [min] 20 30 … Power consumption [W] max. 36 22 Ventilation mode current consumption [A] … : 24V DC Current consumption alarm mode [A] … : 18V DC EN 12 Ambient temperature [°C] -5 / +70 IP rating [IP] / protection rating IP 42 / III Area of application Dry rooms Connecting cable … x … mm² Connection length … m, silicon sheathed IQ windowdrive Window drives Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB 300 max. 200 (depending on stroke) 600 max. 600 (depending on stroke) 750 750 300 - 800 600 - 1200 100 - 1000 300* 300* 100- 1000 * (depending on stroke) Open ventilation : 5* Open alarm: max. 15 Close: 5* Open ventilation : 5* Open alarm: max. 15 Close: 5* Open ventilation : 5* Open alarm: … (at stroke 500: 10) Close: 5* electronically via internal pathfinder electronically via path and load electric, electronic via current consumption … - … - … - … 300 / 498 500 / 598 800 / 748 600 / 693 800 / 793 1200 / 993 100 / 384 150 / 434 200 / 484 230 / 514 300 / 584 500 / 784 750 / 1034 1000 / 1284 <70 dB 24 +/-25% SELV 20 30 … 6 … max. 22 max. 36 max. 22 max. 27 (at stroke 500) … : 24V DC … : 18V DC … : 24V DC … : 18V DC … : 24V DC … : 24V DC (at stroke 500) … : 18V DC … : 18V DC (at stroke 500) IP 40 / III IP 40 / III -5 / +70 IP 65 / III Dry areas (E 250 NT AB: secured outer areas) … x … mm² … m, silicon sheathed Subject to technical modifications! EN 13 IQ windowdrive Sommaire … 2 Symboles et moyens de représentation … Utilisation conforme aux dispositions … 3 … Responsabilité du fabricant du fait de ses produits … Consignes de sécurité … 5 … Instructions de montage … Pose des lignes et raccordement électrique … 7 … 9 Contrôle de l‘installation montée … Mise en service … Configurer l‘entraînement pour un fonctionnement ­synchrone … Modes de fonctionnement … 10 Maintenance … 11 Mise au rebut de l‘installation de fenêtre … 11 Données techniques … 12 … 10 11 12 13 Groupe cible … Description du produit … Consignes de sécurité générales … Travail et utilisation respectueux des consignes de sécurité … Raccordement électrique sur la fenêtre … Annexe: Remplacement du câble de raccordement sur l‘entraînement … A-I Mode de fonctionnement ventilateur/alarme … A-II Mode de fonctionnement Alarme permanente … A-III Mode de fonctionnement ventilation sans fonction d‘alarme … A-IV/V Déclarations de conformité CE et de montage … A-VI FR … IQ windowdrive … Symboles et moyens de représentation Symboles et moyens de représentation Avertissements Dans ces instructions, des avertissements sont utilisés pour vous prévenir d’éventuels dommages corporels et matériels. X Lisez et respectez toujours ces avertissements. X Appliquez toutes les mesures indiquées par le symbole et le message d'avertissement. Symbole Message Signification d’avertissement d’avertissement Danger pour les personnes. DANGER Un non-respect provoque des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Autres symboles et panneaux de signalisation Afin de garantir une utilisation conforme, les informations importantes et les indications techniques sont mises en valeur. Symbole Signification signifie « Indication importante » signifie « Informations complémentaires » X Symbole d'action : Dans ce cas, vous devez effectuer une action. X Veuillez respecter l’ordre des étapes d’intervention décrites. … Utilisation conforme aux dispositions … Groupe cible Ce document est destiné au personnel qualifié et formé et aux exploitants qualifiés des systèmes de ventilation, d’extraction de fumée et de la chaleur électriques (RWA/NRA/NRWG) avec les connaissances correspondantes des modes de fonctionnement et des dangers potentiels de l’installation. … Description du produit Les IQ windowdrive sont des entraînements à chaîne (Slimchain, Powerchain) ou des vérins motorisés (E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB) pour l’ouverture et la fermeture électromotorisées ou le verrouillage (Power lock) de fenêtres dans le domaine des façades et des façades en biais. Convient pour les applications suivantes : à Fenêtres à soufflet, à l’italienne et à la française ouvrant vers l’intérieur et vers l’extérieur ; à Pour la ventilation et l’aération quotidiennes ; FR … Responsabilité du fabricant du fait de ses produits IQ windowdrive à Pour une utilisation comme entraînement individuel (entraînement Solo) ou en montage multiple (entraînement Synchro) sur une fenêtre à Tension de service 24 V DC à Pour une utilisation dans des pièces sèches à l’intérieur, pour l’E 250 NT AB également dans une zone extérieure protégée. … Responsabilité du fabricant du fait de ses produits à Conformément à la responsabilité du fabricant pour ses produits définie dans la loi de responsabilité de produit, les informations contenues dans ce document et dans les instructions de montage du produit (informations du produit et utilisation conforme, usage incorrect, performance du produit, maintenance du produit, obligations d'information et d'instruction) doivent être respectées. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de non-respect de ces indications. à Seules les personnes qualifiées dûment autorisées par GEZE doivent réaliser les opérations de montage, de contrôle du fonctionnement et de maintenance. Les modifications individuelles sur l'installation annulent toute responsabilité de GEZE pour les dommages associés. à GEZE décline tout droit à la garantie en cas de combinaison avec des appareils d’autres marques. Pour les réparations et les opérations de maintenance, utiliser uniquement des pièces d'origine de GEZE. … Consignes de sécurité Pour la sécurité des personnes, il est important de respecter ces consignes de sécurité. Ces consignes doivent être conservées ! … Consignes de sécurité générales Selon la directive sur les machines 2006/42/CE, l'analyse des risques doit être effectuée avant la mise en service de l'installation, et l'installation doit être pourvue du marquage CE selon l'Annexe III à la directive CE sur les machines. X Respecter la version la plus récente des directives, normes et prescriptions spécifiques au pays, en particulier : à BGV A1 « Prévention des accidents, principes de prévention » à BGV A3 « Installations électriques et ressources » à ASR A1.6 « Fenêtres, impostes, parois translucides » à VDE 0100, Section 600 « Installation de systèmes à basse tension Section 6. Contrôles ». à DIN EN 60335-1 « Sécurité des appareils électriques à usage domestique et buts similaires - partie … : Critères généraux » à DIN EN 60335- … - 103 « Sécurité des appareils électriques pour un usage domestique et d'autres fins similaires » - Section 2- 103 : Exigences spécifiques pour les entraînements de volets, de portes et de fenêtres à Le produit ne convient pas pour une utilisation par des personnes, y compris des enfants, avec des capacités physiques, sensorielles ou intellectuelles FR … IQ windowdrive Consignes de sécurité limitées ou un manque d’expérience et/ou de connaissances, sauf si elles sont sous la surveillance d’une personne responsable de leur sécurité ou ont été formées à l’utilisation du produit. X Ne pas laisser les enfants jouer avec les dispositifs de régulation et/ou de commande installés à demeure et garder les télécommandes hors de portée des enfants. X Les personnes y compris les enfants doivent être maintenues à distance si un commutateur avec un préréglage de coupure est actionné ou si un fenêtre ouvert par un système d’extraction de fumée et de chaleur se ferme. X S'assurer qu'il ne peut pas se produire de blocage entre l’entraînement et les éléments environnants suite au mouvement d'ouverture et de fermeture de la partie entraînée. à Si le câble de raccordement de cet appareil doit être remplacé, cela doit uniquement être effectué par un électricien qualifié. Pour le montage, veiller à ce qui suit : à Pour les fenêtres à soufflet, on doit utiliser un arrêt approprié (p. ex. compas de sécurité GEZE n° 35). à Pour la fixation, seules des consoles d'origine doivent être utilisées. à Pour le montage, utiliser des éléments de fixation adaptés. Des recommandations sont fournies dans les instructions de montage. Veiller à ce que les éléments de fixation dans le profilé garantissent le bon maintien des pièces montées. … Travail et utilisation respectueux des consignes de sécurité Interdire l'accès au chantier aux personnes non autorisées Respecter l'angle d'ouverture des éléments de fixation de grande longueur. X Avant de travailler sur des installations électriques, couper l'alimentation en tension et vérifier que l'installation n'est plus sous tension. Lors de l'utilisation d'une alimentation sans interruption (ASI), l'installation reste également sous tension malgré une déconnexion du réseau électrique. X Contrôler les entraînements sur les équipements uniquement en mode pas à pas. à Risque de blessure causée par les pièces mobiles si l'entraînement est ouvert (tirage des cheveux, des pièces de vêtements, etc.) à Risque de blessure causée par des points d'écrasement, de choc, de cisaillement et d'entraînement non sécurisés. à Risque de blessure causée par des bris de verre. à Tout contact avec l'installation de fenêtre pendant son fonctionnement risque d'entraîner des blessures. X X FR … Instructions de montage … IQ windowdrive Instructions de montage Un montage incorrect peut entraîner des blessures graves, il faut donc respecter les consignes suivantes : à L’entraînement convient pour un montage sur des fenêtres à une hauteur ≥ 2,5 m au-dessus du niveau d'accès. à Selon les normes/règlementations mentionnées ci-dessus, la vitesse de fermeture doit être inférieure à … mm/sec, si aucune autre mesure de sécurité n'est appliquée à la fenêtre ou si la fenêtre est montée à une hauteur inférieure à 2,5 m de hauteur (voir à ce sujet S.6 ASR A1.6). Nos entraînements sont réglés à cette vitesse en usine. à Pour une hauteur de montage inférieure à 2,5 m au-dessus du niveau d'accès, respecter ce qui suit : à Utiliser un commutateur avec préréglage de coupure (bouton). à L'élément d'actionnement des commutateurs avec préréglage d'arrêt doi être placé à portée de vue directe de la fenêtre mais à distance des pièces mobiles. Si aucun commutateur à clé n’est utilisé, l’élément d'actionnement doit être placé à une hauteur d'au moins 1,5 m et être inaccessible au public. à Conformément à la norme EN 60335-2-103 section … , en cas de hauteur de montage inférieure à 2,5 m au-dessus du niveau d'accès, la course de ≤200 mm doit être réglée. X Veuillez lire et respecter les indications contenues dans le manuel de montage et conserver ce dernier pour un usage futur. Toutes les indications de mesures doivent être vérifiées sur place de façon individuelle. à L'entraînement est prévu exclusivement pour une utilisation dans une pièce sèche (pour le E 250 NT AB y compris dans une zone extérieure protégée) et ne doit pas être soumis à un environnement particulièrement corrosif (par ex. à l'air marin). X Afin d'éviter tout risque de blessure, des capots de protection doivent être placés sur les filetages des vis de fixation qui dépassent. X Vérifier si les conditions indiquées sur la plaque signalétique de l'entraînement telles que la température ambiante et les données électriques sont respectées sur le lieu de montage prévu. X Avant le montage, contrôler que la fenêtre est en bon état mécanique, que son poids est équilibré et qu'elle se laisse facilement fermer. X … Pose des lignes et raccordement électrique X FR … „Veuillez noter que la certification n‘est valable que si le contrôle des produits répond aux exigences énoncées dans la norme SKG-IKOB - AE 3104 applicable.“ Utiliser uniquement les câbles indiqués dans le plan de raccordement. Choisir le type de câble, la longueur du conduit et la coupe transversale conformément aux indications techniques. IQ windowdrive X X Pose des lignes et raccordement électrique Pour les torons de câbles, utiliser des extrémités du câble par principe. Isoler les fils non utilisés. Avec 24 V DC et une alimentation longue, le câble doit présenter une coupe transversale de taille suffisante, afin d'éviter une chute de tension. Calculer la section (cf. plan de câblage pour centrales d'installations de désenfumage et d'évacuation de la chaleur) … Raccordement électrique sur la fenêtre DANGER Danger de mort par électrocution. X Avant de travailler sur des installations électriques, couper l'alimentation en tension, sécuriser contre tout risque de remise en marche et vérifier que l'installation n'est plus sous tension. X Veuillez suivre à cet effet les plans de câblage appropriés (A-II à A-V) joints à ce document. Monter sur la fenêtre les entraînements non intégrés en fonction du type de montage sélectionné (cf. instructions de montage). X En mode synchronisé et en mode de fonctionnement avec des entraînements de verrouillage, tous les entraînements d'une fenêtre doivent être connectés à la prise de raccordement. X Cf. A-I Le câble de raccordement de l'entraînement peut être remplacé s'il est endommagé. Veuillez suivre à cet effet la fiche d'information appropriée (A-I) jointe à ce document. Le remplacement doit uniquement être effectué par un électricien qualifié. FR … Contrôle de l'installation montée … IQ windowdrive Contrôle de l'installation montée à Vérifiez et respectez les mesures destinées à protéger et éviter les points d'écrasement, de choc, de cisaillement ou d'engagement, en particulier pour une hauteur du point dangereux inférieure à 2,5 m. Une telle mesure pourrait être, par exemple, l'utilisation d'un commutateur avec préréglage d'arrêt (p. ex. bouton-poussoir de ventilation GEZE LTA-LSA, n° de ID 118476 ). En présence d'enfants ou de personnes à faculté de jugement limitée, l'utilisation d'un commutateur à clé avec préréglage d'arrêt est indispensable (p. ex. GEZE n° de ID 117996 pour SCT, ID 090176 pour cylindres). L'élément d'actionnement des commutateurs avec préréglage d'arrêt doit être placé à portée de vue directe de la fenêtre mais à distance des pièces mobiles. Si aucun commutateur à clé n’est utilisé, l’élément d'actionnement doit être placé à une hauteur d'au moins 1,5 m et être inaccessible au public. X Après le montage, contrôler que l'installation est correctement réglée, fonctionne normalement et sans danger. X Vérifier toutes les fonctions par un test de fonctionnement. à Une fois le montage terminé, l'utilisateur final doit avoir été initié à toutes les étapes de manipulation importantes. … Mise en service L'entraînement peut être utilisé dans le sens d' « OUVERTURE » et dans le sens de « FERMETURE » (24V A = +24V, 24V B = GND) lors de la première installation de la tension de service. La position de fermeture de la fenêtre est détectée par l'entraînement automatiquement lors de la première fermeture et est enregistrée par ce dernier. Il est nécessaire de veiller à ce qu'il n'y ait pas d'obstacle. Si l'entraînement est inversé une fois la position de fermeture atteinte (l'entraînement s'ouvre d'env. 15 mm), une course de mise en service doit être démarrée. Pour ce faire, veuillez procéder de la façon suivante : X Ouvrir la fenêtre d’au moins 100 mm. X Actionner le commutateur pour la fermeture de la fenêtre (la fenêtre commence l'opération de fermeture). X Relier les câbles « B » et « L » pendant au moins … secondes. X Déconnecter les câbles « B » et « L » de nouveau. Une autre marche de mise en service s'exécute. Sur les systèmes synchronisés, la course de mise en service est démarrée avec tous les entraînements. Le système d’entraînement peut être paramétré avec la valise de mise en service (ID 142586) et l'appareil de paramétrage ST 220 (ID 087261). Vous trouverez de plus amples informations à ce sujet dans les instructions de la valise de mise en service. FR … IQ windowdrive … Configurer l'entraînement pour un fonctionnement synchrone Configurer l'entraînement pour un fonctionnement synchrone Il est possible de raccorder jusqu'à … entraînements de fenêtre max. et jusqu'à … entraînements de verrouillage. Tous les entraînements sont configurés par défaut comme « seuls ». C'est la raison pour laquelle chaque entraînement prévu au fonctionnement synchrone doit être reconfiguré avant son montage en fonction de son type d'utilisation sur la fenêtre. FA VA Slimchain, Powerchain X Motorisation de fenêtre (E 250 NT, Slimchain, Powerchain) Entraînement de verrouillage (Power lock) Power lock E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB Ajuster le nombre d'esclaves sur le maître et adresser les esclaves. DIP (FA) … 2 … Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT E 250 NT AB OFF OFF OFF (4) Entraînement maître SOLO OFF ON ON MASTER OFF ON OFF MASTER SLAVE SLAVE OFF OFF ON MASTER SLAVE SLAVE … 2 … ON ON ON MASTER ON ON OFF MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … ON OFF ON MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … SLAVE SLAVE (4) Entraînement esclave - SLAVE … DIP (VA) … 2 … Power lock ON ON OFF VA … VA … ON OFF ON VA … VA … SLAVE … Entraînement de verrouillage FR … Modes de fonctionnement IQ windowdrive à Chaque adresse de l'entraînement ne doit être saisie qu'une seule fois par fenêtre. à Important pour le système de ferrure RWA 105 NT : Le commutateur DIP … pour E 250 NT sert à régler le sens de fonctionnement, DIP4= OFF ÒFenêtre OUVERTE = sortir le vérin (état normal), DIP4= ON ÒFenêtre OUVERTE = rentrer le vérin ou fenêtre FERMÉE = vérin sortie (système de ferrure RWA 105 NT). Pour les entraînements qui fonctionnent en mode synchronisé, le DIP … doit être réglé de la même façon sur les deux entraînements. 10 Modes de fonctionnement Cf. A-II Mode de fonctionnement ventilation/alarme/commande via relais d'alarme à En cas de ventilation : L’entraînement effectue l'ouverture à vitesse de ventilation jusqu'à la course de ventilation à En cas d'alarme : l'entraînement effectue l'ouverture à vitesse d'alarme jusqu'à la course d'alarme à Différentes courses pour la ventilation et l'alarme sont possibles. Mode de fonctionnement d'alarme permanente L'entraînement effectue l'ouverture toujours à vitesse d'alarme jusqu'à la course d'alarme Cf. A-III Mode de fonctionnement de ventilation sans fonction d'alarme L'entraînement effectue l'ouverture toujours à vitesse de ventilation jusqu'à la course de ventilation réglée. Cf. A-IV, A-V Pour les entraînements à chaîne, la course de ventilation doit être réglée sur 300 mm. À l'aide de la valise de en service et de l'appareil de programmation ST 220, la course de ventilation peut être paramétrée.<paramétrée. FR 10 IQ windowdrive 11 Maintenance Maintenance GEZE prescrit l'exécution régulière d'opérations de maintenance (au moins … x par an). Ces opérations doivent être réalisées par des professionnels. Pour cela, le fonctionnement et l'état du mécanisme (déséquilibre ou signe d’usure, endommagement des pièces de fixation) et les raccordements électriques ainsi que les systèmes de sécurité (raccordement du IQ box Safety et des capteurs et zone de détection le cas échéant) doivent être vérifiés le cas échéant. Pendant les opérations de réparation et de réglage, l'installation ne doit pas être utilisée. X Avant de commencer les travaux de maintenance, couper l'alimentation en tension (24 V DC), sécuriser pour éviter tout risque de remise en marche et vérifier l'absence de tension. X Vérifier le bon maintien des fixations et des vis de serrage. X Lors des opérations de maintenance, retirer les impuretés présentes dans l'entraînement. Attention : Risque d'écrasement et de pincement ! La fenêtre se ferme automatiquement ! Avant le montage, lire les consignes de sécurité jointes et les respecter pour le montage et l'utilisation de l'entraînement ! Les recours en garantie impliquent un montage, une installation et une maintenance conformes selon les indications du fabricant. X X 12 Remettre le plan de raccordement à l'électricien à titre d'information. L'entraînement doit être protégé contre les salissures liées au montage et contre les projections d'eau. Mise au rebut de l'installation de fenêtre L'installation de fenêtre est composée de matériaux qui doivent être recyclés. Les composants individuels doivent être triés en fonction du type de matériau. à Aluminium (profilés) à Fer (vis, chaînes, etc.) à PVC à Pièces électroniques (moteur, contrôle, transformateur, relais, ...) à Câbles X Traitement des pièces conformément aux dispositions légales. FR 11 Données techniques 13 IQ windowdrive Données techniques Entraînements de verrouillage Power lock Caractéristiques mécaniques Force de traction [N] 600 Force de pression [N] 600 Longueur de course [mm] (cf. plaque signalétique de l'entraînement) Course de ventilation standard * paramétrable max. 22 Vitesse de course [mm/sec.] * paramétrable Ouverture : 2* Ouvrir en cas d'alarme : … Fermeture : 2* Coupure de fin de course en sortie électronique, par capteur de déplacement int. Coupure de fin de course en rentrée électronique, par déplacement et charge Coupure de surcharge électrique, électronique par cons. de courant Poids [kg] Course / longueur entraînement [mm] 0,8 22 / 422 Niveau de pression acoustique Caractéristiques électriques <70 dB Tension [V DC] Ondulation résiduelle max. U_cc [%] 24 +/-25% SELV 20 Durée d'activation [%] 30 Fonctionnement courte durée [min] … Puissance consommée [W] max. 36 22 Consommation de courant mode ventila- 1,5 : 24 V DC tion [A] 1,5 : 18 V DC Consommation de courant mode alarme [A] FR 12 Température ambiante [°C] -5 / +70 Indice de protection [IP] / classe de protection Champ d'application Câble de raccordement Longueur de raccordement IP 42 / III Pièces sèches … x … mm² 2m, avec gaine en silicone IQ windowdrive Motorisations de fenêtres Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB 300 600 750 max. 200 (en fonction de la course) max. 600 (en fonction de la course) 750 300 - 800 600 - 1200 100 - 1000 300* 300* 100-1000* (en fonction de la course) Ouvrir pour ventilation : 5* Ouvrir pour ventilation : 5* Ouvrir en cas d'alarme : max. 15 Ouvrir en cas d'alarme : max. 15 Fermeture : 5* Fermeture : 5* Ouvrir pour ventilation : 5* Ouvrir en cas d'alarme : … (pour une course de 500 : 10) Fermeture : 5* électronique, par capteur de déplacement interne électronique, par déplacement et charge électrique, électronique par consommation de courant 1,1 - 1,5 300 / 498 500 / 598 800 / 748 2,2 - 3,0 600 / 693 800 / 793 1200 / 993 1,1 - 3,0 100 / 384 150 / 434 200 / 484 230 / 514 300 / 584 500 / 784 750 / 1034 1000 / 1284 <70 dB 24 +/-25% SELV 20 30 … 6 … max. 22 max. 36 max. 22 max. 27 (pour une course de 500) 0,9 : 24 V DC 1,1 : 18 V DC 1,2 : 24 V DC 1,5 : 18 V DC 0,9 : 24 V DC 1,1 : 24 V DC (pour une course de 500) 1,0 : 18 V DC 1,3 : 18 V DC (pour une course de 500) -5 / +70 IP 40 / III IP 40 / III IP 65 / III Pièces sèches (E 250 NT AB : zone extérieure protégée) … x … mm² 2m, avec gaine en silicone Sous réserve de modifications techniques! FR 13 IQ windowdrive Tabla de contenido … 2 Símbolos y medios de representación … Uso previsto … Grupo destinatario … Descripción del producto … 3 … Responsabilidad del producto … Indicaciones de seguridad … 5 … Indicaciones de montaje … Tendido de cables y conexión eléctrica … 7 … 9 10 11 12 13 Comprobación de la instalación montada … Puesta en marcha … Configurar el automatismo para el servicio sincronizado … Modos de funcionamiento … 10 Mantenimiento … 11 Eliminación de la instalación de la ventana … 11 Características técnicas … 12 … Indicaciones generales de seguridad … Trabajo y uso consciente con la seguridad … Conexión eléctrica en la ventana … Anexo: Recambio del cable de conexión en el accionamiento … A-I Modo de servicio ventilación/alarma … A-II Modo de servicio alarma permanente … A-III Modo de servicio ventilación sin función de alarma … A-IV/V Declaración CE de conformidad y Declaraciones de montaje … A-VI ES … IQ windowdrive … Símbolos y medios de representación Símbolos y medios de representación Avisos de advertencia En estas instrucciones se emplean avisos de advertencia, para advertirle ante posibles daños materiales y personales. X Lea y observe siempre estos avisos de advertencia. X Cumpla todas las medidas a tomar que están marcadas con el símbolo y el aviso de advertencia. Símbolo de advertencia Aviso PELIGRO Significado Riesgos para las personas. Su omisión puede provocar la muerte o lesiones graves.. Otros símbolos y medios de representación A fin de obtener un correcto manejo, las informaciones y las indicaciones técnicas importantes están especialmente realzadas. Símbolo Significado Significa “Indicación importante” Significa “Información adicional” X Símbolo para una acción: aquí usted debe hacer algo. X Mantenga el orden sucesivo en caso de varios pasos de acción. … Uso previsto … Grupo destinatario Este documento está destinado al personal cualificado formado y a las empresas explotadoras instruidas de sistemas eléctricos de ventilación y de extracción de humos y calor (RWA/NRA/NRWG) con los conocimientos correspondientes de los modos de funcionamiento y los riesgos potenciales del equipo. … Descripción del producto Los IQ windowdrive son motores de cadena (Slimchain, Powerchain) o pistones eléctricos (E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB) para la apertura y el cierre o el bloqueo electromotorizado (Power lock) de ventanas y fachadas en el ámbito de las fachadas inclinadas. Aptos para las siguientes aplicaciones: à hojas batientes, abatibles y giratorias con apertura hacia dentro y hacia fuera; à para la ventilación y la aireación diarias; ES … Responsabilidad del producto IQ windowdrive à para el uso como automatismo individual (automatismo sencillo) o a modo de montaje múltiple (automatismo sincronizado) en una ventana à Tensión de funcionamiento 24 V DC à para el uso en estancias secas en áreas interiores, a E 250 NT AB también en zonas exteriores protegidas. … Responsabilidad del producto à Se respetará la información contenida en este folleto y en las instrucciones de montaje correspondientes del producto (datos de productos y utilización según reglamento, uso incorrecto, rendimiento del producto, mantenimiento del producto, obligaciones sobre información e instrucción) conforme a la responsabilidad de productos del fabricante definida en la ley de responsabilidad de productos. El incumplimiento exime al fabricante de su responsabilidad. à El montaje, la comprobación del funcionamiento y el mantenimiento deben ser realizados únicamente por expertos autorizados por GEZE. Las modificaciones hechas por cuenta propia en la instalación excluyen a GEZE de toda responsabilidad por los daños resultantes. à En combinación con dispositivos de otro fabricante, GEZE no concede ninguna garantía. Utilizar también en los trabajos de reparación y de mantenimiento solamente piezas originales de GEZE. … Indicaciones de seguridad Para la seguridad de las personas es importante cumplir con estas instrucciones de seguridad. ¡Estas instrucciones se han de guardar! … Indicaciones generales de seguridad Conforme a la directiva de máquinas 2006/42/CE, antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del equipo se deberá llevar a cabo un análisis de riesgos y añadir el marcado CE al equipo conforme al anexo III de la directiva de máquinas CE. X Observar las directivas, normas y prescripciones específicas del país más recientes, en particular: à BGV A1 “Disposiciones para la prevención de accidentes, fundamentos de la prevención” à BGV A3 “Instalaciones eléctricas y medios de servicio” à ASR A1.6 “Ventanas, lucernarios, paredes transparentes” à VDE 0100, parte 600 “Levantamiento de instalaciones de baja intensidad parte 6. Comprobaciones” à DIN EN 60335-1 “Seguridad eléctrica de equipos para uso doméstico y fines semejantes - parte 1: Requisitos generales” à DIN EN 60335-2--103 “Seguridad eléctrica de equipos para uso doméstico y fines semejantes - parte 2--103: Requisitos especiales para automatismos, portales, puertas y ventanas” à El producto no está destinado al uso por niños o por personas con limita- ES … IQ windowdrive Indicaciones de seguridad ciones psíquicas, sensoriales o mentales o que carezcan de experiencia o conocimientos, a no ser que se encuentren bajo la supervisión de una persona encargada de la seguridad o que ésta les haya instruido acerca de cómo utilizar el producto. X No permitir jugar a los niños con dispositivos de regulación y/o de instalaciones de control fijas y mantener los telemandos fuera del alcance de los niños. X Mantenga alejada a toda persona, especialmente a los niños, si se acciona un conmutador con preajuste de apagado o si se cierra una ventana abierta mediante un sistema de extracción de humos y calor. X Asegúrese de que no es posible quedarse atrapado entre la pieza accionada y las piezas que la rodean debido al movimiento de cierre y apertura de la pieza accionada. à Si es necesario recambiar el cable de conexión de este equipo, esto sólo podrá ser efectuado por un electricista cualificado. Tener en cuenta durante el montaje: à En las ventanas basculantes, emplear un dispositivo de sujeción adecuado (por ejemplo un compás de seguridad GEZE nº 35) à Para la fijación sólo se pueden emplear consolas originales. à Para el montaje, emplear elementos de fijación adecuados. En las instrucciones de montaje encontrará las recomendaciones. Asegúrese de que los elementos de fijación en el perfil garantizan el soporte seguro de las piezas montadas. … Trabajo y uso consciente con la seguridad Impedir la entrada no autorizada al puesto de trabajo. Observar el ámbito de giro de los componentes de la instalación largos. X Antes de trabajar en los equipos eléctricos, interrumpa el suministro de tensión y compruebe que éste está desconectado. Al utilizar sistema de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI), la instalación está también bajo tensión con liberación de la conexión de red. X Accionar los automatismos durante el montaje sólo en el modo de teclado. à Riesgo de lesiones con el accionamiento abierto mediante componentes en movimiento (arrastre de cabellos, prendas de vestir, etc.) à Riesgo de lesiones en lugares de aplastamiento, impacto, cizallamiento y arrastre no asegurados. à Riesgo de lesiones por rotura de vidrio. à La manipulación de las ventanas durante el servicio puede provocar lesiones. X X ES … Indicaciones de montaje … IQ windowdrive Indicaciones de montaje El montaje incorrecto puede provocar graves lesiones, por ello, observe las siguientes indicaciones: à El automatismo está destinado al montaje en ventanas con una altura de ≥ 2,5 m sobre el nivel de acceso. à Según las normas o reglas mencionadas anteriormente, la velocidad de cierre debe ser inferior a … mm/sec si no se han tomado más medidas de protección en la ventana o si la ventana está instalada a menos de 2,5 m de altura (véase al respecto S.6 ASR A1.6). Nuestros automatismos están ajustados de fábrica a esta velocidad. à En caso de alturas constructivas inferiores a 2,5 m sobre el nivel de acceso, observe lo siguiente: à Deberá emplearse un conmutador con ajuste previo de apagado (pulsador). à El elemento de activación de los interruptores con preajuste de apagado debe estar ubicado a la vista de la ventana, pero retirado de las piezas móviles. En caso de uso del contacto llave, deberá ubicarse el elemento de activación a una altura de mínimo 1,5 m y en un lugar no accesible para el público. à Según EN 60335-2-103 apdo. … , con alturas inferiores a 2,5 msobre el nivel de acceso, sólo se puede ajustar un recorrido de ≤200 mm. X Lea y observe los datos en las instrucciones de montaje y conserve éstas para su uso futuro. Todas las medidas deberán ser verificadas durante el montaje bajo su propia responsabilidad. à El automatismo está destinado exclusivamente al uso en estancias secas (en E 250 NT AB también en áreas exteriores protegidas) y no debe ser expuesto a un entorno con alto riesgo de corrosión (por ejemplo aire de mar). X Para evitar lesiones, se deberán emplear tapones protectores sobre las roscas sobrantes de los tornillos de fijación. X Compruebe si se cumplen las condiciones indicadas en la placa de características del automatismo, como por ejemplo temperatura ambiente y datos eléctricos en el lugar de instalación previsto. X Antes del montaje, compruebe si la pieza accionada presenta un buen estado mecánico, si su peso está equilibrado y se puede cerrar fácilmente. X ES … „Tenga en cuenta que la certificación sólo es válida si el control de los productos cumple los requisitos de la SKGIKOB - AE 3104 aplicable.“ IQ windowdrive … Tendido de cables y conexión eléctrica Tendido de cables y conexión eléctrica Utilice sólo los cables que se indican en el diagrama de conexiones. Ejecutar el tipo de cable, la longitud y la sección del cable conforme a los datos técnicos. X Para los cordones, se deberán emplear fundamentalmente terminales eléctrico. X Aislar los conductores sin utilizar. X Con 24 V DC y un cable largo, éste debe presentar una sección transversal lo suficientemente grande para evitar una caída de la tensión. Calcular la sección transversal ¡(véase esquema eléctrico para las centralitas RWA)! … Conexión eléctrica en la ventana PELIGRO Peligro de muerte mediante descarga de corriente. X Antes de trabajar en el equipo eléctrico, interrumpa el suministro de tensión, protéjale ante la reconexión y compruebe que éste está desconectado. X Observe los diagramas de conexión respectivos (A-II hasta A-V) en el anexo de este documento. Montar los automatismos conforme al tipo de montaje seleccionado (véanse instrucciones de montaje) en la ventana. X En el modo sincronizado y en el modo con todos los cerrojos adicionales, conecte todos los automatismos de una ventana en la toma de conexión. X Véase A-I El cable de conexión del automatismo se puede sustituir en caso de avería. Para ello, observe la hoja de indicaciones respectiva (A-I) en el anexo de este documento. El recambio sólo está permitido por parte de un electricista cualificado. ES … Comprobación de la instalación montada … IQ windowdrive Comprobación de la instalación montada à Las medidas para protegerse o evitar lugares de aplastamiento, impacto, cizallamiento y arrastre deberán realizarse y comprobarse especialmente en las zonas de riesgo de menos de 2,5 m. Una medida es por ejemplo el empleo de un conmutador con preajuste de desconexión (p.ej. interruptor del ventilador GEZE LTA-LSA ID 118476). Para proteger a los niños o las personas con discernimiento limitado se debe emplear un contacto llave con preajuste de desconexión (p.ej. GEZE ID 117996 para SCT, ID 090176 para cilindros). El elemento de activación de los interruptores con preajuste de apagado debe estar ubicado a la vista de la ventana, pero retirado de las piezas móviles. En caso de uso del contacto llave, deberá ubicarse el elemento de activación a una altura de mínimo 1,5 m y en un lugar no accesible para el público. X Tras la instalación se deberá comprobar que el equipo está ajustado correctamente y funciona a la perfección y sin riesgos. X Comprobar todas las funciones mediante la marcha de prueba. à Tras la fabricación, el usuario final deberá estar instruido en todos los pasos de mando importantes. … Puesta en marcha Al aplicar la tensión de servicio por primera vez, el automatismo se puede accionar tanto en dirección “ABIERTA” como en dirección “CERRADA” (24V A = +24V, 24V B = GND). El automatismo detecta la posición de cierre de la ventana automáticamente en el primer cierre y la guarda. Observe que no haya ningún obstáculo. Si el automatismo se invierte al alcanzar la posición de cierre (el automatismo abre aprox. 15 mm), se debe iniciar una marcha de puesta en servicio. Para ello, proceda del siguiente modo: X Abra la ventana mín. 100 mm. X Accionar el conmutador para cerrar la ventana (la ventana comienza a cerrarse). X Conectar los cables “B” y “L” durante al menos … segundos. X Desconectar de nuevo los cables “B” y “L”. Ahora se realiza una nueva puesta en marcha. En los sistemas sincronizados se inicia la marcha de puesta en servicio junto con todos los automatismos. El automatismo se puede parametrizar con el maletín de puesta en marcha (ID 142586) y el dispositivo de programación ST 220 (ID 087261). Para más información, consulte las instrucciones para el maletín de puesta en marcha. ES … IQ windowdrive … Configurar el automatismo para el servicio sincronizado Configurar el automatismo para el servicio sincronizado Por cada ventana se pueden conectar como máximos … automatismos de ventana y hasta … cerrojos adicionales. Todos los automatismos están configurados de serie de forma independiente. Por tanto, en el modo sincronizado se deberá configurar de nuevo cada automatismo conforme a su uso en la ventana. FA VA Slimchain, Powerchain X Automatismo para ventanas (E 250 NT, Slimchain, ­Powerchain) Cerrojo adicional (Power lock) Power lock E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB Ajustar el número de esclavos en el maestro y direccionar los esclavos. DIP (FA) … 2 … Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT E 250 NT AB OFF OFF OFF (4) Automatismo maestro SOLO OFF ON ON MASTER OFF ON OFF MASTER SLAVE SLAVE OFF OFF ON MASTER SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE … 2 … ON ON ON MASTER ON ON OFF MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … ON OFF ON MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … SLAVE (4) Automatismo esclavo - SLAVE … DIP (VA) … 2 … Power lock ON ON OFF VA … VA … ON OFF ON VA … VA … SLAVE … Cerrojo adicional ES … Modos de funcionamiento IQ windowdrive à Cada dirección del automatismo sólo se puede asignar una vez por cada ventana. à Importante para sistema de herraje RWA 105 NT: El conmutador DIP … en E 250 NT está diseñado para el ajuste del sentido de la marcha, DIP4= OFF Ò Ventana ABIERTA = Extender husillo (estado normal), DIP4= ON ÒVentana ABIERTA = Recoger husillo o ventana CERRADA = Husillo extendido (sistema de herraje RWA 105 NT). En el caso de los automatismos que operan en el modo sincronizado, la configuración del DIP … en ambos automatismos deberá ser idéntica. 10 Modos de funcionamiento Véase A-II Modo de funcionamiento Ventilación/alarma/ Accionamiento mediante el relé de la alarma à En caso de ventilación: el automatismo se abre con velocidad de ventilación hasta el recorrido de ventilación à En caso de alarma: el automatismo se abre con velocidad de alarma hasta  el recorrido de alarma à Diferentes recorridos para la ventilación y la alarma. Modo de servicio permanente de la alarma El automatismo se abre siempre con velocidad de la alarma hasta el recorrido de la alarma. Véase A-III Modo de servicio ventilación sin función de alarma El automatismo se abre siempre con velocidad de ventilación hasta el tipo de ventilación configurado. Véase A-IV, A-V En los motores de cadena, la carrera de ventilación está configurada a 300 mm. Con la ayuda del maletín de puesta en marcha y del dispositivo de programación ST220, se puede parametrar la carrera de ventilación. ES 10 IQ windowdrive 11 Mantenimiento Mantenimiento GEZE prescribe un mantenimiento periódico (al menos una vez al año). Éste será ejecutado por un experto. En este caso deberá comprobarse tanto el funcionamiento como el estado del sistema mecánico (desequilibrio o indicios de desgaste, daños en las piezas de fijación) y de las conexiones eléctricas, así como los sistemas de seguridad (conexión de IQ box Safety y sensores, así como de su área de detección), si está disponible. Durante los trabajos de reparación y ajuste no se podrá utilizar el equipo. X Antes de comenzar las tareas de mantenimiento, interrumpa el suministro de tensión (24 V DC), prótejalo ante la reconexión y compruebe la ausencia de tensión. X Comprobar el asiento firme de las fijaciones y los tornillos de fijación. X Para el mantenimiento, elimine las impurezas del automatismo. Atención: ¡Riesgo de apriete y aplastamiento! ¡La ventana se cierra automáticamente! Antes del montaje, ¡lea las indicaciones de seguridad y téngalas en cuenta durante el montaje y el servicio del automatismo! Los derechos de garantía exigen un montaje autorizado, la instalación y el mantenimiento conforme a los datos del fabricante. X X 12 Para la información del electricista, entréguele este diagrama de conexiones. El automatismo deberá ser protegido ante la suciedad de la obra y los chorros de agua. Eliminación de la instalación de la ventana La instalación de la ventana consta de materiales que deberán llevarse al reciclaje. Con este fin se tienen que clasificar los componentes sueltos según su tipo de material. à Aluminio (perfiles) à Hierro (tornillos, cadena,...) à PVC à Componentes electrónicos (motor, control, transformador, relé, ...) à Cables X Desechar las piezas conforme a las disposiciones legales. ES 11 Características técnicas 13 IQ windowdrive Características técnicas Cerrojos adicionales Power lock Datos mecánicos Fuerza de tracción [N] 600 Fuerza de compresión [N] 600 Longitud del recorrido [mm] (véase placa de características automatismo) máx. 22 Carrera de ventilación estándar * parametrizable 22 Velocidad de carrera [mm/seg.] * parametrizable Apertura: 2* Apertura alarma: … Cierre: 2* Desconexión de fin de carrera extendida electrónico mediante sensor de movimiento int. desconexión de fin de carrera recogida electrónico mediante trayecto y carga Desconexión de sobrecarga eléctrico, electrónico o por consumo eléctrico Peso [kg] 0,8 Recorrido / Longitud accionamiento [mm] 22 / 422 Nivel de presión acústica de emisión <70 dB Datos eléctricos ES 12 Tensión [V DC] 24 +/-25% SELV máx. ondulación residual U_ss [%] 20 Ciclo de trabajo [%] 30 Servicio breve [min] … Consumo de potencia [W] máx. 36 Consumo eléctrico modo de ventilación [A] Consumo eléctrico modo de alarma [A] 1,5: 24V DC 1,5: 18V DC Temperatura ambiente [°C] -5 / +70 Tipo de protección [IP] / Clase de protección IP 42 / III Áreas de aplicación Estancias secas Cable de conexión … x 0,75 mm² Longitud de conexión … m, revestimiento de silicona IQ windowdrive Accionamiento de la ventana Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB 300 600 750 máx. 200 (dependiendo del recorrido) máx. 600 (dependiendo del recorrido) 750 300 - 800 600 - 1200 100 - 1000 300* 300* 100-1000* (dependiendo del recorrido) Apertura ventilación: 5* Apertura alarma: máx. 15 Cierre: 5* Apertura ventilación: 5* Apertura alarma: máx. 15 Cierre: 5* Apertura ventilación: 5* Apertura alarma: … (con un recorrido 500: 10) Cierre: 5* electrónico mediante sensor de desplazamiento interno electrónico mediante trayecto y carga eléctrica, electrónica mediante consumo eléctrico 1,1 - 1,5 2,2 - 3,0 1,1 - 3,0 300 / 498 500 / 598 800 / 748 600 / 693 800 / 793 1200 / 993 100 / 384 150 / 434 200 / 484 230 / 514 300 / 584 500 / 784 750 / 1034 1000 / 1284 <70 dB 24 +/-25% SELV 20 30 … 6 … máx. 22 máx. 36 máx. 22 máx. 27 (en el recorrido 500) 0,9: 24V DC 1,1: 18V DC 1,2: 24V DC 1,5: 18V DC 0,9: 24V DC 1,1: 24V DC (con un recorrido 500) 1,0: 18V DC 1,3: 18V DC (con un recorrido 500) IP 40 / III IP 40 / III -5 / +70 IP 65 / III Estancias secas (E 250 NT AB: zona exterior protegida) … x 0,75 mm² … m, revestimiento de silicona ¡Reservadas las modificaciones técnicas! ES 13 IQ windowdrive Spis treści … 2 Symbole i oznaczenia … Zastosowanie zgodne z przeznaczeniem … Grupa docelowa … Opis produktu … 3 … Odpowiedzialność cywilna za produkt … Wskazówki bezpieczeństwa … 5 … Wskazówki dotyczące montażu … Układanie przewodów i podłączenie do sieci elektrycznej … 7 … 9 10 11 12 13 Kontrola zamontowanej instalacji … Uruchomienie … Konfiguracja trybu syncro … Tryby pracy … 10 Konserwacja … 11 Utylizacja instalacji okiennej … 11 Dane techniczne … 12 … Ogólne zasady bezpieczeństwa … Praca i eksploatacja ze świadomością bezpieczeństwa … Podłączenie elektryczne przy oknie … Aneks: Wymiana przewodu przyłączeniowego napędu … A-I Tryb pracy przewietrzanie/alarm … A-II Ciągły tryb alarmowy … A-III Tryb pracy przewietrzanie bez funkcji alarmu … A-IV/V Deklaracje zgodności WE i włączenia … A-VI PL … IQ windowdrive … Symbole i oznaczenia Symbole i oznaczenia Wskazówki ostrzegawcze Niniejsza instrukcja zawiera ostrzeżenia informujące o szkodach materialnych i zagrożeniach dla ludzi. X Należy przeczytać te ostrzeżenia i zawsze je stosować. X Należy postępować zgodnie ze wszystkimi zaleceniami oznaczonymi symbolem i hasłem ostrzegawczym. Symbol Hasło ostrzegawcze ostrzegawczy NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO Znaczenie Niebezpieczeństwa dla ludzi. Nieprzestrzeganie prowadzi do śmierci lub ciężkich obrażeń ciała. Inne symbole i oznaczenia graficzne Aby zapewnić prawidłową obsługę, ważne informacje i wskazówki techniczne są wyraźnie wyeksponowane. Symbol Znaczenie „Ważna wskazówka” „Dodatkowa informacja” X Symbol czynności: należy wykonać określoną czynność. X W przypadku kilku czynności do wykonania należy zachować podaną kolejność. … Zastosowanie zgodne z przeznaczeniem … Grupa docelowa Niniejszy dokument jest skierowany do przeszkolonego personelu specjalistycznego i poinstruowanych użytkowników instalacji wentylacji, urządzeń do usuwania dymu i ciepła (RWA/NRA/NRWG), którzy posiadają odpowiednią wiedzę na temat trybów pracy i potencjalnych zagrożeń instalacji. … Opis produktu IQ windowdrive to elektryczne napędy łańcuchowe (Slimchain, Powerchain) lub elektryczne napędy wrzecionowe (E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB) do elektromotorycznego otwierania i zamykania lub blokowania (Power lock) okien w fasadach i pochyłych fasadach. Nadają się do następujących zastosowań: à otwierane do wewnątrz i na zewnątrz skrzydła uchylne górą, uchylne dołem i rozwierne; à do codziennego napowietrzania i odpowietrzania; PL … Odpowiedzialność cywilna za produkt IQ windowdrive à do stosowania jako napęd indywidualny (napęd solo) lub montażu wielokrotnego (napędy syncro) przy oknie; à napięcie robocze 24 V DC; à do stosowania w suchych pomieszczeniach w obszarze wewnętrznym, w przypadku E 250 NT AB także w chronionym obszarze zewnętrznym. … Odpowiedzialność cywilna za produkt à Zgodnie z odpowiedzialnością producenta za swoje produkty opisaną w ustawie o odpowiedzialności za produkt należy przestrzegać informacji zawartych w tej broszurze i odpowiednich instrukcjach montażu (informacji o produkcie i użytkowaniu zgodnym z przeznaczeniem, niewłaściwym użyciu, wydajności produktu, konserwacji produktu, obowiązkach informacyjnych i instruktażowych). Nieprzestrzeganie powyższych informacji zwalnia producenta z odpowiedzialności. à Montaż, kontrolę działania i konserwację mogą wykonywać wyłącznie specjaliści autoryzowani przez firmę GEZE. Samowolne modyfikacje urządzenia wykluczają wszelką odpowiedzialność firmy GEZE za powstałe szkody. à W przypadku łączenia z urządzeniami innych producentów firma GEZE nie udziela gwarancji. Również do napraw i prac konserwacyjnych wolno stosować wyłącznie oryginalne części firmy GEZE. … Wskazówki bezpieczeństwa W celu zapewnienia bezpieczeństwa osób należy przestrzegać przedstawionych zasad bezpieczeństwa. Instrukcje te należy zachować! … Ogólne zasady bezpieczeństwa Zgodnie z dyrektywą maszynową 2006/42/WE przed uruchomieniem urządzenia należy wykonać analizę zagrożeń, a urządzenie opatrzyć znakiem CE zgodnie z załącznikiem III dyrektywy maszynowej WE. X Należy przestrzegać wytycznych, norm i przepisów krajowych w ich aktualnie obowiązującej wersji, ze szczególnym uwzględnieniem następujących dokumentów: à BGV A1 „Przepisy o zapobieganiu nieszczęśliwym wypadkom, zasady prewencji” à BGV A3 „Elektryczne instalacje i środki robocze” à ASR A1.6 „Okna, naświetla, ściany przepuszczające światło” à VDE 0100, część 600 „Wykonywanie instalacji niskiego napięcia – cz. 6. Badania” à DIN EN 60335-1 „Elektryczny sprzęt do użytku domowego i podobnego – Bezpieczeństwo użytkowania – część 1: Wymagania ogólne” à DIN EN 60335-2-103 „Bezpieczeństwo elektrycznych przyrządów do użytku domowego i podobnego – część 2-103: Wymagania szczegółowe dotyczące napędów bram, drzwi i okien” à Produkt nie może być używany przez osoby, w tym dzieci, o ograniczo- PL … IQ windowdrive Wskazówki bezpieczeństwa nych możliwościach fizycznych, sensorycznych lub intelektualnych bądź nieposiadające doświadczenia i/lub wiedzy, chyba że są one nadzorowane przez osobę odpowiedzialną za ich bezpieczeństwo lub zostały poinstruowane w zakresie stosowania produktu. X Nie wolno pozwalać dzieciom na zabawę zamontowanymi na stałe urządzeniami regulującymi i/lub sterującymi. Piloty zdalnego sterowania trzymać poza zasięgiem dzieci. X Nie pozwalać na zbliżanie się osób, w tym dzieci, jeśli załączony jest przełącznik ze wstępnym ustawieniem wyłączenia lub gdy zamyka się okno, które zostało otwarte przez system do usuwania dymu i ciepła. X Upewnić się, że nie zachodzi ryzyko zakleszczenia między elementem napędzanym a elementami otaczającymi go podczas zamykania i otwierania elementu napędzanego. à Wymianę przewodu przyłączeniowego tego urządzenia może wykonać wyłącznie wykwalifikowany elektryk. Podczas montażu pamiętać o następujących zasadach: à Do okien uchylnych górą stosować odpowiednie zabezpieczenie przed opadnięciem (np. nożyce zabezpieczające GEZE nr 35). à Do zamocowania wolno stosować wyłącznie oryginalne konsole. à Do montażu używać odpowiednich elementów mocujących. Zalecenia znajdują się w instrukcjach montażu. Upewnić się, że elementy mocujące w profilu zapewniają stabilne osadzenie zamontowanych części. … Praca i eksploatacja ze świadomością bezpieczeństwa Zabezpieczyć miejsce pracy przed dostępem osób nieuprawnionych. Zwracać uwagę na drogę ruchu długich części urządzenia. X Przed rozpoczęciem prac przy instalacji elektrycznej odłączyć zasilanie i sprawdzić, czy faktycznie zostało odłączone. W przypadku stosowania zasilacza awaryjnego (UPS) system znajduje się pod napięciem nawet po odłączeniu go od zasilania sieciowego. X Podczas regulacji sterować napędami wyłącznie w trybie samopowrotu. à Niebezpieczeństwo obrażeń fizycznych przy otwartym napędzie z powodu poruszających się części (wciągnięcie włosów, części ubrań itd.). à Niebezpieczeństwo obrażeń w niezabezpieczonych miejscach grożących zgnieceniem, uderzeniem, obcięciem lub wciągnięciem. à Niebezpieczeństwo obrażeń na skutek pęknięcia szkła. à Dotykanie instalacji okiennej podczas eksploatacji może prowadzić do obrażeń ciała. X X PL … Wskazówki dotyczące montażu … IQ windowdrive Wskazówki dotyczące montażu Nieprawidłowy montaż może prowadzić do poważnych obrażeń ciała, dlatego należy przestrzegać poniższych instrukcji: à Napęd jest przeznaczony do montażu przy oknach na wysokości ≥ 2,5 m nad poziomem dostępu. à Zgodnie z wyżej wymienionymi normami/regulacjami prędkość zamykania musi być mniejsza niż … mm/s, jeżeli nie zastosowano w oknie żadnych dodatkowych zabezpieczeń lub jeżeli okno jest zamontowane na wysokości poniżej 2,5 m (patrz str. … ASR A1.6). Napędy GEZE są fabrycznie ustawione na taką prędkość. à W przypadku wysokości montażu powyżej 2,5 m nad poziomem dostępu przestrzegać poniższych zasad: à Zastosować przełącznik ze wstępnym ustawieniem wyłączenia (przycisk). à Element uruchamiający przełączników ze wstępnym ustawieniem wyłączenia musi być umieszczony w bezpośrednim polu widzenia okna, ale z dala od części ruchomych. Jeżeli nie stosuje się przełącznika kluczykowego, element uruchamiający powinien znajdować się na wysokości co najmniej 1,5 m i być niedostępny dla osób postronnych. à Zgodnie z normą EN60335-2-103 punkt … w przypadku wysokości montażu poniżej 2,5 m nad poziomem dostępu wolno ustawić tylko skok ≤ 200 mm. X Przeczytać informacje zawarte w instrukcji montażu i przestrzegać ich. Instrukcję zachować do późniejszego użytku. Sprawdzić samodzielnie wszystkie wymiary na miejscu montażu. à Napęd przeznaczony jest do użytku wyłącznie w suchych pomieszczeniach (w przypadku E 250 NT AB także w chronionym obszarze zewnętrznym). Nie eksploatować napędu w środowisku zagrażającym korozją (np. powietrze morskie, okolice jezior). X Aby uniknąć obrażeń, na wystające gwinty śrub mocujących należy założyć nasadki ochronne. X Sprawdzić, czy w przewidzianym miejscu montażu spełnione są warunki podane na tabliczce znamionowej napędu, np. temperatura otoczenia i parametry elektryczne. X Przed zamontowaniem sprawdzić, czy element napędzany jest sprawny mechanicznie, odpowiednio wyważony i łatwo się zamyka. X PL … „Należy pamiętać, że certyfikacja jest ważna tylko wtedy, gdy kontrola produktów jest zgodna z wymaganiami obowiązującego SKG-IKOB - AE 3104.” IQ windowdrive … Układanie przewodów i podłączenie do sieci elektrycznej Układanie przewodów i podłączenie do sieci elektrycznej Używać wyłącznie przewodów podanych na schemacie połączeń. Rodzaj kabla, długość i przekrój przewodu muszą być zgodne z danymi technicznymi. X Do kabli splatanych używać zawsze tulejek do końcówek żył. X Zaizolować niewykorzystane żyły przewodów. X W przypadku zasilania 24 V DC i dłuższego przewodu zasilającego użyć kabla o odpowiednio dużym przekroju, co pozwala zapobiec spadkowi napięcia. Obliczyć przekrój (patrz schemat okablowania central oddymiania)! … Podłączenie elektryczne przy oknie ZAGROŻENIE Niebezpieczeństwo śmiertelnego porażenia prądem. X Przed rozpoczęciem prac przy instalacji elektrycznej odłączyć dopływ napięcia, zabezpieczyć przed ponownym włączeniem i sprawdzić, czy na pewno nie ma napięcia. X Przestrzegać odpowiednich schematów połączeń (A-II do A-V) załączonych do dokumentacji. Napędy przylegające zamontować na oknie zgodnie z wybranym rodzajem montażu (patrz instrukcja montażu). X W przypadku pracy synchronicznej oraz pracy z siłownikami ryglującymi wszystkie napędy jednego okna należy połączyć w puszce przyłączeniowej. X Patrz A-I W przypadku uszkodzenia przewód zasilający napędu można wymienić. Przestrzegać przy tym wskazówek zamieszczonych w odpowiednim arkuszu (A-I), załączonym do tej dokumentacji. Wymianę może wykonać tylko wykwalifikowany elektryk. PL … Kontrola zamontowanej instalacji … IQ windowdrive Kontrola zamontowanej instalacji à Zamontować i sprawdzić zabezpieczenia miejsc grożących przygnieceniem, uderzeniem, odcięciem lub wciągnięciem, w szczególności na wysokości poniżej 2,5 m. Jednym z zabezpieczeń jest np. użycie przełącznika ze wstępnym ustawieniem wyłączenia (np. przycisk przewietrzania GEZE LTA-LSA ID 118476). W przypadku dzieci i osób z ograniczoną zdolnością oceny należy stosować przełącznik kluczykowy ze wstępnym ustawieniem wyłączenia (np. GEZE ID 117996 dla SCT, 090176 dla wkładki bębenkowej). Element uruchamiający przełączników ze wstępnym ustawieniem wyłączenia musi być umieszczony w bezpośrednim polu widzenia okna, ale z dala od części ruchomych. Jeżeli nie stosuje się przełącznika kluczykowego, element uruchamiający powinien znajdować się na wysokości co najmniej 1,5 m i być niedostępny dla osób postronnych. X Po zakończeniu instalacji sprawdzić prawidłowe ustawienie i bezpieczne działanie instalacji. X Sprawdzić wszystkie funkcje podczas biegu próbnego. à Po zakończeniu użytkownik końcowy musi zostać poinstruowany w zakresie wszystkich ważnych kroków obsługi. … Uruchomienie Przy pierwszym podłączeniu napięcia zasilającego napędu można używać zarówno w kierunku „OTW.”, jak i „ZAM.” (24 V A = +24 V, 24 V B = GND). Napęd rozpoznaje automatycznie położenie zamknięte okna i zapisuje je w pamięci. Należy zwracać uwagę na to, aby nie występowały przeszkody. Jeżeli po osiągnięciu położenia zamkniętego ma nastąpić zmiana kierunku pracy napędu (otwarcie napędu o ok. 15 mm), należy uruchomić przebieg uruchomieniowy. W tym celu należy: X Otworzyć okno na min. 100 mm. X Uruchomić przełącznik w celu zamknięcia okna (okno zaczyna się zamykać). X Przewody „B” i „L” złączyć na min. … sekund. X Ponownie rozłączyć przewody „B” i „L”. Rozpocznie się ponowny przebieg uruchomieniowy. W systemach synchronicznych przebieg uruchomieniowy uruchamiany jest wspólnie ze wszystkimi napędami. Napęd może być sparametryzowany za pomocą walizki serwisowej (ID 142586) i programatora ST 220 (ID 087261). Więcej informacji na ten temat znaleźć można w instrukcji walizki serwisowej. PL … IQ windowdrive … Konfiguracja trybu syncro Konfiguracja trybu syncro Do każdego okna można podłączyć maksymalnie … napędy okienne oraz … siłowniki ryglujące. Standardowo wszystkie napędy są skonfigurowane do pracy niezależnej („solo“). Dlatego w przypadku trybu syncro każdy napęd należy przed zamontowaniem ponownie skonfigurować zgodnie z jego przeznaczeniem na oknie. FA VA Slimchain, Powerchain X napęd okienny (E 250 NT, S­ limchain, Powerchain) siłownik ryglujący (Power lock) Power lock E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB Ustalić liczbę napędów typu slave współpracujących z napędem typu master i przypisać adresy do napędów typu slave. DIP (FA) … 2 … Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT E 250 NT AB Wył. Wył. Wył. (4) Napęd typu master SOLO Wył. Wł. Wł. MASTER Wył. Wł. Wył. MASTER SLAVE SLAVE Wył. Wył. Wł. MASTER SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE … 2 … (4) Napęd typu slave Wł. Wł. Wł. MASTER Wł. Wł. Wył. MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … Wł. Wył. Wł. MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … - SLAVE SLAVE … DIP (VA) … 2 … Power lock Wł. Wł. Wył. VA … VA … Wł. Wył. Wł. VA … VA … SLAVE … Siłownik ryglujący PL … Tryby pracy IQ windowdrive à Każdy adres napędu można przyporządkować dla danego okna tylko raz. à Ważne dla systemu okuć RWA 105 NT: Przełącznik DIP … w E 250 NT służy do ustawiania kierunku pracy, DIP4 = WYŁ. Ò Okno OTW. = wysuwanie wrzeciona (stan normalny), DIP4 = WŁ. Ò Okno OTW. = wsuwanie wrzeciona lub okno ZAM. = wrzeciono wysunięte (system okuć RWA 105 NT). W napędach pracujących synchronicznie należy w obu napędach ustawić DIP … jednakowo. 10 Tryby pracy Patrz A-II Tryb pracy wentylacja / alarm / sterowanie przez przekaźnik alarmowy à W przypadku wentylacji: napęd otwiera okno z prędkością dla trybu wentylacji na szerokość otwarcia wentylacyjnego à W przypadku alarmu: napęd otwiera okno z prędkością dla trybu alarmu na szerokość otwarcia alarmowego à Można ustawić różne szerokości otwarcia dla wentylacji i alarmu. Tryb pracy – ciągły tryb alarmowy Napęd zawsze otwiera okno z prędkością dla trybu alarmowego na szerokość otwarcia alarmowego Patrz A-III Tryb pracy – wentylacja bez funkcji alarmu Napęd zawsze otwiera okno z prędkością dla trybu wentylacji na ustawioną szerokość otwarcia wentylacyjnego. Patrz A-IV, A-V W przypadku napędów łańcuchowych szerokość otwarcia wentylacyjnego ustawić na 300 mm. Za pomocą walizki serwisowej i programatora ST 220 można dokonać parametryzacji szerokości otwarcia wentylacyjnego. PL 10 IQ windowdrive 11 Konserwacja Konserwacja GEZE zaleca regularną konserwację (co najmniej raz w roku). Musi ją przeprowadzać specjalista. Należy sprawdzić działanie oraz stan mechaniki (niewyważenie lub oznaki zużycia, uszkodzenia części mocujących) i połączeń elektrycznych, jak również systemów bezpieczeństwa (podłączenie IQ box Safety i czujników oraz ich obszar detekcji), jeśli dotyczy. Podczas napraw i regulacji nie wolno użytkować instalacji. X Przed rozpoczęciem prac konserwacyjnych przerwać dopływ napięcia (24 V DC), zabezpieczyć przed ponownym włączeniem i sprawdzić, czy na pewno nie występuje napięcie. X Sprawdzić osadzenie zamocowań i śrub mocujących. X Podczas konserwacji oczyścić napęd. Uwaga: niebezpieczeństwo zmiażdżenia i przytrzaśnięcia! Okno zamyka się automatycznie! Przed montażem przeczytać dołączone zasady bezpieczeństwa i przestrzegać ich podczas montażu i eksploatacji napędu! Gwarancja producenta jest ważna pod warunkiem prawidłowego montażu, instalacji i konserwacji przeprowadzonych zgodnie z wytycznymi producenta. X X 12 Celem poinformowania elektryka przekazać mu ten schemat połączeń. Zabezpieczyć napęd przed zanieczyszczeniami montażowymi i strumieniami wody. Utylizacja instalacji okiennej Instalacja okienna składa się z materiałów, które należy doprowadzić do ponownego wykorzystania. Poszczególne komponenty należy posortować według rodzaju materiału. à aluminium (profile) à żelazo (śruby, łańcuch, ...) à tworzywo sztuczne à części elektroniczne (silnik, sterownik, transformator, przekaźniki, ...) à kable X Części należy zutylizować zgodnie z przepisami prawa. PL 11 Dane techniczne 13 IQ windowdrive Dane techniczne Siłowniki ryglujące Power lock Dane mechaniczne Siła ciągnąca [N] 600 Siła pchająca [N] 600 Długość skoku [mm] (patrz tabliczka znamionowa maks. 22 napędu) Standardowa szerokość otwarcia wentylacyjnego 22 * parametryzowalna Prędkość skoku [mm/s] * parametryzowalna Otwieranie: 2* Otwieranie alarmowe: … Zamykanie: 2* Wyłączenie w pozycji krańcowej wysuniętej elektronicznie przez wewn. czujnik drogi Wyłączenie w pozycji krańcowej wsuniętej elektronicznie za pomocą drogi i przeciążenia Wyłączenie obciążenia elektrycznie, elektronicznie poprzez pobór prądu Masa [kg] 0,8 Skok / długość napędu [mm] 22 / 422 Poziom ciśnienia akustycznego emisji < 70 dB Dane elektryczne PL 12 Napięcie [V DC] 24 +/-25% SELV Maks. tętnienie resztkowe U_ss [%] 20 Czas włączenia [%] 30 Tryb krótkotrwały [min] … Pobór mocy [W] maks. 36 Pobór prądu w trybie wentylacji [A] Pobór prądu w trybie alarmowym [A] 1,5: 24 V DC 1,5: 18 V DC Temperatura otoczenia [°C] -5 / +70 Stopień ochrony [IP] / klasa ochrony IP 42 / III Zakres stosowania pomieszczenia suche Przewód przyłączeniowy … x 0,75 mm² Długość przewodu zasilającego … m, w izolacji silikonowej IQ windowdrive Napędy okienne Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB 300 600 750 maks. 200 (zależnie od skoku) maks. 600 (zależnie od skoku) 750 300–800 600–1200 100–1000 300* 300* 100–1000* (zależnie od skoku) Otwieranie wentylacyjne: 5* Otwieranie alarmowe: maks. 15 Zamykanie: 5* Otwieranie wentylacyjne: 5* Otwieranie alarmowe: maks. 15 Zamykanie: 5* Otwieranie wentylacyjne: 5* Otwieranie alarmowe: … (przy skoku 500: 10) Zamykanie: 5* elektronicznie przez wewnętrzny czujnik drogi elektronicznie za pomocą drogi i przeciążenia elektrycznie, elektronicznie poprzez pobór prądu 1,1–1,5 2,2–3,0 1,1–3,0 300 / 498 500 / 598 800 / 748 600 / 693 800 / 793 1200 / 993 100 / 384 150 / 434 200 / 484 230 / 514 300 / 584 500 / 784 750 / 1034 1000 / 1284 < 70 dB 24 +/-25% SELV 20 30 … 6 … maks. 22 maks. 36 maks. 22 maks. 27 (przy skoku 500) 0,9: 24 V DC 1,1: 18 V DC 1,2: 24 V DC 1,5: 18 V DC 0,9: 24 V DC 1,1: 24 V DC (przy skoku 500) 1,0: 18 V DC 1,3: 18 V DC (przy skoku 500) IP 40 / III IP 40 / III -5 / +70 IP 65 / III pomieszczenia suche ( E 250 NT AB: chroniony obszar zewnętrzny) … x 0,75 mm² … m, w izolacji silikonowej Zmiany techniczne zastrzeżone! PL 13 IQ windowdrive Содержание … 2 Символы и условные обозначения … Использование по назначению … Целевая группа … Описание изделия … 3 … Ответственность производителя за изделие … Инструкции по технике безопасности … 5 … Указания по монтажу … Прокладка проводов и электрическое подключение … 7 … 9 10 11 12 13 Проверка установленной системы … Ввод в эксплуатацию … Конфигурация привода для синхронного режима … Режимы работы … 10 Техобслуживание … 11 Утилизация оконной системы … 11 Технические характеристики … 12 … Общие указания по технике безопасности … Безопасные работа и использование … Электрическое подключение на окне … Приложение: Замена соединительного кабеля на приводе … A-I Режим вентиляции/тревоги … A-II Режим постоянной тревоги … A-III Режим вентиляции без функции тревоги … A-IV/V Декларации соответствия ЕС и декларации о соответствии компонентов … A-VI RU … IQ windowdrive … Символы и условные обозначения Символы и условные обозначения Предупреждающие указания В этой инструкции используются указания, предупреждающие о возможных повреждениях и травмах. X Прочитайте и всегда соблюдайте эти предупредительные указания. X Выполняйте все меры, помеченные предупредительным символом и предупредительным словом. Предупредительный Предупредительное Значение символ слово Опасности для людей. ОПАСНОСТЬ Несоблюдение ведет к летальному исходу или тяжелым травмам. Дополнительные символы и средства представления Для того чтобы указать на правильный способ обращения с устройством, важная информация и технические указания выделены особым образом. Символ Значение означает «важное указание» означает «дополнительная информация» X … Символ, обозначающий действие: от вас требуется выполнение определенных действий. X В случае нескольких действий соблюдайте их последовательность. Использование по назначению Целевая группа Данный документ предназначен для обученного специализированного персонала и пользователей электрических систем вентиляции, дымои теплоотводящих устройств (RWA/NRA/NRWG), которые были проинструктированы и обладают соответствующими знаниями о режимах работы и потенциальных опасностях установок. … Описание изделия Оконные приводы IQ windowdrive — это цепные (Slimchain, Powerchain) или шпиндельные (E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB) электроприводы для электромоторного открывания и закрывания или блокировки (Power lock) окон в фасадных и наклонных зонах. Они подходят для следующих областей применения: à открывающиеся внутрь и наружу нижнеподвесные, верхнеподвесные и боковые створки; à для ежедневной вентиляции и отвода воздуха; RU … Ответственность производителя за изделие IQ windowdrive à для использования в качестве отдельного привода (одинарный привод) или для установки в составе группы приводов (синхронные приводы) на одном окне; à рабочее напряжение 24 В пост. тока; à для использования в сухих помещениях во внутренней зоне, для E 250 NT AB также в защищенных наружных пространствах. … Ответственность производителя за изделие à В соответствии с определением понятия ответственности производителя в «Законе об ответственности за продукцию» необходимо учитывать информацию, содержащуюся здесь и в соответствующих инструкциях по монтажу изделия (информация об изделии, о его надлежащем и ненадлежащем использовании, о функциональном назначении, о техобслуживании и о необходимости информирования и инструктирования). При несоблюдении этих требований производитель снимает с себя ответственность за продукцию. à Монтаж, функциональное испытание и техобслуживание разрешается проводить только специалистам, авторизованным компанией GEZE. В случае самостоятельных изменений системы компания GEZE не берет на себя никакой ответственности за вытекающие из этого последствия. à При использовании вместе с устройствами других производителей GEZE не берет на себя гарантийных обязательств. Также для ремонта и техобслуживания использовать только оригинальные детали GEZE. à … Инструкции по технике безопасности Для обеспечения безопасности персонала важно соблюдать эти указания по технике безопасности. Необходимо хранить эти инструкции! … Общие указания по технике безопасности В соответствии с Директивой по машинам и механизмам 2006/42/ ЕС до ввода системы в эксплуатацию необходимо выполнить оценку рисков и снабдить установку маркировкой СЕ согласно Приложению III Директивы ЕС по машинам и механизмам. X Учитывать последнюю редакцию директив, стандартов и национальных предписаний, особенно это касается следующих документов: à BGV A1 «Предписание по предотвращению несчастных случаев, основные принципы предотвращения» à BGV A3 «Электроустановки и оборудования» à ASR A1.6 «Окна, фрамуги, светопроницаемые стены» à VDE (Союз немецких электротехников) 0100, часть 600 «Сооружение низковольтных электроустановок, часть 6. Испытания» à DIN EN 60335-1 «Безопасность бытовых электроприборов и приборов подобного назначения - часть 1: Общие требования» à DIN EN 60335-2-103 «Безопасность бытовых электроприборов и приборов подобного назначения - часть 2-103: Специальные требования для приводов дверей, ворот и окон» RU … IQ windowdrive Инструкции по технике безопасности à Данный продукт не предназначен для использования лицами, включая детей, с ограниченными физическими, сенсорными или умственными способностями, а также в случае недостатка опыта и/или знаний, за исключением случаев, когда они находятся под контролем людей, отвечающих за безопасность, или получили от них указания по использованию продукта. X Не позволять детям играть со стационарно установленными управляющими устройствами и/или управления и размещать пульты дистанционного управления вне досягаемости для детей. X Обеспечить нахождение людей, включая детей, на безопасном расстоянии, если задействуется выключатель с предварительной настройкой отключения или закрывается окно, которое было открыто системой дымо- и теплоотвода. X Обеспечить, чтобы было предотвращено защемление между приводимой деталью и окружающими ее деталями в результате ее открывания и закрывания. à При необходимости заменить соединительный кабель данного устройства это может сделать только квалифицированный электрик. При монтаже необходимо соблюдать следующее: à Для нижнеподвесных окон использовать подходящий фиксатор (например, предохранительных ножниц № 35 компании GEZE). à Для крепления допускается использование только оригинальных кронштейнов. à Для монтажа применять только подходящие крепежные элементы. Рекомендации приведены в инструкциях по монтажу. Обеспечить надежное удерживание смонтированных деталей крепежными элементами в профиле. … Безопасные работа и использование Оградить рабочее место от доступа посторонних лиц. Учитывать зону движения длинногабаритных компонентов системы. X Перед работами с электрическими системами отключить электропитание и проверить отсутствие напряжения. При использовании источника бесперебойного питания система находится под напряжением даже после отключения от сети. X При настройке активировать приводы только в кнопочном режиме. à Опасность травмирования двигающимися деталями при открытом приводе (затягивание волос, одежды и т.д.). à Опасность травмирования в местах возможного сдавливания, ударов, порезов и затягивания. à Опасность травмирования осколками стекла. à Прикосновение к оконной системе во время ее работы может привести к травмам. X X RU … Указания по монтажу … IQ windowdrive Указания по монтажу Неправильный монтаж может привести к серьезным травмам., поэтому необходимо соблюдать следующие инструкции: à Привод предназначен для монтажа на окнах, находящихся на высоте ≥ 2,5 м над уровнем доступа. à Согласно приведенным выше стандартам/правилам скорость закрывания должна быть менее … мм/с, если на самом окне не предпринято никаких других мер предосторожности или если окно установлено на уровне ниже 2,5 м (см. также с. … ASR A1.6). Настройка наших приводов на данную скорость производится на заводе. à При монтажной высоте менее 2,5 м над уровнем доступа соблюдайте следующее: à Используйте выключатель с предварительной настройкой отключения (переключатель). à Исполнительный элемент выключателей с предварительной настройкой отключения должен быть размещен в прямой видимости окна, однако на удалении от движущихся частей. Если ключевой выключатель не применяется, исполнительный элемент необходимо установить на высоте не менее 1,5 м в недоступном для посторонних людей месте. à Согласно EN60335-2-103 разд. … при монтажной высоте менее 2,5 м над уровнем доступа ход может быть установлен только на ≤200 мм. X Прочитайте и соблюдайте информацию в инструкции по монтажу и храните ее для дальнейшего использования. При монтаже необходимо самостоятельно проверить все размеры. à Привод предусмотрен исключительно для применения в сухих помещениях (на модели E 250 NT AB также в защищенном наружном пространстве), его нельзя подвергать воздействию среды с высокой опасностью образования коррозии (например, воздействию морского воздуха). X Для того чтобы предотвратить нанесение травм, необходимо надеть на выступающую резьбу крепежных винтов колпачки. X Проверить, соблюдаются ли в предусмотренном месте монтажа условия, указанные на фирменной табличке привода, например, температура окружающей среды и электрические данные. X Перед монтажом проверить, находится ли приводимая деталь в хорошем механическом состоянии, сбалансирована ли она по весу и легко ли она закрывается. X RU … „Обратите внимание, что сертификация действительна только в том случае, если контроль продукции соответствует требованиям действующего стандарта SKG-IKOB - AE 3104.“ IQ windowdrive … Прокладка проводов и электрическое подключение Прокладка проводов и электрическое подключение Использовать только кабели, указанные на схеме подключения. Тип кабелей, длину и поперечное сечение проводов выбирать в соответствии с техническими данными. X Для многожильной проводки всегда использовать изоляционные трубочки. X Неиспользуемые жилы необходимо изолировать. X В случае 24 В пост. тока и слишком длинной проводки кабель должен обладать достаточно большим поперечным сечением, чтобы не допустить падения напряжения. Рассчитать поперечное сечение (см.схему соединений для центральных постов системы дымо- и теплоотвода)! … Электрическое подключение на окне ОПАСНОСТЬ Опасность для жизни от поражения электрическим током. X Перед работами с электрической системой отключить электропитание, обеспечить защиту от повторного включения и проверить отсутствие напряжения. X Просьба соблюдать в этом случае соответствующие схемы подключения (от A-II до A-V), приложенные к данному документу. Установить на окне прилегающие приводы в соответствии с выбранным видом монтажа (см. инструкцию по монтажу). X Для работы в синхронном режиме и для работы с приводами запирания подключите все приводы окна в соединительной розетке. X См. A-I В случае дефекта можно заменить соединительный кабель привода. Просьба соблюдать в этом случае соответствующий информационный листок (A-I), приложенный к данному документу. Замену должен выполнять только квалифицированный электрик. RU … Проверка установленной системы … IQ windowdrive Проверка установленной системы à Провести и проверить меры по обеспечению безопасного прохода или предотвращению возможного сдавливания, ударов, порезов и затягивания, особенно в опасных местах на высоте менее 2,5 м. Одной из мер является, например, использование выключателя с предварительной настройкой отключения (например, выключатель вентиляции GEZE LTA-LSA, идент. № 118476). При наличии доступа детей или лиц с ограниченными умственными способностями необходимо использовать ключевой выключатель с предварительной настройкой отключения (например, GEZE идент. № 117996 для SCT, идент. № 090176 для цилиндров). Исполнительный элемент выключателей с предварительной настройкой отключения должен быть размещен в прямой видимости окна, однако на удалении от движущихся частей. Если ключевой выключатель не применяется, исполнительный элемент необходимо установить на высоте не менее 1,5 м в недоступном для посторонних людей месте. X После установки проверить правильность настройки системы, а также правильность и безопасность ее функционирования. X Проверить все функции, произведя пробный пуск. à По окончании монтажа конечный пользователь должен быть проинструктирован по всем важным операциям управления. … Ввод в эксплуатацию При первой подаче рабочего напряжения привод может работать как в направлении «ОТКРЫТО», так и в направлении «ЗАКРЫТО» (24 В A = +24 В, 24 В B = GND). Привод автоматически определяет и сохраняет положение закрывания окна при его первом закрывании. Необходимо убедиться, что для этого процесса не возникает никаких препятствий. Если при достижении положения закрывания привод реверсирует (привод открывается примерно на 15 мм), необходимо произвести пробный ввод в эксплуатацию, для этого действуйте следующим образом: X Откройте окно не менее чем на 100 мм. X Нажать на выключатель для закрывания окна (окно начинает закрываться). X Соединить провода «B» и «L» как минимум на … секунд. X Снова разъединить провода «B» и «L». После этого выполняется повторный ввод в эксплуатацию. В случае синхронных систем пробный ввод в эксплуатацию осуществляется вместе со всеми приводами. Параметрирование привода можно выполнить с помощью набора для ввода в эксплуатацию (ID 142586) и устройства программирования ST 220 (ID 087261). Более подробную информацию можно найти в инструкции к набору для ввода в эксплуатацию. RU … IQ windowdrive … Конфигурация привода для синхронного режима Конфигурация привода для синхронного режима К каждому окну возможно подключение до … оконных приводов и до … приводов запирания. По стандарту все приводы сконфигурированы на «Одиночный» режим. Поэтому для обеспечения синхронного режима перед монтажом все приводы следует переконфигурировать в соответствии с их использованием на окне. FA VA Slimchain, Powerchain X DIP (FA) Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT E 250 NT AB Оконный привод (E 250 NT, Slimchain, Powerchain) Привод запирания (Power lock) Power lock E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB Настроить число ведомых устройств на главном устройстве и указать адреса ведомых устройств. … 2 … ВЫКЛ ВЫКЛ ВЫКЛ (4) Привод главного устройства SOLO ВЫКЛ ВКЛ ВКЛ MASTER ВЫКЛ ВКЛ ВЫКЛ MASTER SLAVE SLAVE ВЫКЛ ВЫКЛ ВКЛ MASTER SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE … 2 … ВКЛ ВКЛ ВКЛ MASTER ВКЛ ВКЛ ВЫКЛ MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … ВКЛ ВЫКЛ ВКЛ MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … SLAVE (4) Привод ведомого устройства - SLAVE … DIP (VA) … 2 … Power lock ВКЛ ВКЛ ВЫКЛ VA … VA … ВКЛ ВЫКЛ ВКЛ VA … VA … SLAVE … Привод запирания RU … Режимы работы IQ windowdrive à Каждый адрес привода соответствующего окна разрешается задавать только один раз. à Важно для фурнитуры RWA 105 NT: DIP-переключатель … на E 250 NT используется для установки направления хода, DIP4= ВЫКЛ. Ò Окно «ОТКРЫТО» = выдвинуть шпиндель (нормальное состояние), DIP4= ВКЛ. Ò Окно «ОТКРЫТО» = втянуть шпиндель или окно «ЗАКРЫТО» = выдвинуть шпиндель (фурнитура RWA 105 NT). Для приводов, работающих в синхронном режиме, DIP … должен быть установлен одинаково на обоих приводах. 10 Режимы работы См. A-II Режим вентиляции/тревоги / управление посредством реле тревоги à При вентиляции: привод открывается со скоростью вентиляции до достижения хода вентиляции à При тревоге:  привод открывается со скоростью тревоги до достижения хода тревоги à Возможно наличие разных ходов для вентиляции и тревоги Режим постоянной тревоги привод открывается всегда со скоростью тревоги до достижения хода тревоги См. A-III Режим вентиляции без функции тревоги привод открывается всегда со скоростью вентиляции вплоть до заданного хода вентиляции См. A-IV, A-V Для цепных электроприводов ход вентиляции устанавливается на 300 мм. Ход вентиляции может быть параметрирован с помощью набора для ввода в эксплуатацию и устройства программирования ST 220. RU 10 IQ windowdrive 11 Техобслуживание Техобслуживание Компания GEZE предписывает регулярное проведение техобслуживания (не реже чем … раз в год). Оно должно проводиться квалифицированным специалистом. При этом необходимо проверить функционирование, а также состояние механических деталей (дисбаланс или признак износа, повреждение крепежных деталей) и электрических разъемов, а также защитных систем при наличии (подключение модуля IQ box Safety и сенсорной техники и при необходимости их зону действия). Во время ремонта и настройки запрещается использовать систему. X Перед началом работ по техобслуживанию отключить электропитание (24 В перем. тока), обеспечить защиту от повторного включения и проверить отсутствие напряжения. X Проверить крепления и зажимные винты на прочность. X При проведении техобслуживания очистить привод от загрязнений. Внимание: Опасность защемления и зажатия! Окно закрывается автоматически! Перед монтажом прочесть прилагаемые указания по технике безопасности и соблюдать их при монтаже и эксплуатации привода! Гарантийные требования предполагают проведение профессионального монтажа, установки и техобслуживания в соответствии с указаниями изготовителя. X X 12 В целях ознакомления выдать электрику данную схему подключения. Необходимо защитить привод от строительной грязи и струй воды. Утилизация оконной системы Оконная система состоит из материалов, которые должны быть сданы на вторичную переработку. Для этого необходимо отсортировать отдельные компоненты в соответствии с их материалом. à Алюминий (профили) à Железо (винты, цепь и пр.) à Пластмасса à Электронные компоненты (двигатель, система управления, трансформатор, реле и пр.) à Кабели X Утилизировать компоненты в соответствии с положениями законодательных актов. RU 11 Технические характеристики 13 IQ windowdrive Технические характеристики Приводы запирания Power lock Механические данные Сила открывания [Н] 600 Сила нажатия [Н] 600 Длина хода [мм] (см. заводскую табличку привода) макс. 22 Стандарт хода вентиляции * с возможностью параметризации 22 Скорость хода [мм/с] * с возможностью параметризации Открывание: 2* Открывание при тревоге: … Закрывание: 2* Отключение в конечном выдвинутом положении электр. посредством внутр. датчика перемещения Отключение в конечном задвинутом положении электронным способом посредством перемещения и нагрузки Отключение при перегрузке электр., электр. посредством потребл. тока Вес [кг] 0,8 Ход / длина привода [мм] 22 / 422 Уровень эмиссии звукового давления <70 дБ Электрические характеристики RU 12 Напряжение [В пост. тока] 24 +/-25% SELV Макс. остаточная пульсация U_ss [%] 20 Время включения [%] 30 Кратковременный режим [мин] … Потребляемая мощность [Вт] макс. 36 Потребление тока в режиме вентиляции [A] Потребление тока в режиме тревоги [A] 1,5: 24 В пост. тока 1,5: 18 В пост. тока Температура окружающей среды [°C] -5 / +70 Степень защиты [IP] / класс защиты IP 42 / III Область применения Сухие помещения Соединительный кабель … x 0,75 мм² Длина соединения … м, силиконовая оболочка IQ windowdrive Оконные приводы Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB 300 600 750 макс. 200 (зависит от хода) макс. 600 (зависит от хода) 750 300–800 600–1200 100–1000 300* 300* 100–1000* (зависит от хода) Открывание при вентиляции: 5* Открывание при вентиляции: 5* Открывание при тревоге: макс. 15 Открывание при тревоге: макс. 15 Закрывание: 5* Закрывание: 5* Открывание при вентиляции: 5* Открывание при тревоге: … (при ходе 500: 10) Закрывание: 5* электронным способом посредством внутреннего датчика перемещения электронным способом посредством перемещения и нагрузки электрическим, электронным способом посредством потребления тока 1,1–1,5 2,2–3,0 1,1–3,0 300 / 498 500 / 598 800 / 748 600 / 693 800 / 793 1200 / 993 100 / 384 150 / 434 200 / 484 230 / 514 300 / 584 500 / 784 750 / 1034 1000 / 1284 <70 дБ 24 +/-25% SELV 20 30 … 6 … макс. 22 макс. 36 макс. 22 макс. 27 (при ходе 500) 0,9: 24 В пост. тока 1,1: 18 В пост. тока 1,2: 24 В пост. тока 1,5: 18 В пост. тока 0,9: 24 В пост. тока 1,1: 24 В пост. тока (при ходе 500) 1,0: 18 В пост. тока 1,3: 18 В пост. тока (при ходе 500) IP 40 / III IP 40 / III -5 / +70 IP 65 / III Сухие помещения (E 250 NT AB: защищенное наружное пространство) … x 0,75 мм² … м, силиконовая оболочка Возможны технические изменения! RU 13 IQ windowdrive Заводская табличка для: Slimchain 24 В Powerchain E 250 NT Продукт Chain drive Slimchain Ид. №: Выпрямление Цвет параметрируемый ход: mm Ход mm Усилие Сеть Сер. № Made in Germany Мощность Дата производства: WW: Неделя изготовления JJ: Год изготовления Пример Slimchain Ид. № 147030 RU 14 только для конфигурируемых приводов IQ windowdrive RU 15 IQ windowdrive 目录 … 2 图标和显示元素 … 符合规定的使用 … 目标群体 … 产品说明 … 3 … 产品责任 … 安全提示 … 一般安全提示 … 有安全意识地工作和使用 … 5 … 安装提示 … 电缆敷设和电气连接 … 窗上的电气接口 … 7 … 9 10 11 12 13 检查所安装的设备 … 调试 … 为驱动装置配置同步运行 … 运行模式 … 10 维护 … 11 废弃处理窗户设备 … 11 技术参数 … 12 附录: ZH … 更换驱动装置的连接电缆 … A-I 运行方式 通风/报警 … A-II 永久警报模式运行方式 … A-III 无报警功能通风的运行方式 … A-IV/V 符合 Ec 标准和安装声明 … A-VI IQ windowdrive … 图标和显示元素 图标和显示元素 警告提示 本说明书中的警告提示旨在提醒可能出现的财产损失和人员受伤。 � 请始终阅读和遵守该警告提示。 � 请遵守所有已标记警告图标和警告语的步骤。 警告图标 警告语 危险 含义 人员受伤危险。 如不遵守则将导致死亡或严重伤害。 其它符号和含义 为说明正确的操作，对重要信息和技术信息进行重点介绍。 图标 含义 表示《重要提示》 表示《补充信息》 � 表示操作的图标：此时必须进行相应操作。 � 当有多个操作步骤时，请按顺序执行。 … 符合规定的使用 … 目标群体 本说明书目标群体为经过培训的专业人员，以及受过指导且能够运行电气通 风设备、排烟设备、排热设备 (RWA/NRA/NRWG) 和对于设备运行模式和潜在 危险具有相应知识的操作员。 … 产品说明 IQ windowdrive 是链式电动开窗器 (Slimchain, Powerchain) 或推杆式电 动开窗器 (E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB)，用于电动式开窗和关窗以及锁闭 (Power lock) 立面区域和斜立面区域内的窗户。 适合以下应用： à 内开式和外开式下悬、上悬和侧悬窗扇； à 适于用作日常通风和排气； ZH … IQ windowdrive 产品责任 à 适于用作窗户上的独立驱动器（单体式驱动器）或多重安装（同步驱动器） à 工作电压 24 V DC à 用于室内区域的干燥房间，E 250 NT AB 也用于受保护室外区域。 … 产品责任 à 根据《产品责任法》中规定的制造商对其产品负有的责任，必须遵守本说 明书中以及产品相应安装说明书中的信息（产品信息和符合规定的使用、 错误使用、产品性能、产品维护、通知义务和指示义务）。无视本《手册》中 的规定将免除制造商的责任义务。 à 仅允许由经过盖泽授权的专业人士安装、功能检查和维护作业。如果未经 授权擅自更改本设备，则盖泽对因此造成的损害不承担任何责任。 à 如果与第三方产品组合使用，则盖泽不承担保修责任。维修和保养时也只允许使 用盖泽原装零件。 à … 安全提示 为了确保人员安全，必须遵守该安全说明。请妥善保存本说明书！ … 一般安全提示 根据机械条例 2006/42/EC，设备调试前须进行风险分析，设备须根据欧盟机 械条例附录 III 配备 CE 标志。 X 必须遵守最新版本的指令、标准和本国法规， 尤其是须遵守： à BGV A1 《事故预防条例，事故预防总则》 à BGV A3 《电气设备和生产设备》 à ASR 第 A1.6 条规定《窗户、天窗、半透明墙》 à VDE 0100，第 600 部分《低压设备的安装 第 … 部分检查》 à DIN EN 60335-1《用于室内使用和类似用途的电气设备的安全 — 第 … 部分：一般要求》 à DIN EN 60335-2-103《用于室内使用和类似用途的电气设备的安全 — 第 2--103 部分：对大门、门窗门机的特殊要求 à 该产品不适合身体、感官或心理能力受限，或缺乏经验和/或知识的人群 使用（包括儿童），除非由负责其安全的人员对其实行监督，或针对如何使 用该产品提供指导。 ZH … IQ windowdrive 安全提示 不得将固定安装的调节装置和/或控制装置用做儿童玩具，请将遥控装置 存放在儿童无法触碰的位置。 X 在使用关闭预设装置操作开关时，或者当关闭被排烟和排热系统打开的 窗时，请疏散儿童等人群。 X 确定受驱动部件和周围部件的包围由于受驱动部件的开启和关闭移动得 到阻止。 à 如果须更换本设备的连接电缆，则须由专业电工执行更换。 X 在安装时注意： � 窗倾斜时，使用合适的限制安全装置（例如盖泽安全剪刀 35 号） � 为了固定仅允许使用原装托架。 � 安装时使用适当的固定元件。在安装说明书内可找到推荐产品。确保 型材中的固定元件能牢固固定所安装的部件。 … 有安全意识地工作和使用 避免未经授权的人员进入工作场所。 注意长设备部件的旋转范围。 X 对电气设备作业前断电并检查是否可通电。当使用不间断电源时， 即使断开电源，系统仍然是带电的。 X 安装时仅在点击模式下控制驱动装置。 à 在驱动器处于打开状态时，活动部件将导致受伤危险（卷入头发、 衣物等） à 由于无防护的挤压、碰撞、剪切和卷入的地方造成人员受伤危险。 à 因玻璃破碎所造成的受伤风险。 à 在运行期间抓握窗户设备可能会导致受伤。 X X ZH … IQ windowdrive 安装提示 … 安装提示 错误安装可能导致严重受伤，因此必须注意以下指南： à 驱动器应安装在窗户旁、且位于比接入层高 ≥ … m 的位置。 à 根据上述标准/条例，当在窗上不采取其它安全措施或当窗低于 … m 安 装时，闭门速度须低于 … mm/s（对此参见 ASR A1.6 第 … 页）。我们的 驱动装置在出厂时已设置到该速度。 à 安装高度低于接入层以上 … m 时请注意以下事项： à 使用带有关闭预设装置（按钮）的开关。 à 带有关闭预设装置的开关的操作元件必须安装在窗户直接视线范围 内，但要远离活动部件。如果不使用钥匙开关，则操作元件应位于至少 … m 高的地方，并且公众无法够到。 à 根据 EN60335-2-103 第 … 条款，在安装高度低于接入层以上 … m 的情形下，冲程仅可设置为 ≤200 mm。 X 阅读并遵守安装说明书内的内容， 妥善保管以备日后使用。所有尺寸在安 装时须自行负责检查。 à 驱动装置规定仅用于干燥室内（如果是 E 250 NT AB，也可以用于受保护室外 区域），不得暴露在强烈腐蚀性危险环境下（例如海洋空气）。 X 为避免受伤，必须在紧固螺丝的突出螺纹上安装保护帽。 X 检查是否遵守驱动装置铭牌上说明的条件， 诸如指定安装地点处的环境温 度和电气数据。 X 在安装前检查，所驱动的零件的机械状况是否良好、重量平衡并且容易关 闭。 X … “请注意，只有在产品控制符合适用的 SKG-IKOB - AE 3104 的要求时，认证才有效。“ 电缆敷设和电气连接 仅允许使用接线图中规定的电缆。技术规格中列有电缆类型、电缆长度、 电缆横截面信息。 X 针对所有绞合电缆请使用接线套筒。 X 对不使用的芯线进行绝缘。 X ZH … IQ windowdrive 电缆敷设和电气连接 24 V DC 和引线较长的情况下，须指出要足够大的横截面积，以预防电压 降。 计算横截面积（参见用于 RWA 中心的电缆图）！ … 窗上的电气接口 危险 触电可能导致生命危险。 X 在电气设备上进行工作前，必须先断开电源、锁定电源避免重启， 并检 查是否处于无电压状态。 � � � 请对此遵守本文档附录内随附接线图（A-II 至 A-V）。 按照所选安装方式（参见安装说明书）将平放驱动装置安装在窗上。 如果一个是同步运行模式，另一个是锁定驱动运行模式，则将一个窗口的 所有驱动装置连接到接线盒上。 驱动装置的连接电缆可在损坏的情况下进行更换。 请对此遵守本文档附录内随附说明表 （A-I）。 仅允许由专业电工执行更换。 参见 A-I ZH … 检查所安装的设备 … IQ windowdrive 检查所安装的设备 à 为了防止或避免挤压、碰撞、剪切和卷入的地方，特别须从危险地方下 … m 开始检查并执行措施。 例如使用带关预设功能开关（例如：盖泽通风开关 LTA-LSA ID：118476） 的措施。对于儿童或具有受限判断能力的人员，须使用带关预设功能的钥 匙开关（例如：盖泽针对 SCT 的 Id：117996，针对锁芯的 ID：090176）。 带有关闭预设装置的开关的操作元件必须安装在窗户直接视线范围内，但 要远离活动部件。如果不使用钥匙开关，则操作元件应位于至少 … m 高 的地方，并且公众无法够到。 X 安装后须检查设备是否已正确调节且正确和无危险得起作用。 X 通过测试运行检查所有功能。 à 在完成安装后，必须对最终用户就所有重要操作步骤进行指导。 … 调试 首次接通运行电压时，既可以朝着《打开》方向运行驱动装置，也可以朝着《关 闭》方向运行（24V A = +24V, 24V B = GND）。在首次关闭时，驱动装置自动 识别窗口的关闭位置，并存储该位置。 必须注意期间不存在障碍物。 如果驱动装置在到达关闭位置后反向运行（驱动装置打开约15 mm），则必须 启动试运行，操作方法如下： X 窗户至少打开 100 mm。 ZH … IQ windowdrive 为驱动装置配置同步运行 按开关关窗（窗开始关）。 将导线《B》和《L》至少连接 … 秒。 X 将 《B》 和 《L》 的连接重新断开。 现在重新进行调试行驶。 X X 对于同步系统，必须同时启动试运行所有驱动装置。 可利用盖泽调试箱 (ID 142586) 和 ST 220 参数设置器 (ID 087261) 对 该驱动器进行参数设置。关于更多信息，请查阅调试箱的说明书。 … 为驱动装置配置同步运行 每扇窗可以最多连接 … 个窗用驱动装置和 … 个锁闭驱动装置。标准情况 下，所有驱动装置配置成《单独》。同步运行时，安装每个驱动装置前须按照 其用途在窗上重新配置。 FA VA Slimchain, Powerchain X Power lock 窗用驱动装置 (E 250 NT, Slimchain, Powerchain) 锁闭驱动器 (Power lock) E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB 设置主驱动装置上从驱动装置的数量并记录从驱动装置地址。 ZH … IQ windowdrive 运行模式 DIP （FA） … 2 … Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT E 250 NT AB OFF OFF OFF (4) 主驱动装置 SOLO OFF ON ON MASTER OFF ON OFF MASTER SLAVE SLAVE OFF OFF ON MASTER SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE … 2 … ON ON ON MASTER ON ON OFF MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … ON OFF ON MASTER SLAVE … SLAVE … DIP （VA） … 2 … Power lock ON ON OFF VA … VA … ON OFF ON VA … VA … SLAVE (4) 从驱动装置 - SLAVE … SLAVE … 锁闭驱动装置 à 驱动装置的每个地址只对应一个窗口。 à 硬件系统RWA 105 NT的重要说明： E 250 NT上的DIP开关4用于设置运行方向，DIP4= OFF（关闭）Ò打开窗口 = 伸出螺杆（ 正常状态）， DIP4= On（打开）Ò打开窗口 = 收回螺杆或关闭窗口 = 伸出的螺杆（硬件 系统RWA 105 NT）。 对于处于同步运行模式的驱动装置而言，两个驱动装置上的DIP 4设置必须相同。 10 运行模式 运行模式 通风/警报/ 通过继电器触发警报 à 通风时： 驱动装置以通风速度开直到通风冲程 à 警报时： 驱动装置以警报速度开直到警报冲程 à 对于通风和警报可以有不同冲程。 参见 A-II 永久警报模式运行方式 驱动装置总是以 警报速度开，直到警报冲程 参见 A-III 无报警功能通风的运行方式 驱动装置总是以通风 速度开，直到所设置的通风冲程。 参见 A-IV，A-V 对于链条驱动装置，已经将通风冲程调至300 mm。借助调试箱和编程仪 ST 220 可以设定通风冲程的参数。 ZH 10 IQ windowdrive 11 维护 维护 盖泽规定定期维护（至少每年 … 次）。须由专业人员执行此操作。并且，必 须检查功能以及机械机构的状态（不平衡或磨损迹象，固定部件的损坏）和 电气连接以及安全系统（IQ box Safety 和传感器的连接及其检测范围）， 如果存在的话。修理和调整作业期间不得使用设备。 X 在开始维护工作之前请断开电源 (24 V DC)、锁定电源避免重启， 并检查是否处于无电压状态。 X 检查固定件和紧固螺丝是否牢固。 X 对驱动装置维护时清洁杂物。 注意：挤压和夹住危险！ 窗自动关闭！ 安装前，请阅读随附的安全提示，并在安装和操作驱动器时遵守 此安全提示！保修是以按照制造商说明进行专业装配、安装和维 护为前提的。 � � 12 请提交本接线图，以便于为电工提供相应信息。 防止驱动装置遭受脏污和溅水。 废弃处理窗户设备 本窗户设备由可回收材料组成，废弃处理时应予以回收。为此，应按照材料类 型对单个组件进行分类。 à 铝（型材） à 铁（螺栓、链条、...） à 塑料 à 电子零件（电机、控制装置、变压器、继电器、 … ） à 电缆 X 根据法律规定废弃处理部件。 ZH 11 IQ windowdrive 技术参数 13 技术参数 锁闭驱动器 Power lock 机械数据 拉力[N] 压力 [N] ZH 12 600 600 冲程长度 [mm] （参见驱动装置铭牌） 标准通风冲程 * 可参数设置 最大 22 22 冲程速度[mm/s] * 可参数设置 打开：2* 警报开：5 关闭：2* 已伸出终端位置断开装置 通过内置冲程传感器电子方式 已伸入终端位置断开装置 通过冲程和负载，电子方式 过载断路 通过耗电量的电子方式 重量 [kg] … 驱动装置冲程/长度[mm] 22 / 422 排放声压级 电气数据 <70 dB 电压 [V DC] 24 +/-25% SELV 最高残余波度 U_ss [%] 20 额定负载 [%] 30 短期运行[min] … 功率消耗 [W] 最大 36 通风驱动器耗电量 [A] 警报运行耗电量 [A] … ：24V DC 1,5: 18V DC 环境温度 [°C] -5 / +70 防护形式[IP]/防护等级 IP 42 / III 应用领域 干燥室内 连接电缆 … x … mm² 接线长度 … m，表面涂硅 IQ windowdrive 窗驱动装置 Slimchain Powerchain E 250 NT, E 250 NT AB 300 最大 200 （取决于冲程） 600 最大 600 （取决于冲程） 750 750 300 - 800 300* 600 - 1200 300* 100 - 1000 100-1000* （取决于冲程） 通风开：5* 警报开：最大 15 关闭：5* 通风开：5* 警报开：最大 15 关闭：5* 通风开：5* 警报开：7 （针对冲程 500：10) 关闭：5* 通过内置冲程传感器电子方式 通过冲程和负载，电子方式 通过耗电量的电子方式 … - … - … - … 300 / 498 500 / 598 800 / 748 600 / 693 800 / 793 1200 / 993 100 / 384 150 / 434 200 / 484 230 / 514 300 / 584 500 / 784 750 / 1034 1000 / 1284 <70 dB 24 +/-25% SELV 20 30 … 6 … 最大 22 最大 36 最大 22 最大 27 （针对冲程 500） … ：24V DC 1,1: 18V DC … ：24V DC 1,5: 18V DC … ：24V DC 1,1: 24V DC（针对冲程 500） … ：18V DC 1,3: 18V DC（针对冲程 500） IP 40 / III IP 40 / III -5 / +70 IP 65 / III 干燥室内（E 250 NT AB：受保护室外区域） … x … mm² … m，表面涂硅 保留技术变更权利！ ZH 13 IQ windowdrive ZH 14 Power lock 4. 3. Slimchain Powerchain 4. 3. E 250 NT A-I MBZ 300, THZ 24V A 24V B Signal LIN A-II GND +24V - +24V GND - GND +24V +24V - +24V GND - MBZ 300, THZ 24V A 24V B Signal LIN GND +24V +24V - +24V GND GND - A-III 24V DC, 2A z. B. GEZE E 48 (ID: 87776) LTA-LSA (ID: 118476) 230V AC A-IV 24V A 24V B Signal LIN GND +24V - +24V GND - LTA-24-AZ (ID: 129393) YE GN BN RD BK IQ gear WH (ID: 151959) 230V AC STOP 24V A 24V B Signal LIN +24V GND 12V - +24V GND 18V - +24V GND 6V A-V Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn Scandinavia – Finland GEZE Scandinavia AB Filial Finland E-Mail: finland@geze.com www.geze.fi GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn Scandinavia – Latvia GEZE Scandinavia AB Latvijas filiāle E-Mail: latvia@geze.com www.geze.lv France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Scandinavia – Lithuania GEZE Scandinavia AB Filial Lietu. E-Mail: lithuania@geze.com www.geze.lt Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l. Unipersonale E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru Scandinavia – Estonia GEZE Scandinavia AB eesti filial E-Mail: estonia@geze.com www.geze.ee Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax: 0049 7152 203 310 info@geze.com www.geze.com Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Türkiye GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com